PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 3 - schuylercounty.us

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 3 Division 21 – Fire Suppression

through

Division 33 - Utilities

Village of Watkins Glen - Clute Park Redevelopment

The Village of Watkins Glen, by its agent, the County of Schuyler

NY Route 414, Fourth Street Watkins Glen, NY 14891

LWRP Project Seneca 01 C1000968 LWRP Project Seneca 02 C1001169 NYS Ofc. of Parks, Rec. & Hist. Pres. EPF-164109 Downtown Revitalization Initiative C1001301 Stantec Project No.: 19156455

Stantec Consultant Services, Inc. 61 Commercial St., Suite 100 Rochester, NY 14614

Phone: 585-475-1440 Fax: 585-272-1814 www.stantec.com

May 7, 2020 Issued for Bid

Copyright 2020 Stantec Consulting Services, Inc. All rights reserved

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP C164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

SEALS PAGE 000107 - 1

DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE

1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

A. Architect:

1. Thomas H. Castelein2. NYS# 0202503. Responsible for Divisions 01-49 Sections except

where indicated as prepared by other designprofessionals of record.

B. Civil Engineer:

1. Michael D. Mantell2. NYS# 0888833. Responsible for Sections 024116, 221113,

221313, and Division 31 and 33 Sections exceptwhere indicated as prepared by other designprofessionals of record.

C. Splash Pad and Ice Rink Engineer:

1. James R. Maland2. NYS# 0849033. Responsible for Division 13 Sections except

where indicated as prepared by other designprofessionals of record.

D. Landscape Architect:

1. Gary T. Sorge2. NYS# 0014713. Responsible for Section 015639 and Division 32

Sections.

E. Structural Engineer:

1. Michael J. Simmons.2. NYS# 0748083. Responsible for Sections 031000, 032000,

033000, 051200, 051213, 053100, 054000, 055000, 061516.

F. Fire-Protection & Plumbing Engineer:

1. Joseph H. Pawell

tewen

Image

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP C164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

SEALS PAGE 000107 - 2

2. NYS# 0964463. Responsible for Divisions 21 and 22 Sections

except where indicated as prepared by otherdesign professionals of record.

G. HVAC Engineer:

1. Timothy A. Howe2. NYS# 0951073. Responsible for Division 23 Sections and work

under Sections 089116 and 089119 related toDivision 23.

H. Electrical Engineer:

1. Jeri A. Pickett2. NYS# 0736713. Responsible for Divisions 26-28 Sections and

work under Section 078413 related to Divisions26-28.

END OF SECTION 000107

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF-164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 000101 Title Pages (Cover) 000107 Seals Page 000110 Table of Contents 000115 List of Drawings BIDDING REQUIREMENTS – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 001113 Advertisement for Bids 002113 Instructions to Bidders 002213 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 003132 Geotechnical Data 004116-0C Bid Form C – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-0E Bid Form E – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-0M Bid Form M – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-0P Bid Form P – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 004116-1 Supplemental Bid Forms and Certificates 004313 Bid Security Forms CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 006000 General Conditions and Project Forms 006000-1 A201 – 2017 General Conditions of the Contract Rev. 10-2018 006000-2 NYS Office of Parks, Recreation and Historic Preservations Attachment A-1 Requirements 006000-3 Prevailing Wage Schedule for Article 8 Public Work Project 006000-4 Electronic Exchange Agreement 006100-0 Supplementary Conditions



SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – All Prime Contracts Section Number and Title 011000 Summary 011200 Multiple Contract Summary 012200 Unit Prices 012300 Alternates 012500 Substitution Procedures 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013233 Photographic Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 024116 Structure Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 031000 Concrete Forming and Accessories 032000 Concrete Reinforcing 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete



DIVISION 04 – MASONRY: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 0422000 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 – METALS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 051200 Structural Steel Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055116 Alternating Tread Steel Stairs DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 061000 Rough Carpentry 061063 Exterior Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 072100 Thermal Insulation 072419 Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) 072500 Weather Barriers 074113.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 074293 Soffit Panels 074646 Fiber-Cement, Concrete and Resin Siding 077100 Roof Specialties 077253 Snow Guards 078413 Penetration Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames



081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Frames 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 085113 Aluminum Windows 087111 Door Hardware 087113 Automatic Door Operators 088000 Glazing 089116 Operable Wall Louvers 089119 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 09 – FINISHES: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 092900 Gypsum Board Systems 093013 Ceramic Tiling 095113 Acoustic Panel Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096566 Resilient Athletic Flooring 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 101419 Dimensional Letter Signage 101423.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 102113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets 104416 Fire Extinguishers

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 114000 Food Service Equipment DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS: C GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 122413 Roller Window Shades 123661.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 124813 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames



DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section Number and Title 130505 Splash Pad Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: E - Electrical Contract 130519 Splash Pad Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables: E – Electrical Contract 130526 Splash Pad Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: E – Electrical Contract 130533 Splash Pad Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems: E – Electrical Contract 131113 Splash Pad General: G – General Construction Contract 131118 Splash Pad Recreation Equipment: G – General Construction Contract 131213 Splash Pad Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Specialties: P – Plumbing Contract 131800 Ice Rink General: M – Mechanical Contract 131813.02 Ice Rink Floor – Portable Surface: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.01 Ice Rink Refrigeration General: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.05 Premanufactured Air-Cooled Chiller: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.15 Refrigeration System Insulation: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.16 Ice Rink Piping Specialties: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.17 Ice Rink Piping and Fittings: M- Mechanical Contract 131814.18 Ice Rink Valves: M- Mechanical Contract 131815.01 Ice System – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: E - Electrical Contract 131815.02 Ice System – Electrical Raceways and Fittings: E - Electrical Contract 131815.03 Ice System – Wires and Cables: E - Electrical Contract 131815.04 Ice System – Motors: M - Mechanical Contract 131815.08 Ice System – Electrical Testing: E - Electrical Contract 131816 Ice Rink Railings: G – General Construction Contract DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION: P – PLUMBING CONTRACT Section Number and Title 210517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire Suppression Piping 210518 Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping 210523 General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping 210529 Hangers and Supports for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment 210553 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment 211119 Fire Department Connections 211313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING: P – PLUMBING CONTRACT (unless noted otherwise) Section Number and Title 220513 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 220516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 220517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 220518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping



220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 220523.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 220523.14 Check Valves for Plumbing Piping 220523.15 Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 220800 Commissioning of Plumbing 221113 Facility Water Distribution: G – General Construction Contract 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221123.21 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps 221313 Facility Sanitary Sewers: G – General Construction Contract 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 221319.13 Sanitary Drains 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 223300 Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters 223400 Fuel-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters 224213.13 Commercial Water Closets 224213.16 Commercial Urinals 224216.13 Commercial Lavatories 224216.16 Commercial Sinks 224223 Commercial Showers 224713 Drinking Fountains DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC): M – MECHANCIAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 230519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 230523.12 Ball Valves for HVAC Piping 230523.14 Check Valves for HVAC Piping 230523.15 Gate Valves for HVAC Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548.13 Vibration Controls for HVAC 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 230923 Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC 230923.11 Control Valves 230923.12 Control Dampers



230923.14 Flow Instruments 230923.16 Gas Instruments 230923.19 Moisture Instruments 230923.22 Position Instruments 230923.23 Pressure Instruments 230923.27 Temperature Instruments 230923.43 Weather Stations 232113 Hydronic Piping 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 233600 Air Terminal Units 233713.13 Air Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 235216 Condensing Boilers 236313 Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 237313.13 Indoor, Basic Air-Handling Units 238236 Finned-Tube Radiation Heaters 238239.13 Cabinet Unit Heaters 238239.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL: E – ELECTRICAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 260519 Low Voltage Wire 260523 Control – Voltage Electrical Power Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Supports 260533 Raceways and Boxes 260553 Identification 260923 Lighting Controls 262200 Low-Voltage Transformers 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262813 Fuses 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 262913.03 Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers 264313 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 265100 Interior Lighting 265619 Exterior Lighting



DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS: E – ELECTRICAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY: E – ELECTRICAL CONTRACT Section Number and Title 284621.11 Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK: G – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 311000 Site Clearing & Erosion Control 312000 Earth Moving 312319 Dewatering 315000 Excavation Support and Protection DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS: G – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 321216 Asphalt Paving 321313 Concrete Paving 323300 Site Furnishings 329113 Soil Preparation 329200 Turf and Grasses 329300 Plants DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES: G – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Section Number and Title 334200 Stormwater Conveyance 334600 Subdrainage

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 C1000968

Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 C1001169

Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF-164109

Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI C1001301

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 000115 - 1

DOCUMENT 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of

Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled Issued for Bid, dated May 7, 2020, as

modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.

B. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of

type indicated:

1. General

a. G-000 TITLE SHEET

b. G-001 DRAWING LIST

c. G-021 CODE ANALYSIS & LIFE SAFETY PLANS

2. Civil

a. C-001 NOTES

b. C-002 LOGISTICS PLAN

c. CG-100 GRADING PLAN

d. CU-100 UTILITY PLAN

e. C-500 DETAILS

f. C-501 DETAILS

g. C-502 DETAILS

3. Landscape Architecture

a. L-001 REMOVALS PLAN

b. L-100 LAYOUT, MATERIALS & PLANTING PLAN

c. L-200 SITE DETAILS

4. Splash Pad

a. Q-101 SPLASH PAD LAYOUT PLAN

b. Q-102 SPLASH PIPING PLAN

c. Q-103 SPLASH PAD-WATER SERVICE ROOM PLANS & SECTIONS

d. Q-501 SPLASH PAD DETAILS

e. Q-502 SPLASH PAD DETAILS

f. QE-101 SPLASH PAD SITE ELECTRICAL PLAN

g. QE-102 SPLASH PAD EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING PLAN

5. Ice Rink

a. R-101 ICE RINK PIPING PLAN

b. R-102 ICE RINK EQUIPMENT BUILDING LAYOUT PLAN

c. R-103 ICE RINK INSULATION/PLYWOOD LAYER PLAN (ALT. BID No. 2)

d. R-501 ICE RINK DETAILS

e. R-502 AIR COOLED CHILLER PACKAGE SECTIONS (ALT. BID No. 1)

f. R-503 ICE RINK DETAILS (ALT. BID No. 2)

g. R-601 SECONDARY REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM






6. Structural

a. S-000 GENERAL NOTES

b. S-001 SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES

c. S-002 COLUMN LAYOUT PLAN – PAVILION & BATH HOUSE

d. S-100 FOUNDATION PLANS

e. S-120 PAVILION FRAMING PLANS

f. S-121 ROOF FRAMING PLANS

g. S-200 FRAMING ELEVATIONS

h. S-300 TYPICAL DETAILS

i. S-301 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS

j. S-310 TYPICAL DETAILS

k. S-311 FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS

l. S-312 FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS

7. Architecture

a. A-001 LEGENDS, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, GENERAL NOTES

b. A-101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN

c. A-102 MECH PLATFORM & BATH HOUSE ROOF PLAN

d. A-103 ROOF PLAN

e. A-104 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING PLAN

f. A-110 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

g. A-111 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING REFLECTED CEILING PLANS

h. A-141 FINISH PLAN & SCHEDULE

i. A-201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

j. A-202 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

k. A-301 BUILDING SECTIONS

l. A-310 PAVILION WALL SECTIONS

m. A-311 PAVILION WALL SECTIONS

n. A-312 BATHHOUSE WALL SECTIONS

o. A-313 ICE MECHANICAL BUILDING WALL SECTIONS

p. A-321 SECTION DETAILS

q. A-322 SECTION DETAILS

r. A-401 ENLARGED PLANS

s. A-402 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS

t. A-501 PLAN DETAILS

u. A-502 PLAN DETAILS

v. A-503 TYPICAL EFIS DETAILS

w. A-504 TYPICAL METAL ROOF DETAILS

x. A-505 MILLWORK DETAILS

y. A-601 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS

z. A-602 PARTITION TYPES AND DETAILS

8. Fire Protection

a. FP-000 FIRE PROTECTION LEAD SHEET

b. FP-101 FIRE PROTECTION FIRT FLOOR COVERAGE PLAN

c. FP-201 FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR PLAN

d. FP-202 FIRE PROTECTION PLATFORM PLAN

e. FP-500 FIRE PROTECTION DETAILS

f. FP-600 FIRE PROTECTION SCHEDULES






9. Plumbing

a. P-000 PLUMBING LEAD SHEET

b. P-100 PLUMBING UNDERGROUND PLAN

c. P-101 PLUMBING FIRST FLOOR PLAN

d. P-102 PLUMBING PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

e. P-400 PLUMBING ENLARGED PLANS

f. P-500 PLUMBING DETAILS 1

g. P-501 PLUMBING DETAILS 2

h. P-502 PLUMBING DETAILS 3

i. P-600 PLUMBING SCHEDULES

j. P-601 PLUMBING SCHEDULES

k. P-700 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 1

l. P-701 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 2

m. P-702 PLUMBING RISER DIAGRAMS 3

10. Mechanical

a. M-000 MECHANICAL LEAD SHEET

b. MH-101 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK FIRST FLOOR PLAN

c. MH-102 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

d. MP-101 MECHANICAL PIPING FIRST FLOOR PLAN

e. MP-102 MECHANICAL PIPING PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

f. M-300 MECHANICAL SCHEMATICS

g. M-400 MECHANICAL ENLARGED PLANS

h. M-500 MECHANICAL DETAILS 1

i. M-501 MECHANICAL DETAILS 2

j. M-502 MECHANICAL DETAILS 3

k. M-600 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 1

l. M-601 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 2

m. M-800 CONTROLS SYMBOLS AND ARCHITECTURE

n. M-801 CONTROLS SCHEMATICS

o. M-802 CONTROLS SCHEMATICS

p. M-803 CONTROLS SHCEMATICS

11. Electrical

a. E-000 ELECTRICAL LEAD SHEET

b. EL-101 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING FIRST FLOOR PLAN

c. EL-102 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

d. EP-101 ELECTRICAL POWER FIRST FLOOR PLAN

e. EP-102 ELECTRICAL POWER PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

f. ES-101 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS FIRST FLOOR PLAN

g. ES-102 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PLATFORM & LOW ROOF PLAN

h. ESP-101 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN

i. E-300 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS

j. E-500 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

k. E-501 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

l. E-502 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

m. E-503 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

n. E-504 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

o. E-600 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES






p. E-601 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES


Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 - C1000968

Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 - C1001169


Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI - C1001301

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 - 1

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.

2. Stack-sleeve fittings.

3. Sleeve-seal systems.

4. Sleeve-seal fittings.

5. Grout.

6. Silicone sealants.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop.





SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair

leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.






ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518 - 1

SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise

indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Stainless-Steel Type: With polished stainless-steel finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed and exposed-

rivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners.





ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern.

b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece steel with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece stamped steel or split-plate,

stamped steel with exposed-rivet hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-

plated finish.


A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.






GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION

PIPING

210523 - 1

SECTION 210523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION

PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Iron butterfly valves with indicators.

2. Check valves.

3. Iron OS&Y gate valves.

4. Trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NRS: Non-rising stem.

B. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

C. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.






PIPING

210523 - 2

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings

listed below and shall bear UL mark:

1. Fire Main Equipment: HAMV - Main Level

a. Indicator Posts, Gate Valve: HCBZ - Level 1

b. Ball Valves, System Control: HLUG - Level 3

c. Butterfly Valves: HLXS - Level 3

d. Check Valves: HMER - Level 3

e. Gate Valves: HMRZ - Level 3

2. Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices: VDGT - Main Level

a. Valves, Trim and Drain: VQGU - Level 1

B. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed

below:

1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:

a. Indicator posts.

b. Valves.

1) Gate valves.

2) Check valves

3) Miscellaneous valves.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.

2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

D. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.






PIPING

210523 - 3

E. NFPA Compliance for valves:

1. Comply with NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 20, and NFPA 24.

F. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher, as

required by system pressures.

G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and drain

valves.

2. Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves.

3. Hand lever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 and smaller.

2.2 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Anvil International.

2. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

3. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

4. Victaulic Company.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type),

Class Number 112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating.

4. Seat Material: EPDM.

5. Stem: Stainless steel.

6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM or SBR coated.

7. Actuator: Worm gear.

8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.

9. Body Design: Lug or wafer Grooved-end connections.

2.3 CHECK VALVES



1. Anvil International.


3. Viking Corporation.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=9227

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457162025













PIPING

210523 - 4

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210.


3. Type: Single swing check.

4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze.

5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless steel with elastomeric seal.

6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel.

7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless steel.

8. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel.

9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.

2.4 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES



1. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

2. NIBCO INC.


B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y-

and NRS-type gate valves).


3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

6. Stem: Brass or bronze.

7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.

8. Supervisory Switch: External.

9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.

2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

c. WATTS.

2. Description:














PIPING

210523 - 5

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

b. Body Design: Two piece.

c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.

d. Port size: Full or standard.

e. Seats: PTFE.

f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.

g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

h. Actuator: Hand lever.

i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2-1/2: Threaded ends.

j. End Connections for Valves NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve-installation requirements

and applications:

1. Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in wet-pipe, fire-

suppression sprinkler systems.

B. water supply, except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs,

indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install double-check valve assembly in each fire-protection water-supply connection.

D. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to

allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

Provide separate support where necessary.






PIPING

210523 - 6

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.

F. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

G. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 210553 "Identification for Fire-

Suppression Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules and signs on surfaces

concealing valves; and the NFPA standard applying to the piping system in which valves are

installed. Install permanent identification signs indicating the portion of system controlled by

each valve.






HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

210529 - 1

SECTION 210529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.

4. Fastener systems.

5. Equipment supports.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following:



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.


A. Welding certificates.






EQUIPMENT

210529 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for fire-suppression piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 203.

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: Factory-fabricated components, NFPA approved, UL listed, or FM approved

for fire-suppression piping support.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot-dip galvanized.

3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from

structural-carbon-steel shapes, with NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved carbon-steel

hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.






EQUIPMENT

210529 - 3

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved threaded-steel stud,

for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, insert-wedge-

type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated steel.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: NFPA-approved, UL-listed, or FM-approved, welded, shop- or field-fabricated

equipment support, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-

shrink and nonmetallic grout, suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.






EQUIPMENT

210529 - 4

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with installation requirements of approvals and

listings. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support

piping from building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of

parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Install in accordance

with approvals and listings.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install in

accordance with approvals and listings.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.






EQUIPMENT

210529 - 5

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.






EQUIPMENT

210529 - 6

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shop-

painted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.






EQUIPMENT

210529 - 7

B. Comply with NFPA requirements for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finishes.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for

general service applications.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise

indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no

insulation is required.

3. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

4. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of

non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

5. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


6. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements.

I. Building Attachments: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and

except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:






EQUIPMENT

210529 - 8

1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

3. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

J. Saddles and Shields: Comply with NFPA requirements. Unless otherwise indicated and except

as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Comply with NFPA requirements for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

L. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.






IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 1

SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Valve tags.

5. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment

hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.

3. Background Color: White.

4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.






5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the

size of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number or

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16-

inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal

lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.






B. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

C. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

D. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. Background Color: Safety Red.

2. Letter Color: White.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain beaded chain or S-hook.

3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red.

4. Letter Color: White.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Safety Yellow background with black lettering.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well

as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification

devices.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be installed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,

mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.






3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves

in a valve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar

to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 1-1/2 inches, round.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.






FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 211119 - 1

SECTION 211119 – FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-type fire-department connections.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION



1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet.

2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

3. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

B. Standard: UL 405.

C. Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.

D. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

E. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.









FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 211119 - 2

F. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes

and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices

or clappers.

G. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.

H. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.

I. Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.

J. Number of Inlets: Two.

K. Finish: Rough brass or bronze.

L. Outlet Size: NPS 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fire-department connections.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression standpipe system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-department connection installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type fire-department connections.

B. Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.






WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Cover system for sprinkler piping.

3. Specialty valves.

4. Sprinklers.

5. Alarm devices.

6. Pressure gauges.

7. Backflow Preventers

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 211119 "Fire Department Connections" for exposed-, flush-, and yard-type fire

department connections.

2. Section 210523 "General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping" for

ball, butterfly, check, gate, post-indicator, and trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure of 175-psig maximum.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.






C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

C. Design Data:

1. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13,

that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic

calculations if applicable.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field Test Reports:

1. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as

described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for

Aboveground Piping."

2. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

F. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with

space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of

sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with

sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.







A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems

and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering

responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with

NFPA 13.

C. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

D. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Contractor shall perform hydrant flow test for use in developing hydraulic calculations.

2. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including

losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

b. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

1) Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

2) Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

3) General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

4) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

5) Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

6) Restaurant Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.






b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

4. Maximum protection area per sprinkler according to UL listing.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Schedule 40, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe

ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A135/A135M or ASTM A795/A795M, Schedule 10 in

NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.

C. Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M,

standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

D. Galvanized- and Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A865/A865M, threaded.

E. Galvanized and Uncoated, Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 150,

standard pattern.

F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type

gaskets.

2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M and ASME B16.9.

1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials

appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

J. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Anvil International.

b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

c. Victaulic Company.










2. Pressure Rating: 300-psig minimum.

3. Painted Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron

casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,

EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

B. Pressure Rating:

1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig minimum.

2. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 300-psig.

C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

D. Size: Same as connected piping.

E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Alarm Valves:


following:

a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).

c. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

d. Victaulic Company.

e. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 193.

3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.

4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure

gauges, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.

5. Drip cup assembly pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping

6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:


following:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).
















3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.

4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.

5. Size: NPS 3/4.

6. End Connections: Threaded.

2.4 AIR VENT

A. Automatic Air Vent Assembly:


following:

a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.

b. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

c. South-Tek Systems, LLC.

2. Description: Automatic dual air vent assembly that automatically vents trapped air

without human intervention, including Y-strainer and ball valve in a pre-piped assembly.

3. Standard: UL listed or FM Global approved for use in wet-pipe fire sprinkler system.

4. Vents oxygen continuously from system.

5. Float valve to prevent water discharge.

6. Minimum Water Working Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

2.5 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


following:


b. Anvil International.




3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.

4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
















B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


following:


b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).



2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved.

C. Branch Line Testers:


following:


b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

d. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

e. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International.



4. Body Material: Brass.


6. Inlet: Threaded.

7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


following:


b. Triple R Specialty.



e. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."
























4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.


6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:


following:

a. Aegis Technologies, Inc.

b. CECA, LLC.

c. CPS Products, Inc.

d. Merit Manufacturing.



4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.


6. Length: Adjustable.

7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

F. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:


following:

a. ALEUM USA.

b. FlexHead Industries, Inc.



3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to

ceiling grid.


5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

2.6 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).

3. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.


5. Viking Corporation.

B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."





















C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.

D. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 300 psig.

E. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by

application.

F. Sprinkler Finishes: Bronze.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

H. Sprinkler Guards:


following:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).



d. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

4. Guard to match sprinkler head manufacturer.

2.7 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Electrically Operated Notification Appliances:


following:

a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.

b. Notifier.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

2. Electric Bell:

a. Standard: UL 464.

b. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.

c. Size: 10-inch diameter.















d. Voltage: 120 V ac, 60 Hz, 1 phase or 24 V dc.

e. Finish: Red-enamel or polyester powder-coat factory finish, suitable for outdoor

use with approved and listed weatherproof backbox.

C. Water-Flow Indicators:


following:

a. ADT Security Services, Inc.

b. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

c. System Sensor.


3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.

4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and

auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-

adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal

if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated.


7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

D. Pressure Switches:


following:

a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

b. System Sensor.

c. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.

4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches:


following:

a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.

b. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

d. System Sensor.


3. Type: Electrically supervised.



















4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.



application.

2.8 PRESSURE GAUGES


following:

1. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.

2. AMETEK, Inc.

3. Ashcroft Inc.

4. Brecco Corporation.

5. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gauge Range: 0 to 300 psig.

E. Label: Include "WATER" label on dial face.

2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Detector, Fire-Protection Backflow Preventer Assemblies:


following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand.

b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. WATTS.

d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standards: ASSE 1047 and UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or FM

Global's "Approval Guide."

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.

5. Size: 4 NPS.

6. Design Flow Rate: 500 gpm.

7. Body Material: Stainless steel.

8. End Connections: Flanged.

9. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.

10. Accessories:
















a. Valves: UL 262 and FM Global's "Approval Guide" listing; OS&Y gate type with

flanged ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection.

c. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-pressure

backflow preventer.

B. Backflow Preventer Test Kits:


following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand.


c. WATTS.

d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-

procedure instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system

design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with

requirements for interior piping in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gauge, drain, and other accessories indicated

at connection to water-distribution piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gauge, and drain at connection to water supply.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.










1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from

authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from

approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates

ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in

pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,

and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when

sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to

drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and

spill over floor drain or to outside building.

J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

K. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of

each standpipe. Include pressure gauges with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-

metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to

permit removal and install where they are not subject to freezing.

L. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

M. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-

Suppression Piping."

O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression

Piping."






3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings

that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for

aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water

service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes

and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for

galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and

grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and

grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,

and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.






B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water

supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs

indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of

check valves in potable-water-supply sources.

D. Specialty Valves:

1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.

2. Install alarm valves with bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line

connection.

3. Install deluge valves in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main supply

to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip

valves, pressure gauges, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

E. Air Vent:

1. Provide at least one air vent at high point in each wet-pipe sprinkler system in accordance

with NFPA 13 requirements. Connect vent into top of fire sprinkler piping.

2. Provide dielectric union for dissimilar metals, ball valve, and strainer upstream of

automatic air vent.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or

sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling

grid.

3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks.

Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to

flooding.

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.






3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any

sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight

steel pipe with grooved ends, grooved-end fittings, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and grooved

joints.






B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified

fittings.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings;

and threaded joints.

D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for

steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

E. Sprinkler drain piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded

fittings; and threaded joints.

3.13 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

1. See sprinkler head schedule on plans.






COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 1

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current

power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped

separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.





COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 2

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)






EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 1

SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flexible-hose packless-expansion joints.

2. Alignment guides and anchors.

3. Pipe loops and swing connections.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide, including analysis data,

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and

for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and

methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end

connections, and location for each expansion joint.




A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.







A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according

to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures,

and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.

2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:



the following:

a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

b. Flex-Pression.

c. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible-

metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of

flexible hose.

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.

4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with

solder-joint end connections.

a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340

psig at 450 deg F ratings.

5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with

threaded end connections.

2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:












the following:

a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

b. Flexicraft Industries.

c. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer

cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding slider for bolting to

pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.

2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A183, steel hex head.

3. Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers.

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for

application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened

portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Bonding Material: ASTM C881/C881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy

resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be

installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless

otherwise indicated.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or

compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.










B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in

main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including

tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,

including tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install one guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to

expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9

and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,

Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with

ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.

2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow

fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.


3. Grout.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

B. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anticorrosion coated or

galvanized, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.






2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

4. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: Non-shrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or

floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling)

formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and

cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.






PART 3 - EXECUTION



B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls

without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.




3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants


3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.






C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Use grout or silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.









1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:


2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:


4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:


5. Interior Partitions:







ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise

indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Stainless-Steel Type: With polished stainless-steel finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish; concealed and exposed-

rivet hinge; and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.





ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping

and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep pattern.

b. Insulated Piping: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast

brass with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast brass with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece cast brass with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece cast brass with polished, chrome-

plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor plate.


A. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates.






METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

3. Dial-type pressure gages.

4. Gage attachments.

5. Test plugs.


1. Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water meters.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Standard: ASME B40.200.






B. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inch nominal diameter.

C. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

D. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

E. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

F. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

G. Window: Plain glass.

H. Ring: Stainless steel.

I. Element: Bimetal coil.

J. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.

2. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size.

3. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

5. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.

6. Window: Glass or plastic.

7. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

8. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum

of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:







2. Case: Open-front, pressure relief type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch

nominal diameter.

3. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

4. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

8. Window: Glass.

9. Ring: Stainless steel.

10. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

B. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended

stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

D. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

E. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

C. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the

most readable position.

D. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.






E. Install test plugs in piping tees.

F. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

2. Inlet of hat water circulation pumps

3. Each port of master thermostatic mixing valves.

G. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building.

2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:

1. Metal case, compact-style, liquid-in-glass type.

2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Open-front, pressure-relief, direct-mounted, metal case.

2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.






3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.






BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12 - 1

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61and NSF 372.




2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends.

3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If









PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.


3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves.

4. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

5. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.


C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with

copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger.

2. Hand lever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.

2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves

that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered

Ends:



the following:









c. NIBCO INC.

d. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145.

b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Bronze or brass.

h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

i. Port: Full.

B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Press Ends:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

d. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145.

b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Bronze.

e. Ends: Press.

f. Press Ends Connections Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

g. Seats: PTFE or RTPFE.

h. Stem: Bronze or brass.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

k. O-Ring Seal: EPDM or Buna-N.















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.








3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP

ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.






3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. Provide with solder

or press connection-joint ends.

END OF SECTION 220523.12





CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.14 - 1

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.

2. Bronze swing check valves, press ends.

3. Iron swing check valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.




2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set check valves in either closed or open position.











handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:




4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint.


C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

D. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components

- Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

E. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with


F. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system


G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:



the following:











c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.


c. Body Design: Vertical flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B61 or ASTM B62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.

f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Bronze Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc, Class 125:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Vertical flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B61 or ASTM B62, bronze.


f. Disc: NBR, PTFE.

2.3 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze.


f. Disc: Bronze.















B. Bronze Swing Check Valves, Press Ends:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139.




e. Ends: Press.

f. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig

g. Disc: Brass or bronze.

2.4 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.


c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Gasket: Asbestos free.














PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.














E. Check Valves: Install check valves for proper direction of flow.

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:






1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and

weight or spring; or iron, center-guided, metal-seat or resilient-seat check valves.

c. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check

valves with lever and weight or spring.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP


C. End Connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered or press-ends.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.

3. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Grooved.



1. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end

connections.

2. Bronze swing check valves with press-end connections.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron swing check valves with metal seats, Class 125, with threaded or flanged end

connections.






GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.15 - 1

SECTION 220523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze gate valves.

2. Iron gate valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. NRS: Non-rising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. RS: Rising stem.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.





3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.












PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:






C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSP 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.






G. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.


2.2 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves, NRS, Class 125:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.










2. Description:



c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

B. Bronze Gate Valves, Press Ends:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139.


c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.

d. Ends: Press.

e. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

f. Stem: Brass or bronze non-rising.

g. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

h. Packing: Graphite.

i. Port: Full.

j. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.3 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Iron Gate Valves, OS&Y, Class 125:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:
















c. Body Material: Gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge.

g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.














E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing


3.3 ADJUSTING









A. Use gate valves for shutoff service only.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP




1. Bronze gate valves, NRS, Class 125 with soldered ends.

2. Bronze gate valves, press ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron gate valves, OS&Y, Class 125 with flanged ends.






HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY




3. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.



1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and

anchors.




following:


2. Metal framing systems.

3. Fiberglass strut systems.

4. Pipe stands.











AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS






1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized, hot dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.



A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from

structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.4 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig

minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I

calcium silicate with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.






E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.


A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.


2.6 MATERIALS



C. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-

shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength





A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps,

and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.









install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being


C. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.



than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use


according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.



F. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

G. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional




H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses


I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed


J. Insulated Piping:


a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-shield



piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is









3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields






5. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 ADJUSTING




3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.


B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shop-

painted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply




equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.


not have field-applied finishes.








E. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:



2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-


I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system



NPS 24.



J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend


2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.






5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.


7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.


14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system






3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.






7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit


trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary, to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.

N. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.

Q. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.






IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Pipe labels.

3. Valve tags.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.



C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed


D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


3. Background Color: Yellow.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.







2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.



for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the




B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number or



C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where



maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS


indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference

of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate



2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.



surfaces where devices are to be applied.







A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings




2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.










C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including


D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green.

b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety black.

b. Letter Color: White.


A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged

valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:


a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Cold Water: Natural.

b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Colors:

a. Cold Water: White.

b. Hot Water: White.






PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.

2. Domestic hot-water piping.

3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance

thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.

3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.

4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.

6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates

of tests and test methods employed.






C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,

and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-developed


C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.






B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground

Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of

less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in

accordance with ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C547.



the following:

a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

b. Knauf Insulation.

c. Manson Insulation Inc.

2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory applied ASJ.

3. 850 deg F.

4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.

5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.










2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

C. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with


B. Joint Sealants:

1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 58 to plus 176 deg F.

3. Color: White or gray.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


3. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.






2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

2. Color: White.

3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.









2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015-inch-thick, 3/4-inch-

wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020-inch-

thick, 3/4-inch-wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:

1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act

(ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:

1. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect

insulation application.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to

insulated surfaces as follows:






1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an

epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and 300

deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application

methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300

deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating

materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses

required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation

materials that get wet.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.






3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in

similar fashion to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.






1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface




3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and

Unions:






1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions,

and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless


2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted

tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and

irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour

that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit.

Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,

whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-

box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,

whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced

without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation

cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized

preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the

thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label

the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color

of pipe labels.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:






1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation

from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless

steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation

when available.






2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:


when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.






3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections.

E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by

Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their

installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three

locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded

strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three

locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.






B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. All Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

3.13 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-APPLIED INSULATION JACKET

A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over

insulation material.






COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 1

SECTION 220800 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Cx process requirements for the following plumbing systems, assemblies, and

equipment:

1. Domestic hot- and cold-water piping.

2. Sanitary waste and vent piping.

3. Storm drainage piping.

4. Plumbing pumps.


1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general Cx process

requirements and CxA responsibilities.

2. For construction checklists, comply with requirements in various Division 22 Sections

specifying plumbing systems, system components, equipment, and products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cx: Commissioning, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. CxA: Commissioning Authority, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning

Requirements."

C. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms

are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems,

equipment, and components.


A. Qualification Data: For plumbing testing technician.

B. Construction Checklists: Draft construction checklists will be created by CxA for Contractor

review.






C. Construction Checklists: Material, installation, and performance test checklists for systems,

assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components to be part of the Cx process and according

to requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

1. Domestic water piping, including the following:

a. Domestic cold- and hot-water piping, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

b. Pumps, motors, accessories, and controls.

c. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

d. Indoor water-storage tanks.

e. Meters and gages.

f. General-duty and specialty valves.

g. Hangers and supports.

h. Vibration isolation.

2. Sanitary waste and vent piping, including the following:

a. Piping, fittings, and specialties.

b. Drains.


d. General-duty and specialty valves.

e. Hangers and supports.

f. Vibration isolation.

3. Storm-water piping, including the following:

a. Drainage piping, fittings, and specialties.

b. Drains and collection basins.


d. Hangers and supports.

e. Vibration isolation.

4. Plumbing fixtures, including the following:

a. Water closets, supports and connections, supplies, and flush valves.

b. Urinals supports and connections, supplies, and flush valves.

c. Lavatories, supports, supplies, drain connections, and faucets.

d. Sinks, supports, supplies, drain connections, and faucets.

e. Showers, supplies, drain connections, and faucets.

f. Drinking fountains, supplies, and drainage connections.

D. Test equipment and instrumentation list, identifying the following:

1. Equipment/instrument identification number.

2. Planned Cx application or use.

3. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

4. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and

instrumentation.






5. Equipment manufacturers' proprietary instrumentation and tools. For each instrument or

tool, identify the following:

a. Instrument or tool identification number.

b. Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is

required.

c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

instrument or tool, where appropriate.


A. Plumbing Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform plumbing construction

checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and

Cx test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of plumbing system, electrical

concepts, and building operations.

2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems

manufactured by approved manufacturer.

B. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration:

1. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.

2. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags

permanently affixed to the instrument being used.

3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on

Project.

4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.

C. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:

1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed

equipment included in the Cx process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or

prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise

work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, shall comply

with the following:

a. Be calibrated by manufacturer with current calibration tags permanently affixed.

b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in operation and

maintenance manuals.

c. Plumbing system proprietary test instrumentation and tools become property of

Owner at the time of Substantial Completion.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

A. Prepare detailed construction checklists for plumbing systems, assemblies, subsystems,


1. Domestic hot- and cold-water piping.

2. Sanitary waste and vent piping.

3. Storm drainage piping.

4. Plumbing pumps.

5. Plumbing equipment, including the following:

a. Domestic water heating equipment.

b. Plumbing fixtures.

c. Water coolers.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST REVIEW

A. Review and provide written comments on draft construction checklists. CxA will create

required draft construction checklists and provide them to Contractor.

B. Return draft construction checklist review comments within 10 days of receipt.

C. When review comments have been resolved, the CxA will provide final construction checklists,

marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

D. Use only construction checklists, marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

3.3 Cx TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and

started and that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved

submittals.

B. Certify that plumbing systems instrumentation and control systems have been completed and

calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved

submittals, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved

test procedures (for example, normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position,

unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).






3.4 Cx TEST CONDITIONS

A. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load

when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions,

calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated

conditions as directed by CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of

simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Cx test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is

impractical.

3. Cx test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when

design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.

B. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the plumbing system,

document the deficiency and report it to Architect. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule

tests.

C. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and

documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.5 Cx TESTS COMMON TO PLUMBING

A. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and

components, including operational and control functions, to verify compliance with acceptance

criteria.

B. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes, interlocks,

control responses, responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response according to

acceptance criteria.

C. Coordinate schedule with, and perform Cx activities at the direction of, CxA.

D. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation

checks, startup, and performance tests requirements specified in Division 22 Sections specifying

plumbing systems and equipment.

E. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to perform and document the

following:

1. Construction checklist verification tests.

2. Construction checklist verification test demonstrations.

3. Cx tests.

4. Cx test demonstrations.






FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 1

SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Utility company requirements and specifications.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for

combined water service and fire-service mains.


A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water

mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,

including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-

service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.

3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.






2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when

outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.

Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or

rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural

capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,

wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if

indicated.

B. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if

required to match piping.

C. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

D. Copper, Brass or Bronze, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Fittings: Cast-brass, cast-bronze, or wrought-copper with EPDM O-ring seal in each end.

Sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger with stainless steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring seal.

2. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.






2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot

end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,

and steel bolts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end

unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern

or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Non-rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:

a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or

ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

1) Standard: AWWA C509.

2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig.

3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.

4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

2.4 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:

1. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

a. Standard: MSS SP-60.

b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and

type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.






c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, non-rising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one

raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section,

adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering

"WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5

inches in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate

deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors:

1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube,

pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be

joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:

a. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:

a. Description:


2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg.

4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.6 CORPORATION VALVES






A. Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible

with tapping machine.

1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for corporation

valve.

2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded inlet

and outlet matching service piping material.

2.7 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Of type acceptable to Authority having jurisdiction over water

system as well as the Fire Department/Marshall. Coordinate required type hydrant, color and

threads.

B. Hydrant Requirements: Conform to AWWA C502.

Drain Stone: Coarse aggregate conforming to ASTM C33 and following:

Screen Size Percent Passing

1 ½ inch 100

1 inch 90-100

½ inch 35-95

¼ inch 0-15

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following

applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure

rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D. Underground water-service piping size as shown on Drawings.






1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed or

mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints, as

required by Authority having jurisdiction.

2. Soft copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K (ASTM B88M, Type A) copper, pressure-seal

fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground

installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG, non-

rising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb

valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, non-rising-stem, resilient -

seated gate valves with valve box.

2. Underground Valves, NPS 4 and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FMG, cast-iron, non-

rising-stem gate valves with indicator post.

3. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground:

a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, non-rising stem.


A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated

in water main.

B. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

C. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 60 inches, with top at least 12 inches below

level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

D. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets (if required) and

other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

E. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping

systems at 5 feet outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

F. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.

Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.


A. Make pipe joints according to the following:






1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with

tools and procedures recommended by pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and

AWWA M41.

3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.

4. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-end,

ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling

manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and

restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks.

2. Locking mechanical joints.

3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands.

4. Bolted flanged joints.

5. Heat-fused joints.

6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches.

Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed

ferrous anchorage devices.


A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground

valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

3.8 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained

joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.

B. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17.

C. UL/FMG Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24.






3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water-distribution piping to existing water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve.

B. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water and fire-suppression piping.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks

have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to

stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold

at test pressure of 150 PSI for 2 hours; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test

pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per

100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is

within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for

underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.

Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been

altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in

AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine

solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3

hours.






c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine

remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.






DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings.

2. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings.

3. Piping joining materials.

4. Encasement for piping.

5. Transition fittings.

6. Dielectric fittings.


A. Product Data:

1. Pipe and tube.

2. Fittings.

3. Joining materials.



A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items

described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. System purging and disinfecting activities report.


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Polypropylene Piping (PP-R) Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

PP-R pipe and fittings that fail in materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of

Substantial Completion.






1. Warranty is to cover labor and material costs of repairing and/or replacing defective

materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by failure of the piping system due

to defects in materials or manufacturing.

2. Warranty is to be in effect only upon submission by the Contractor to the manufacturer of

valid pressure/leak documentation indicating that the system was tested and passed the

manufacturer's pressure/leak test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372.


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Cast Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

H. Copper Tube, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:



the following:


b. NIBCO INC.

c. Viega LLC.



2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:










1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or

flanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.4 PIPING JOINING ATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic

and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:






1. Standard: ASSE 1079.


3. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


2. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.


4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper

tubing.

D. Under-building-slab or underground, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 8 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact-pattern, mechanical-joint

fittings; and mechanical joints. Provide mechanical joint restraints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints.

2. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and

pressure-sealed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints.

2. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and

pressure-sealed joints.

3. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; grooved-joint, copper-tube

appurtenances; and grooved joints.






3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600

and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.

Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

E. Install valves according to the following:

1. Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping."

3. Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties."

G. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.






M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.

Q. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in

Section 221123.21 "Inline, Domestic Water Pumps."

R. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with

requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut



1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.


damaged.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.

Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools

and procedure recommended by pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. Leave insertion marks on

pipe after assembly.






F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and

thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to

ASME B31.9.

G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of

both piping systems.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for copper and ductile iron piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities

having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

D. Support vertical runs of copper and ductile iron piping to comply with MSS-58, locally

enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.






C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges

instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping

to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.



1. Piping Inspections:






a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance

with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests

or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

e. Hydrostatic testing and documentation of test results for polypropylene piping to

be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and submitted to the

manufacturer upon successful completion per warranty requirements.

f. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof

until satisfactory results are obtained.

g. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.






2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200

ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are

not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.






DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Backflow preventers.

3. Balancing valves.

4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

5. Strainers for domestic water piping.

6. Hose bibbs.

7. Wall hydrants.

8. Drain valves.

9. Water-hammer arresters.

10. Trap-seal primer device.

11. Trap-seal primer systems.

12. Flexible connectors.

13. Water meters.


1. Section 220519 "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure

gauges, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AMI: Advanced Metering Infrastructure.

B. AMR: Automatic Meter Reading.

C. FKM: A family of fluroelastomer materials defined by ASTM D1418.








B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.



A. Test and inspection reports.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Domestic water piping specialties intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption

are to comply with the SDWA, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and NSF 61 and

NSF 372, or to be certified in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 by an American National

Standards Institute (ANSI)-accredited third-party certification body that the weighted average

lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:



the following:


b. WATTS.









c. Zurn Industries, LLC.


3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

6. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:



the following:


b. WATTS.




4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; ductile or cast iron with interior lining that

complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.

8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends

on inlet and outlet.

c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

B. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:



the following:


b. WATTS.




4. Body: Bronze with union inlet.















C. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:



the following:


b. WATTS.


2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gauges, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-

procedure instructions.

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:



the following:

a. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. WATTS.

2. Type: Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator.

3. Body: bronze.

4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.

5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:


following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.

5. Body: Copper alloy.

6. Port: Standard or full port.

7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or stainless steel.

8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.

10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.


















2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:



the following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International.


c. POWERS; A WATTS Brand.



4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle.

8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:



the following:


b. Leonard Valve Company.

c. POWERS; A WATTS Brand.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Type: Cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.


6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,

and adjustable, temperature-control handle.

8. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

9. Piping Finish: Copper.

10. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed mounting and with hinged,

stainless steel door.

C. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:



the following:
















b. POWERS; A WATTS Brand.


2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.



5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.

7. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:


2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.062 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.8 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs: HB-1:



the following:

a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International.

b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

3. Body Material: Bronze.

4. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.

5. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.

6. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.


8. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011.













9. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

10. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.

11. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

12. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

13. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.

14. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.

15. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

16. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.9 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Non-freeze Wall Hydrants: NFWH-1:



the following:


b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.


4. Operation: Loose key.

5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.

7. Outlet, Concealed: With integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.

9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

10. Outlet, Exposed: With integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

11. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

12. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.

2.10 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.










8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

2.11 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Piston.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:


2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

3. Body: Bronze.

4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Stainless Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless steel tubing with stainless steel

wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.14 WATER METERS

A. Ultrasonic-Type Water Meters:












the following:

a. Badger Meter, Inc.

b. Master Meter, Inc.

c. Neptune Technology Group Inc.

2. Standard: Applicable portions of AWWA C700.

3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig working pressure.

4. Body Design: Ultrasonic open flow tube; totalization meter.

5. Registration: In gallons or cubic feet as required by utility company.

a. Remote Registration System: Encoder type complying with AWWA C707;

modified with signal-transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and

remote register assembly as required by utility company.

1) System shall be capable of transmitting data using AMR/AMI technology.

6. Case: Bronze.

7. End Connections: Threaded or flanged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventers: Install in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with

authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with airgap

fitting, fixed airgap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe

diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or

under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Balancing Valves: Install in locations where they can easily be adjusted. Set at indicated design

flow rates.

C. Temperature-Actuated, Water Mixing Valves: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on

inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

D. Y-Pattern Strainers: For water, install on supply side of each control valve and pump.










E. Outlet Boxes: Install boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 1-1/2-by-3-1/2-

inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with

requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

F. Hose Stations: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on

outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install 1-

1/2-by-3-1/2-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between

studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in

Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

G. Water-Hammer Arresters: Install in water piping in accordance with PDI-WH 201.

H. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install with outlet piping pitched down toward drain

trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve

for proper flow.

I. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched

down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet

fitting.

J. Trap-Seal Primer Systems: Install with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum

of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper

flow.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS


B. When installing piping specialties adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service

and maintenance.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance

with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.






3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect control wiring in accordance with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on

or near each of the following:

1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Backflow preventers.

3. Water pressure-reducing valves.

4. Automatic water shutoff valve systems.

5. Balancing valves.

6. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

7. Outlet boxes.

8. Hose stations.

9. Wall hydrants.

10. Ground hydrants.

11. Post hydrants.

12. Roof hydrants.

13. Trap-seal primer device.

14. Trap-seal primer systems.

15. Water meters.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

D. Adjust each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.






B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and


C. Perform the following tests and inspections.

1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having

jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest


3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm unit

operation.


equipment.

D. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.






INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS 221123.21 - 1

SECTION 221123.21 - INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. High efficiency, large, wet rotor pumps with electrically commutated, permanent magnet

motor.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction materials, rated capacities,

certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Detail pumps and adjacent equipment. Show support locations, type of

support, weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from

installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which pumps will be attached.

2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inline, domestic-water pumps to include in operation and



A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.






B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. UL Compliance: UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components

- Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 HIGH EFFICIENCY, LARGE, WET ROTOR PUMPS WITH ELECTRICALLY

COMMUTATED, PERMANENT MAGNET MOTOR

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless,

overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Grundfos Pumps Corp.

2. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

C. Capacities and Characteristics: See drawings

D. Pump Construction:

E. Pump Construction:

1. Casing:

a. The pump body shall utilize lead-free bronze or stainless-steel construction.

b. Built to permit servicing of pump internals without disturbing the casing or the

suction and discharge piping.

2. End Connections: Flanged.

3. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig.

4. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 220 deg F.

5. Impeller: Lead-free bronze or stainless steel.

6. Motor: Synchronous, permanent-magnet motor, electronically controlled by an integrated

variable frequency drive









2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements

for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Type: Integrated and pre-programmed controls to be included as an integral part of the pump.

B. Features:

1. Digital readout and operator interface.

2. Integrated differential pressure and temperature sensors.

3. Integrated motor protection to protect the pump against over/under voltage, over

temperature of motor and/or electronics, over current, locked rotor and dry run (no load

condition).

4. MODBUS or BACnet connectivity.

5. Operating modes:

a. Proportional Pressure.

b. Constant Pressure.

c. Constant Speed.

d. Night Set Back

e. Constant Temperature.

6. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F and stop pump at 110 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions.






C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support pump

weight.

1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install pressure switches in water-supply piping.

E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the

following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps.

b. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

c. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

d. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116

"Domestic Water Piping."

D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and

throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping.

Comply with requirements for strainers specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties." Comply with requirements for valves specified in the following:

1. Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Section 220523.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping."

3. Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

4. Install pressure gauge and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gauge and

snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where

provided or install pressure-gauge connectors in suction and discharge piping around

pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gauges and snubbers specified in

Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."


A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.






B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices.

C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and

time-delay relay.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of

pumps.





C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Tests and Inspections:



2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.


equipment.

E. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set controls for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.






b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains and prepare pump for

operation.

7. Start motor.

8. Open discharge valve slowly.

9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.

10. Adjust timer settings.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.






FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 1

SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. PVC pipe and fittings.

2. Non-pressure-type transition couplings.

3. Expansion joints and deflection fittings.

4. Cleanouts.

5. Manholes.

6. Concrete.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Non-pressure and pressure couplings

3. Expansion joints and deflection fittings.

4. Cleanouts.

B. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and

covers.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe and fitting.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS






A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative no fewer than five days in advance of proposed

interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's Representative’s written

permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for

gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends.

3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings Pressure Rated:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 2241, SDR 21 PVC, with elastomeric seal gasket joints.

2.2 NONPRESSURE-TYPE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling; for

joining underground non-pressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and

include corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:

1. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-

metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Non-pressure-Type, Rigid Couplings:

1. Description: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical

coupling; molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material; with corrosion-resistant-metal

tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.






2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

1. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and

round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or

spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy Duty.

3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

2.4 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with

provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated.

3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as

required to prevent flotation.

4. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for

walls and base riser section; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, of length to provide depth indicated.

6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated; with top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.

8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection.

9. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both

feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps

into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole

to finished grade is less than 60 inches.

10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, with diameter

matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame

and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser, with 4-inch-minimum-width flange

and 26-inch-diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover,

using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron unless otherwise indicated.






2.5 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete complying with ACI 318, ACI 350, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, crushed gravel.

4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious

materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design

mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include

channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of

vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,

uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: As shown on drawings.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: 8 percent.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58

maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A1064/A 1064M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details to indicate general location

and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping

layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.






B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,

and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,

and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch

connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes

and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install gravity-flow, non-pressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 0.4 percent unless


2. Install piping NPS 8 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in

direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint

system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install piping with 48-inch minimum cover.

4. Install PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

F. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.

Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of

incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, non-pressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for

elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints.

2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with non-pressure-type, flexible couplings.

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to

piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use non-pressure flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, non-pressure

sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. Unshielded flexible couplings for pipes of same or slightly different OD.

b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different

OD.

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

2. Use pressure pipe couplings for force-main joints.






3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

E. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil

pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and use cast-iron soil pipe for riser

extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches

deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement

surface.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove

section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye

fitting plus 6-inch overlap with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day

compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove

section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye

with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to

underground manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3

inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe

passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of, and be flush with, inside

wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole wall, encase entering






connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional

support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi

unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and

piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while

making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may

accumulate.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for underground utility

identification devices. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and

at outside edges of underground manholes.

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

manholes.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.

Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are

within allowances specified.

4. Re-inspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or

repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.






2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice.

4. Submit separate report for each test.

5. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.

6. Force Main: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have

hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum system operating

pressure, but not less than 150 psig.

a. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

7. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within

allowances specified.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping. Flush with potable water.






SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY





B. Shop Drawings: For hubless, single-stack drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and

their installation requirements.



A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary

waste service.






2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written

permission.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping

and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

C. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

D. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns

and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

E. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

F. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Fittings:






1. Dielectric Unions:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) WATTS.

2) Wilkins.

3) Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Description:


2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in

Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination

drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.










G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in

direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to

back or side by side with common drainpipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.

4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place

hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

N. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

O. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Hubless, Single-Stack Drainage System: Comply with ASME B16.45 and hubless,

single-stack aerator fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions.

3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.






P. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

Q. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221319

"Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage

force-main piping.

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary

Waste Piping Specialties."

3. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste

Piping Specialties."

R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve

Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and

Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."


A. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safehandling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.






3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.

2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.

4. In Underground Force Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install hangers for PVC piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters,

to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities


C. Support vertical runs of PVC piping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally


3.6 CONNECTIONS







B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required

by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary

Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.

b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for



A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.






B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete

with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders

on completion of roughing-in.

a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not

less than 10-foot head of water.

b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level

must not drop.

c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled

with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.

a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.

Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure.

c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout

period of inspection.

d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid

clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.






C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based

latex paint.

E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping of any size shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Aboveground, vent piping of any size, shall be the following:


D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping of any size shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.






SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.

2. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.


1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashing assemblies.

2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for preformed flashings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.









A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:



the following:


b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping.

5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:



the following:


b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.














4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected

piping.

5. Closure Plug:

a. Cast iron].

b. Countersunk or raised head.

c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw.

d. Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

6. Wall Access, Cover Plate: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw.

7. Wall Access, Frame and Cover: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless steel

wall-installation frame and cover.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A74, Service Class, hub-and-spigot,

cast-iron soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where

required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C564 rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping

and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

D. Floor-Drain, Inline Trap Seal:

1. Description: Inline floor drain trap seal, forming a physical barrier to slow trap

evaporation while not impeding flow from drain.

2. Material: Polymer.

3. Standard: Tested and certified in accordance with ASSE 1072.

4. Listing: ICC-ES or IAPMO listed.

5. Size: Same as floor drain outlet or strainer throat.

E. Air-Gap Fittings:






1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

F. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for

pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top

of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension

in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

G. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

H. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include

vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

I. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:

1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-

coated copper, or galvanized steel.

2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of

flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.

J. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.

3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.

4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.

E. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

F. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer

connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

G. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

H. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

I. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

J. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch

clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

K. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy

access and maintenance.

L. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance

between vent pipe and roof substrate.

M. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.






N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety


identifying unit.

1. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.






SANITARY DRAINS 221319.13 - 1

SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor drains.

2. Floor sinks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

D. PE: Polyethylene.

E. PP: Polypropylene.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES

A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.






2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: FD-1:



the following:


b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 with backwater valve.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Gray iron.

5. Anchor Flange: Required.

6. Clamping Device: Required.

7. Outlet: Bottom.

8. Sediment Bucket: Not required.

9. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.

10. Top Shape: Round.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Drains: FD-2:



the following:


b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 with backwater valve.


4. Body Material: Gray iron.



7. Outlet: Bottom.

8. Sediment Bucket: Required.

9. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron.

10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.

11. Top Shape: Round.

2.3 FLOOR SINKS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Sinks: FS-1:
















the following:


b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.7.


4. Body Material: Cast iron.



7. Outlet: Bottom connection.

8. Coating on Interior Surfaces: Not required.

9. Sediment Bucket: Required.

10. Internal Strainer: Dome.

11. Top Grate Material: Porcelain Enamel Coated

12. Top Shape: Square.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch

total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring.

a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


B. Install open drain fittings with top of hub 2 inches above floor.










3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater

valves, air admittance devices and miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety


identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for


3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.






FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1

SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Specialty pipe and fittings.




A. Coordination Drawings: Detail storm drainage piping. Show support locations, type of support,

weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved:

1. Structural members to which drainage piping will be attached or suspended from.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:






1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.




1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. Mueller Industries, Inc.

3. National Pipe and Plastic, Inc.

B. NSF Marking: Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related

Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic storm

drain and "NSF-sewer" for plastic storm sewer piping.

C. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665; drain, waste, and vent.

D. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

E. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns

and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

F. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

G. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in ODs

or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes

to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-

system fitting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in













systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination

drawings.


and service areas.



otherwise.







J. Make changes in direction for piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.

2. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place

hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.






2. Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

N. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

O. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221423

"Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building

storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage

force-main piping.

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221423 "Storm

Drainage Piping Specialties."

P. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by



A. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendices.

B. Joint Restraints and Sway Bracing:

1. Provide joint restraints and sway bracing for storm drainage piping joints to comply with

the following conditions:

a. Provide axial restraint for pipe and fittings 5 inches and larger, upstream and

downstream of all changes in direction, branches, and changes in diameter greater

than two pipe sizes.

b. Provide rigid sway bracing for pipe and fittings 4 inches and larger, upstream and

downstream of all changes in direction 45 degrees and greater.

c. Provide rigid sway bracing for pipe and fittings 5 inches and larger, upstream and

downstream of all changes in direction and branch openings.






3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for



A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete

with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage

piping until it has been tested and approved.


3. Test Procedure:

a. Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in.






b. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not

less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until

completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.




C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence

of published procedures, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping

until it has been tested and approved.


2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.

a. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure

constitute defects that must be repaired.




D. Piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.8 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground and underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following:












ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters.

2. Domestic-water heater accessories.





B. Shop Drawings:



A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room drawing or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which the

items described in this Section are shown and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, electric, domestic-water heater.

C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to


D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include emergency,


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-

water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.

B. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label

commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.






2.2 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:



the following:

a. A. O. Smith Corporation.

b. Lochinvar, LLC.

c. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single

manufacturer.


4. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code, steel horizontal arrangement.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping

connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.5 for

steel and stainless-steel flanges, and in accordance with ASME B16.24 for

copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-

water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

5. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal with hose-end connection.

c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish or high-impact composite material.

e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type arranged in

multiples of three.

f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.

h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-

pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving

capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than

working-pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select one relief valve with

sensing element that extends into storage tank.

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:












the following:


b. AMTROL, Inc.

c. Flexcon Industries.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water expansion tanks from single source from

single manufacturer.

3. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-

installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air pre-charge to minimum system-operating

pressure at tank.

4. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-

water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and

outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. Manifold Kits: Domestic-water-heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping

for field installation, for multiple domestic-water heater installation. Include ball-, butterfly-, or

gate-type shutoff valves to isolate each domestic-water heater and calibrated balancing valves to

provide balanced flow through each domestic-water heater.

1. Comply with requirements for ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves specified in

Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate

Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic

Water Piping Specialties."

D. Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig-maximum outlet pressure


E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include

relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-

pressure rating of domestic-water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends

into storage tank.

F. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than working-

pressure rating of domestic-water heater.

G. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

H. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.










I. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for

wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code

construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times

pressure rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial, electric,

domestic-water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases

specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters if

installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.

2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend domestic-water heater relief-

valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch,

and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for electric,

domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend domestic-water heater relief-valve outlet, with

drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by

positive air gap onto closest floor drain.






D. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric,

domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end

drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with

requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing

Piping."

F. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of residential, solar, electric, domestic-water

heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and

Gages for Plumbing Piping."

G. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple electric, domestic-water

heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each electric,

domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater

inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each electric, domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with

requirements for valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and

Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply with requirements for

thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

H. Install pressure-reducing valve with integral bypass relief valve in electric, domestic-water

booster-heater inlet piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping. Set

pressure-reducing valve for outlet pressure of 25 psig. Comply with requirements for pressure-

reducing valves and water hammer arresters specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water

Piping Specialties."

I. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage

tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

J. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

K. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.

L. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined. The

wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water shall contain less than 0.25

percent of lead by weight.


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and

maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.






3.3 IDENTIFICATION


Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

E. Tests and Inspections:




proper operation.


equipment.

F. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters. Training shall be a

minimum of one hour(s).






FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1

SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, gas-fired, high-efficiency, storage, domestic-water heaters.

2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room drawing or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which the

items described in this Section are shown and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, gas-fired, domestic-water heater.

C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to




F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-

water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years.

2) Controls and Other Components: One year(s).

b. Expansion Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.

B. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply

with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-

water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section VIII, Division 1.






2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-

tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section IV.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Gas-Fired, High-Efficiency, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:



the following:


b. AERCO; A WATTS Brand.

c. Rheem Manufacturing Company.


manufacturer.

3. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.

4. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion

efficiency at optimum operating conditions.

5. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working-pressure

rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to

tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.5 for

steel and stainless-steel flanges and in accordance with ASME B16.24 for

copper and copper-alloy flanges.



outlets.

c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for potable-

water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and

outlets.

6. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.

c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal with hose-end connection.










d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except

connections and controls.

e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

f. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency

requirements for gas-fired, high-efficiency, domestic-water heaters and LP-gas

fuel.

g. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

h. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices

or systems.

i. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as

heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of

domestic-water heater. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends

into storage tank.

B. Capacity and Characteristics: See Drawings

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:



the following:


b. AMTROL, Inc.

c. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.


manufacturer.

3. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-

installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air pre-charge to minimum system-operating

pressure at tank.

4. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.



outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

5. Capacity and Characteristics: See drawings.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of

domestic water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads.










C. Comply with requirements for ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves specified in

Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

1. Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic

Water Piping Specialties."

D. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in

piping.

E. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 1/2-psig pressure

rating as required to match gas supply.

F. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off

automatic valve.

G. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as

great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-

water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

H. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of domestic-

water heater.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code

construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters and storage tanks to minimum of one

and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial domestic-water heaters on

concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-

in-Place Concrete."






1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial domestic-water heaters if installation on

stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.

2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, in accordance with layout drawings, original

design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange

units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on

domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified

in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate

Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters in accordance with NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters

without shutoff valves.

2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters

without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas

pressure at burner.

3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if

required for operation of safety control.

4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic

gas valves specified in Section 231126 "Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping."

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend domestic-water-heater relief-

valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch,

and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water

heaters without storage. Extend domestic-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping

same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap

onto closest floor drain.

F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for

thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

G. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domestic-water heaters.

Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each domestic-water






heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater inlet and outlet,

and throttling valve in each domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with requirements for valves

specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15

"Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply with requirements for thermometers specified

in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

H. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of domestic-water heater storage tanks

without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

I. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.

J. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.

K. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined. The

wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water shall contain less than 0.25

percent of lead by weight.


A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic

Water Piping."

B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 231126 "Facility Liquefied-

Petroleum Gas Piping."

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service

and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION


Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
















proper operation.


equipment.

F. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters. Training

shall be a minimum of one hour(s).






COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 224213.13 - 1

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor-mounted, bottom-outlet water closets.

2. Wall-mounted water closets.

3. Flushometer valves.

4. Toilet seats.

5. Supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.

B. Remote Water Closet: Located more than 30 feet from other drain line connections or fixture

and where less than 1.5 drainage fixture units are upstream of the drain line connection.




and profiles, and finishes for water closets.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.







A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, Floor Mounted, Bottom Outlet, Top Spud: WC-1:



the following:

a. Kohler Co.

b. Sloan Valve Company.

c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Type: Siphon jet.

d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: Standard.

f. Rim Contour: Elongated.

g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.

h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.

i. Color: White.

3. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASTM A1045 or ASME A112.4.3.

2.2 WALL-MOUNTED WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, Wall Mounted, Top Spud, Accessible: WC-2.



the following:

a. Kohler Co.














c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Bowl:



c. Type: Siphon jet.

d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: Standard.

f. Rim Contour: Elongated.

g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.

h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.

3. Support: Water closet carrier.

4. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Standard.

2.3 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Battery-Powered, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves:



the following:

a. Kohler Co.


c. TOTO USA, INC.



4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Exposed.

9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in


application.

10. Trip Mechanism: Battery-powered electronic sensor complying with UL 1951, and listed

and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.

11. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.

12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.

13. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.











2.4 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:



the following:

a. American Standard.

b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.

c. Kohler Co.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

3. Material: Plastic.

4. Type: Commercial (Heavy duty).

5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

6. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check.

7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

8. Seat Cover: Not required.

9. Color: White.

2.5 SUPPORTS

A. Water Closet Carrier:


2. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and

arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching

fixture.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.



A. Water-Closet Installation:










1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to

piping or building substrate.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water

closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto

waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.

4. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and

waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet.

4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

5. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings

required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."






C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water

closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.






COMMERCIAL URINALS 224213.16 - 1

SECTION 224213.16 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall-hung urinals.

2. Urinal flushometer valves.

3. Supports.




and profiles, and finishes for urinals.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in



A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than one of each type.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals, Wall Hung, Back Outlet, Washout, Accessible: UR-1



the following:

a. Sloan Industries.

b. TOTO USA, INC.


2. Fixture:



c. Type: Washout with extended shields.

d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap.

e. Water Consumption: Low.

f. Spud Size and Location: NPS 3/4, top.

g. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2, back.

h. Color: White.

3. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling.

b. Size: NPS 2.

4. Support: Type I Urinal Carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and

fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture.

5. Urinal Mounting Height: Standard or Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1

based on architects plans.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Battery-Powered, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves:



the following:


















4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Exposed.

9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.

10. Trip Mechanism: Battery-powered electronic sensor complying with UL 1951; listed and

labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended

location and application.

11. Consumption: 0.25 gal per flush.

12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 3/4.

13. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.

2.3 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Urinal Carrier:



the following:


b. WATTS.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:










1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.

2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.

3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping.

4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on

open side of compartment.

4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required

to match urinals.



and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.






3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings,

and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.






COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224216.13 - 1

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vitreous-china, counter-mounted lavatories.

2. Vitreous-china, wall-mounted lavatories.

3. Automatically operated lavatory faucets.

4. Supply fittings.

5. Waste fittings.

6. Lavatory supports.




and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:






a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.




1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, COUNTER-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory - Vitreous China, Undercounter Mounted: LAV-2



the following:


b. Kohler Co.

c. Sloan Valve Company.

d. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Faucet: See below Insert lavatory faucet designation from "Manually Operated Lavatory

Faucets" or "Automatically Operated Lavatory Faucets" Article.

2.2 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory - Vitreous China, Wall Mounted, with Back: LAV-1



the following:




2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.















b. Type: For wall hanging.

c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 20 by 18 inches.

d. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole.

e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.

f. Color: White.

g. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.

3. Faucet: See below.

4. Support: Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier.

5. Lavatory Mounting Height: Standard.

A. Lavatory - Ledge Back, Vitreous China, Wall Mounted LAV-1



the following:




2. Fixture:


b. Type: For wall hanging.

c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 20 by 18 inches.

d. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole.

e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.

f. Color: White.

g. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.

3. Faucet: See below.

4. Support: Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier.


2.3 AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in contact

with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets - Automatic Type: Battery Powered Electronic Sensor Operated, Mixing:



the following:

a. Kohler Co.














c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.



application.

4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

5. Body Type: Single hole.

6. Body Material: Commercial, solid-brass, or die-cast housing with brazed copper and

brass waterway.

7. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

8. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.

9. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed.

10. Spout: Rigid type.

11. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow.

2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in

contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8.

2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube riser.

2.5 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.

2. Material:







a. Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick

brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

b. Stainless steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch thick stainless-

steel tube to wall, and stainless-steel wall flange.

2.6 LAVATORY SUPPORTS

A. Lavatory Carrier:



the following:


b. WATTS.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb in accordance with roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people

with disabilities or the elderly, in accordance with ICC A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with

escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."










E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping

Insulation."


A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."


A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted in accordance with

NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and

circuit number feeding connection.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background

and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,

fittings, and controls.

B. Install new batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.







A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.






COMMERCIAL SINKS 224216.16 - 1

SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service basins.

2. Utility sinks.

3. Handwash sinks.

4. Sink faucets.

5. Supports.

6. Supply fittings.

7. Waste fittings.




and profiles, and finishes for sinks.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.










installed.


installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins, MSB-1: Terrazzo, floor mounted.


following:


b. Fiat Products.

c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.

d. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99.

b. Shape: Five sided.

c. Nominal Size: 32 by 32 inches.

d. Height: 12 inches with dropped front.

e. Tiling Flange: Not required.

f. Rim Guard: On front top surfaces.

g. Color: Not applicable.

h. Drain: Stainless Steel strainer with NPS 3 outlet.

3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.

4. Faucet: SSF-1.

B. Service Basins, MSB-2: Terrazzo, floor mounted.


following:


b. Fiat Products.

c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.

d. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99.

b. Shape: Rectangular.
















c. Nominal Size: 36 by 36 inches.

d. Height: 12 inches.

e. Tiling Flange: Not required.

f. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.

g. Color: Not applicable.

h. Drain: Stainless Steel strainer with NPS 3 outlet.

3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.

4. Faucet: SSF-1.

2.2 UTILITY SINKS

A. Utility Sinks, SK-1: Stainless steel, counter mounted.


following:

a. Advance Tabco.

b. Eagle Group.

c. Elkay.

d. Griffin Products, Inc.

e. Just Manufacturing.

2. Fixture:


b. Type: Ledge back.

c. Number of Compartments: Two.

d. Overall Dimensions: 22-inches wide, 33-inches long, 6-inches deep.

e. Metal Thickness: 18 gauge.

f. Each Compartment:

1) Dimensions: 16-3/4-inches wide, 14-3/4-inches long, 6-inches deep.

2) Drain: NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper.

3) Drain Location: Near back of compartment.

3. Faucet(s): SKF-1.

a. Number Required: One.

b. Mounting: On ledge.

4. Supply Fittings:


b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching

water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Loose key.












2) Risers: NPS 1/2, ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel

flexible hose.

5. Waste Fittings:


b. Trap(s):

1) Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with

0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall two-piece, cast-brass trap and ground-

joint swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-

plated brass or steel wall flange.

6. Mounting: On counter with sealant.

B. Utility Sinks, SK-2: Stainless steel, freestanding.


following:

a. Advance Tabco.

b. Eagle Group.

c. Elkay.



2. Fixture:


b. Type: With backsplash.

c. Number of Compartments: Three.

d. Overall Dimensions: 27-1/2-inches wide, 48-inches long, 44-inches tall.

e. Metal Thickness: 14 gauge.

f. Each Compartment:

1) Dimensions: 24-inches wide, 15-inches long, 14-inches deep.

2) Drains: NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper.

3) Drain Location: Centered in compartment.

g. Drainboard(s): Not required side(s).

1) Dimensions Each: Not applicable.

3. Supports: Adjustable-length steel legs.

4. Faucet(s): SKF-2.

a. Number Required: Two.












b. Mounting: On backsplash.

5. Supply Fittings:


b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass compression stop with inlet connection matching

water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Loose key.

2) Risers: NPS 1/2, chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe.

6. Waste Fittings:


b. Continuous Waste:

1) Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2) Material: Chrome-plated, 0.032-inch-thick brass tube.

2.3 HANDWASH SINKS

A. Handwash Sinks, SK-3: Stainless steel, wall mounted.


following:

a. Advance Tabco.

b. Eagle Group.

c. Elkay.



2. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 and NSF/ANSI 2.

b. Type: Basin with radius corners, back for faucet, and support brackets.

c. Nominal Size: 17 by 16 by 5 inches.

3. Faucet: Included with fixture. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

4. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

5. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.

6. Support: Type II sink carrier.













2.4 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with

potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle mixing valve.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets, SSF-1:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.

2) Elkay.

3) Just Manufacturing.

4) T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

b. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

c. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

d. Body Type: Centerset.

e. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

f. Finish: Chrome plated.

g. Handle(s): Lever.

h. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed.

i. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace.

j. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.

k. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7.

2. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets, SKF-1:


of the following:


2) Elkay.






d. Body Type: Single hole.


f. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

g. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.5 gpm.

h. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.

i. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed.

j. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck.

k. Vacuum Breaker: Not required.

l. Spout Outlet: Aerator.
















3. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets, SKF-2:


of the following:


2) Elkay.






d. Body Type: Centerset.


f. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

g. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm.

h. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.

i. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed.

j. Spout Type: High Arc.

k. Spout Outlet: Aerator.

4.

2.5 SUPPORTS

A. Type II Sink Carrier:



the following:


b. WATTS.



2.6 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with

potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.















D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8.

2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube, or ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated

stainless-steel flexible hose.

2.7 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and ground-joint swivel elbow with

0.032-inch-thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.

2.8 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,


B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to

ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply

with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing

Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.



G. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


H. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.

Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and

controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.







A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.






COMMERCIAL SHOWERS 224223 - 1

SECTION 224223 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Showers

2. Grout.




and profiles, and finishes for showers.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Maintenance Data: For shower faucets to include in maintenance manuals.





installed.


installed.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOWERS

A. Showers: SH-1: Back access, recessed.



the following:


b. Bradley Corporation.

c. Willoughby Industries.

2. Fixture:


b. Material: 0.078-inch-minimum-thick stainless steel; corrosion-resistant metal for

internal piping and bracing.

c. Finish: ASTM A480/A480M, No. 4 polished finish on exposed surfaces.

d. Type and Configuration: Wall, with showerhead.

e. Tempered-Water Supply Valves: Mechanical-metering type with individual check

stops complying with ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

f. Shower: Vandal-resistant, fixed-type head.

g. Soap Dish: Recessed, stainless steel.

3. Mounting: Bolts through wall sleeve into accessible service space.

4. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized-steel frame of dimensions required to match fixture.

2.2 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,


B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.












PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before shower installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where showers will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install showers level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with shower. Comply

with valve requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing

Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

D. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

E. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.


escutcheons requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

F. Seal joints between showers and floors and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Comply with traps and soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316

"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."






3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust showers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning showers,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of showers, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean showers, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of showers for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.






DRINKING FOUNTAINS 224713 - 1

SECTION 224713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of drinking fountain.


and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Maintenance Data: For drinking fountains to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains: EWC-1: Stainless steel, recessed, wheelchair accessible.



the following:

a. Elkay.

b. Haws Corporation.

c. Oasis International.

2. Standards:

a. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.










b. Comply with ICC A117.1.

3. Receptor Shape: Concave with flush wall flange.

4. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck.

5. Maximum Water Flow: 0.15 gpm.

6. Control: Push button.

7. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap, complying with

ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

8. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.

9. Support: Mounting frame or brackets for attaching to substrate.

10. Provide with bottle filling station.

2.2 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Water Cooler Carrier:



the following:


b. WATTS.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for

children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Set pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

C. Install recessed drinking fountains secured to wood blocking in wall construction.










D. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

E. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to

domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball or gate valve. Install valves in locations where they

can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for

Plumbing Piping" and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

G. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with


H. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone

sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Install ball or gate shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve

requirements specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and

Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixtures, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.











COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-current

power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped

separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.






B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.






4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)






SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - 1

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Stack-sleeve fittings.


4. Sleeve-seal fittings.

5. Grout.



1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, anti-corrosion coated or

zinc coated, with plain ends and integral welded waterstop collar.






B. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20-psig.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size.

4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, ASTM B633

of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description:

1. Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly, made for imbedding in concrete

slab or wall.

2. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in nonfire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,




2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, use NT.






PART 3 - EXECUTION



B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP

sleeves.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without

sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.




3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use sealants


E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke-Barrier

Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with

requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between


2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."






3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 3 inches above finished floor

level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if

ring is specified.

5. Using waterproof silicone sealant, seal space between top hub of stack-sleeve fitting and

pipe.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated, Horizontal Assembly, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain

indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and

smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413

"Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal-system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings as new walls and slabs are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.













1. Exterior Concrete Walls Above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings.

2. Concrete Slabs Above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings.






METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

2. Thermowells.

3. Dial-type pressure gages.



B. Shop Drawings:



A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:







2. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size.

3. Case Form: Back angle Straight unless otherwise indicated.

4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

5. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.


7. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

8. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 DIAL-TYPE PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


2. Case: Liquid-filled Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal

diameter.

3. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

4. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.







9. Ring: Brass.

10. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the

most readable position.

G. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.

3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.

H. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow space for service and

maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.






3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.

2.

B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be the following:


C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central

systems shall be the following:


D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 deg C.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.






BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.12 - 1

SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. SWP: Steam working pressure.






2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.












PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:



3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves.


5. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.

6. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.


C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with


D. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.




G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Hand lever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.

2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves that

allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Three-Piece with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:


following:








b. NIBCO INC.

c. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Three piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE.

h. Stem: Bronze.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.






















E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC



A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:


end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.4 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: bronze ball valves, three-piece with bronze trim, full port, threaded or

press connection-joint ends.






CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.14 - 1

SECTION 230523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.

2. Iron swing check valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. SWP: Steam working pressure.







3. Block check valves in either closed or open position.



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If









PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:













G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

2.3 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:

1. Description:





e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.






2.4 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:

1. Description:


b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.

d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

e. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Bronze.

h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.














E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:






1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements for valve tags and schedules in Section 230553

"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 ADJUSTING





1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves


C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:


end option is indicated in valve schedules.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules.

3.5 VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Iron valves may be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged

ends.

2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Iron swing check valves with lever and spring-closure control,

Class 125.











GATE VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523.15 - 1

SECTION 230523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Iron gate valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. NRS: Non-rising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. RS: Rising stem.

E. SWP: Steam working pressure.







3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.












PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:













G. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.


2.2 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Iron Gate Valves, NRS, Class 125:



the following:











c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:





e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Disc: Solid wedge.

h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Iron Gate Valves, OS&Y, Class 125:



the following:



c. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:





e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Disc: Solid wedge.

h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.
























E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC


3.3 ADJUSTING





1. Shutoff Service: Gate valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves


C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends, except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron gate valves, NRS or OS&Y, Class 125.









Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EFP-164109


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY




3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.




1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC" for vibration isolation devices.

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.




following, include Product Data for components:


2. Metal framing systems.

3. Fiberglass strut systems.

4. Pipe stands.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance



1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.






2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.





AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according

to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.



1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.


B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:






1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-plated steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-plated steel.


A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I

calcium silicate with 100-psi minimum compressive strength.

B. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.


A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland

cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.


2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.7 MATERIALS








C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications

and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as

rods.

F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength





A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps,

and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.




install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being


C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.



than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use


according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.






2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.



F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional




J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses


K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed


L. Insulated Piping:


a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield



piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is


a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields


a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-









5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING




3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.


B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply




equipment.






B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.


not have field-applied finish.



E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:



2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-


5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated,


6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated,


8. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of


9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.






15. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system



NPS 24.



K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend


2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.


7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.






9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.


14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system






3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit


base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit


trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:






a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

O. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not







VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 230548.13 - 1

SECTION 230548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Spring hangers.


1. Section 210548.13 "Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment" for

devices for fire-suppression equipment and systems.

2. Section 220548.13 "Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for devices

for plumbing equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (for the State of California

owned and regulated medical facilities).



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of vibration isolation device.

3. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases.






2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames

for equipment mounting.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for HVAC

piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other

supports and restraints.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct testing indicated, be an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and be

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Minimum deflection as indicated on Drawings.

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

9. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.






2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to

restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and with at

least seven days' advance notice.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.







IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Pipe labels.

3. Duct labels.

4. Valve tags.





C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed


D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


3. Background Color: Yellow.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.







2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.



for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the




B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,



C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where



maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS


indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference

of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate



2.3 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16-

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Blue.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.






E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal

lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both

directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.








surfaces where devices are to be applied.







A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings




2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.





C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including


D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.

2. Refrigerant Piping: White letters on a safety-purple background.






3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color

codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.

3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at

maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable

ceiling system.


A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use

fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:


a. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches, round.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

c. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Colors:

a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background.

b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.

c. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background.






TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

3. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Motors.

b. Condensing units.

c. Boilers.

d. Heat-transfer coils.

4. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.

5. Sound tests.

6. Vibration tests.

7. Duct leakage tests.

8. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.






E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after

approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the

details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.


A. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.






3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB

technician.

B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by TABB as a TAB

technician.

C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB

period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.






B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to

verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum

walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,

filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible,

and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with

indicated perforations.

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting,

or mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.






P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness

for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.

d. Clean filters are installed.

e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete, and safeties are verified.

g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

h. Ceilings are installed.

i. Windows and doors are installed.

j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.

c. Water treatment is complete.

d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.

e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.

f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.

g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open.

h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.

i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in

discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers.

j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete, and safeties are verified.

k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.






3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," and

Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.






K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If

necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses, close to the fan and prior to any

outlets, to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.

d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to

accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower

than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units

for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit

performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.






C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within

design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

6. Measure and record all operating data.

7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down

the duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control.

3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static

pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure

for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's

recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome

terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as

follows:

a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers

require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific

project.

b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum

airflow. Record calibration factor.

c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from

terminal units.

d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow.

e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum

airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any

deviation from design airflow.

f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and

cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.






g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be

maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full

cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.

5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total

airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan

speed listed by fan manufacturer.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust

terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan

selection and simulates actual load in the building.

c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary,

perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at

terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.

d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow

and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume

air systems.

b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the

system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the

optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.

9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are

within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.

b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

d. Mark final settings.

e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

Measure and record all operating data.

f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.






3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and

manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required coil and

heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and

balancing as follows:

1. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

2. Check highest vent for adequate pressure.

3. Check flow-control valves for proper position.

4. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

5. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

6. Check that air has been purged from the system.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at

maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic

systems.

B. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows:

1. Verify that the differential-pressure sensor is located as indicated.

2. Determine whether there is diversity in the system.

C. For systems with no diversity:

1. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.

1) Position valves for full flow through coils.

2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or

exchanger pressure drop.

b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in

discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe

prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.






4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify

that the pump has the intended impeller size.

5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until

design water flow is achieved.

c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an

overloaded condition.

2. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

3. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals.

b. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.

d. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow.

e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

4. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified

range.

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

5. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method.

b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

6. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system differential-pressure set

point.

7. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-frequency

controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-

frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data

under both conditions.

8. Mark final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set.







a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

c. Mark final settings.

10. Verify that memory stops have been set.

D. For systems with diversity:

1. Determine diversity factor.

2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved by

the design engineer.

3. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.

1) Position valves for full flow through coils.

2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or

exchanger pressure drop.

b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in

discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe

prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.

4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify

that the pump has the intended impeller size.

5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until

design water flow is achieved.

c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an

overloaded condition.

4. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

5. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals.

b. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.






d. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow.

e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

6. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified

range.

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

7. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method.

b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

8. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that were

previously open to maintain diversity, and balance terminals that were just opened.

9. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine system differential-pressure set

point.

10. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-frequency

controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-

frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data

under both conditions.

11. Mark final settings and verify that memory stops have been set.


a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

c. Mark final settings.

13. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.






8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove

proper operation.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record fan and motor operating data.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A. Hydronic Boilers:

1. Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Measure and record water flow.

3. Record relief valve pressure setting.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.

3. Water pressure drop for major (more than 20 gpm) equipment coils, excluding unitary

equipment such as reheat coils, unit heaters, and fan-coil units.

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.

6. Airflow.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

3.13 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.






3.14 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.

3. Check the refrigerant charge.

4. Check the condition of filters.

5. Check the condition of coils.

6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.

7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.

8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is

to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean and fins combed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are

affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and

determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face

velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment

manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5

percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or

decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.15 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.






B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified

above.

3.16 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate

proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC

systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing

devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures

in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in

systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building

floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.17 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.






10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.






2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

j. Return airflow in cfm.

k. Outdoor-air damper position.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft.

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.






h. Water flow rate in gpm.

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.






e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft.

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.


c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft.



b. Air velocity in fpm.

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

e. Final airflow rate in cfm.

f. Final velocity in fpm.

g. Space temperature in deg F.

J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.


c. Room or riser served.

d. Coil make and size.

e. Flowmeter type.



b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.

e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.






f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and


1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

L. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.






3.18 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of

Construction Manager.

B. Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked.

Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the

extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final

report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements

checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete

and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final

report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and

request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, Owner may contact AABC Headquarters regarding

the AABC National Performance Guaranty.


3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.






DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply, return and outdoor air.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).




2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each

type of insulation.



C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing

product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.

2. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.

3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.


















identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and

cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed


C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish

listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the

location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the

completed Work.

1. Ductwork Mockups:

a. One 10-foot section each of rectangular and round straight duct.

b. One each of a 90-degree mitered round and rectangular elbow, and one each of a

90-degree radius round and rectangular elbow.

c. One rectangular branch takeoff and one round branch takeoff from a rectangular

duct. One round tee fitting.

d. One rectangular and round transition fitting.

e. Four support hangers for round and rectangular ductwork.

f. Each type of damper and specialty.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details

for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.






5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.




1.7 COORDINATION


Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before

preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for


maintenance.


1.8 SCHEDULING





construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum

Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"

articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.







C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C795.


process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK

jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in

"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES



B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.3 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for

insulation type and service conditions.


3. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.



2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.









3. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's

recommended dry film thickness.


3. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



4. Color: Aluminum.








3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.6 TAPES



1. Width: 3 inches.






B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;


1. Width: 3 inches.










6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015-inch

thick, 1/2-inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020-inch

thick, 1/2-inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of

insulation indicated.

2. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in

position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following

requirements:

a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030-inch thick by 2 inches

square.

b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION











3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces,

free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for

each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.



dry state.



F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,





and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to



J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet


K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of







3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive

self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.


ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking


N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):



A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.






f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1-inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.






4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1-inch

o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-

barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the

insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and

inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with

individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.





B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be

limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:






1. Indoor, concealed supply, return and outdoor air.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.



7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate all ductwork per 2015 International Energy Conservation Code, section C403.2.9.

B. Concealed and exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the

following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and R-6.

2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and R-6






HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems.


1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance

thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).




2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.

3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.

4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties.



C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing

product and intended use.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square.

3. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2.

4. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square.

5. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.


















identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,

and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed


C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish

listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the

location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the

completed Work.

1. Piping Mockups:

a. One 10-foot section of NPS 2 straight pipe.

b. One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow.

c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting.

d. One NPS 2 or smaller valve and one NPS 2-1/2 or larger valve.

e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.

f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of

insulation.

g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer.

h. One pressure temperature tap.

i. One mechanical coupling.

j. One union.






2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details

for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.



in writing.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.




1.7 COORDINATION


Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for


maintenance.


1.8 SCHEDULING





construction.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and articles for where

insulating materials shall be applied.


C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of

less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in

accordance with ASTM C795.


process.

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 1, without jacket.

2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 2, with factory-applied ASJ jacket.



G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C547.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A, without factory-applied jacket.

2. 850 deg F.



2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.






2.3 ADHESIVES



B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no

flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.

1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F.


4. Color: Black.

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

E. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.


3. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient

services.



3. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below-

ambient services.



3. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.






1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's

recommended dry film thickness.


3. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with


1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.


3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with


B. Joint Sealants:

1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.

a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.

b. Color: White or gray.

C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



3. Color: Aluminum.













2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

2. Color: White.

3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

D. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,

Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper.

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.9 TAPES



1. Width: 3 inches.











2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch

wide with wing seal or closed seal.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel, with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 inch wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect

insulation application.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to

insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an

epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.

Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods

for operating temperature range.






2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300

deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating

materials and application methods for operating temperature range.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses

required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.



dry state.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation

materials that get wet.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,





and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to



4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet


L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:








jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of


3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.


ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking


O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in

similar fashion to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:


2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface




3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.







2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface




3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):


D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and

Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions,

and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless


2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation made from same material and

density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against

adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces

with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform

with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation of same material and thickness as

that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely

to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and thickness

as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times

the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves,

insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill

joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and

thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less

than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so

strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the

insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient

services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.






6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized

preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2

times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil

or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size

and color of pipe labels.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation

from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless

steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION


3.7 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION







1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without

deforming insulation materials.



3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with


4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple








adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of

same thickness as that of pipe insulation.





when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of

cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.




3.8 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as

that of pipe insulation.






4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation

when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow

valve operation without disturbing insulation.


4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.



1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.



3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with


4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple








adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.










when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.



when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.






factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated and for horizontal applications, install with 1-inch overlap at

longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.

E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:






1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe

insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-pre-sized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections, with one end

overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install pre-sized jacket with an approximate

overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive

or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around

overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply

adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer

to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge

to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with

an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit

allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of

jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal

for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and

wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.11 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.









E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by

Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their

installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three

locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded

strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three

locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section

or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Underground piping.

2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:

1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:


b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

C. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:








b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

3.15 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:


a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.

b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.

c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.

B. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:


a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.






COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 - 1

SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Cx process requirements for the following HVAC systems, assemblies, and

equipment:

1. Energy supply systems.

2. Heat generation systems.

3. Cooling generation systems.

4. Central-station air-handling systems.

5. Air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems.

6. Heating and cooling terminal and unitary equipment.

7. HVAC controls.

8. TAB verification.


1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general Cx process

requirements and CxA responsibilities.

2. For construction checklists, comply with requirements in various Division 23 Sections

specifying HVAC systems, system components, equipment, and products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. Cx: Commissioning, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

C. CxA: Commissioning Authority, as defined in Section 019113 "General Commissioning

Requirements."

D. DDC: Direct digital controls.

E. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.






F. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms

are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems,


G. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


A. Qualification Data: For BAS and HVAC Testing Technician.

B. Construction Checklists: Draft construction checklists will be created by CxA for Contractor

review.

C. Construction Checklists: Material, installation, and performance test checklists for systems,

assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components to be part of the Cx process and according

to requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

1. Instrumentation and control for HVAC, including the following:

a. Control systems equipment.

b. Control valves.

c. Control dampers.

d. Flow instruments.

e. Moisture instruments.

f. Position instruments.

g. Pressure instruments.

h. Temperature instruments.

i. Weather stations.

j. Sequence of operations.

2. Fuel piping, including the following:

a. Liquid-petroleum gas piping, fittings, and specialties.

3. Hydronic piping, including the following:

a. Heating hot-water piping, fittings, and specialties.

b. Hydronic pumps and motors.


d. Meters and gages.

e. General-duty and specialty valves.

f. Hangers and supports.

g. Heat tracing.

h. Vibration isolation.

4. Refrigerant piping, including the following:

a. Refrigerant piping, fittings, and specialties.






b. Refrigerant charge.


d. Meters and gages.

e. General-duty and specialty valves.

f. Hangers and supports.

g. Vibration isolation.

5. Air distribution systems, including the following:

a. Supply, return, and exhaust systems.

b. Metal ducts, liners, and fittings.

c. Nonmetal ducts and fittings.

d. Hangers and supports.

e. Vibration isolation.

f. Flexible ducts and fittings.

g. Air-duct accessories, including volume dampers, fire and smoke dampers, turning

vanes, sound attenuators, and flexible connectors.

h. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.

6. Air-handling equipment, including the following:

a. Fans and motors.

b. Indoor air-handling units with and without coils, dampers, and filters.

c. Outdoor air-handling units with and without coils, dampers, and filters.

d. Motors.

e. Hangers and supports.

f. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints.

7. Boilers, including the following:

a. Supports and restraints.

b. Trim, accessories, and factory-installed controls.

c. Breechings, chimneys, and stacks.

d. Feedwater equipment.

8. Mechanical insulation, including the following:

a. Duct and plenum insulation.

b. Fire-suppression, plumbing, and HVAC equipment insulation.

c. Plumbing and HVAC piping insulation.

D. Test equipment and instrumentation list, identifying the following:

1. Equipment/instrument identification number.

2. Planned Cx application or use.

3. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

4. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and

instrumentation.






5. Equipment manufacturers' proprietary instrumentation and tools. For each instrument or

tool, identify the following:

a. Instrument or tool identification number.

b. Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is

required.

c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.

d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the

instrument or tool, where appropriate.


A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform BAS construction checklist

verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and Cx test

demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of BAS, HVAC, electrical

concepts, and building operations.



3. International Society of Automation (ISA)-Certified Control Systems Technician (CCST)

Level I.

B. HVAC Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC construction

checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, Cx tests, and

Cx test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:

1. Journey level or equivalent skill level. Vocational school four-year-program graduate or

an Associate's degree in mechanical systems, air conditioning, or similar field. Degree

may be offset by three years' experience in servicing mechanical systems in the HVAC

industry. Generally, required knowledge includes HVAC systems, electrical concepts,

building operations, and application and use of tools and instrumentation to measure

performance of HVAC equipment, assemblies, and systems.



C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration:

1. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.

2. Be calibrated at manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags

permanently affixed to the instrument being used.

3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout duration of use on

Project.

4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.

D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:






1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed

equipment included in the Cx process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or

prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise

work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, shall comply

with the following:

a. Be calibrated by manufacturer with current calibration tags permanently affixed.

b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in operation and


c. HVAC proprietary test instrumentation and tools become property of Owner at the

time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

A. Prepare detailed construction checklists for following HVAC systems, assemblies, subsystems,

equipment, and components:

1. Heat generation systems, including the following:

a. Boilers.

2. Cooling generation systems, including the following:

a. Direct-expansion refrigeration systems.

3. Central-station air-handling systems.

4. Air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems, including the following:

a. Supply, return, outdoor-air, and exhaust-air distribution systems.

b. Hydronic systems.

5. Heating and cooling terminal and unitary equipment, including the following:

a. Unit heaters.

b. Finned-tube radiation.

c. Electric heating.

6. Controls and instrumentation.

7. TAB verification.






3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST REVIEW

A. Review and provide written comments on draft construction checklists. CxA will create

required draft construction checklists and provide them to Contractor.

B. Return draft construction checklist review comments within 10 days of receipt.

C. When review comments have been resolved, the CxA will provide final construction checklists,

marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

D. Use only construction checklists, marked "Approved for Use, (date)."

3.3 Cx TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and

started and that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved

submittals.

B. Certify that HVAC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated,

that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that

pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted,

discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved

test procedures (for example, normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position,

unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

3.4 Cx TEST CONDITIONS

A. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.

1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load

when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions,

calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated

conditions as directed by CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of

simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.

2. Cx test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is

impractical.

3. Cx test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when

design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.

B. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC system,

document the deficiency and report it to Architect. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule

tests.






C. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and

documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.5 Cx TESTS COMMON TO HVAC SYSTEMS

A. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and

components, including operational and control functions, to verify compliance with acceptance

criteria.

B. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes, interlocks,

control responses, responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response according to

acceptance criteria.

C. Coordinate schedule with, and perform Cx activities at the direction of, CxA.

D. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation

checks, startup, and performance tests requirements specified in Division 23 Sections specifying

HVAC systems and equipment.

E. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to perform and document the

following:

1. Construction checklist verification tests.

2. Construction checklist verification test demonstrations.

3. Cx tests.

4. Cx test demonstrations.

F. Vibration Isolation in HVAC Systems:

1. Prerequisites: Acceptance of results of construction checklists for vibration control

devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and

Equipment."

2. Components to Be Tested:

a. Vibration isolation control devices in HVAC systems.

b. Structural systems.

3. Test Purpose: Evaluate effectiveness of vibration isolation control devices.

4. Test Conditions: Measure vibration of the facility structure at three locations designated

by Owner's witness while the isolated equipment operates.

5. Test Conditions: Measure vibration of the facility structure at three locations designated

by Owner's witness at the following operating conditions:

a. Maximum speed.

b. Minimum speed.

c. Critical speed.

6. Acceptance Criteria: Structure-borne vibration not to exceed specified performance.






3.6 TAB VERIFICATION

A. Prerequisites: Completion of "Examination" Article requirements and correction of deficiencies,

as specified in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

B. Completion of "Preparation" Article requirements for preparation of a TAB plan that includes

strategies and step-by-step procedures, and system-readiness checks and reports, as specified in

Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

C. Scope: HVAC air systems and hydronic piping systems.

D. Purpose: Differential flow relationships intended to maintain air pressurization differentials

between the various areas of Project.

E. Conditions of the Test:

1. Cx Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in "Inspections" Article in


2. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume.

3. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume.

4. For measurements at air-handling units with economizer controls; systems operating in

economizer mode with 100 percent outside air.

F. Acceptance Criteria:

1. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections" Article in


2. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements documented in

the final report by more than two times the tolerances allowed.

3. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in airflow

between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential relationship shall be

maintained.

3.7 HEATING CONTROL SYSTEM Cx TESTS

A. Heating-Water Supply Temperature Control:

1. Prerequisites: Installation verification of the following:

a. Startup of boiler.

b. Startup of heating-water pump(s).

c. TAB of heating-water flow and pressure.

d. Input Device: Heating-water supply temperature; thermostat.

e. Output Device: Control valve.

f. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Heating-water supply temperature.

2) Heating-water supply temperature set point.






3) Control-valve position.

2. Scope: Heating-water system.

3. Purpose: Control of heating-water supply temperature at input device.

4. Conditions of the Test:

a. Minimum heating-water flow.

b. Midrange Heating-Water Flow: percent of maximum.

c. Maximum heating-water flow.

5. Acceptance Criteria: Under all conditions, heating-water supply temperature is within

plus or minus 2.0 deg F of set point.

B. Heating-Water Supply Temperature Reset:


a. Startup of boiler.

b. Startup of heating-water pump(s).

c. TAB of heating-water flow and pressure.

d. Input Device: Heating-water supply temperature; thermostat.

e. Input Device: Outdoor-air temperature; outdoor-air sensor.

f. Output Device: Control valve.

g. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Outdoor-air temperature.

2) Heating-water supply temperature.

3) Heating-water supply temperature set point.

4) Control-valve position.

2. Scope: Heating-water system.

3. Purpose: Control of heating-water supply temperature at heating-water supply

temperature input device in response to variable outdoor-air temperature input; outdoor-

air sensor.

4. Conditions of the Test: Outdoor-air temperature input value may be overridden for this

test.

a. Low Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature between minus 30 and 0 deg F.

b. Midrange Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature between 30 and 45 deg F.

c. High Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature above 65 deg F.

5. Acceptance Criteria: Heating-water supply temperature resets in straight-line relationship

with outdoor-air temperature for the following reset schedule. Under all conditions,

heating-water supply temperature is within 2.0 deg F of set point.

a. 195 deg F heating water when outdoor-air temperature is minus 30 deg F.

b. 130 deg F heating water when outdoor-air temperature is 65 deg F.

c. Under all conditions, heating-water supply temperature is within plus or minus 2.0

deg F of set point.






C. Control Primary Circulating Pump(s):


a. Startup of heating-water pump(s).

b. Input Device: Outdoor-air temperature; outdoor-air sensor.

c. Output Device: Heating-water pump; DDC system command to starter relay.

d. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Outdoor-air temperature.

2) Operating status of primary circulating pump(s).

2. Scope: Heating-water pump(s) and associated controls.

3. Purpose: On-off control of heating-water pump(s) in response to variable outdoor-air

temperature input; outdoor-air sensor.


a. High Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature above 65 deg F.

b. Low Temperature: Outdoor-air temperature below 65 deg F.

5. Acceptance Criteria:

a. High Temperature: Pump(s) are off when outside-air temperature is above 65

deg F.

b. Low Temperature: Pump(s) are on when outside-air temperature is below 65

deg F.

3.8 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Cx TESTS

3.9 TERMINAL UNIT EQUIPMENT Cx TESTS

A. VAV Terminal Air Units with Coils:


a. Occupancy Input Device: Occupancy sensor.

b. Occupancy Output Device: DDC system binary output.

c. Room Temperature Input Device: Room thermostat.

d. Room Temperature Output Device: Electronic damper actuators and control-valve

operators.

e. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Room/area served.

2) Room occupied/unoccupied.

3) Room temperature indication.

4) Room temperature set point.

5) Room temperature set point, occupied.






6) Room temperature set point, unoccupied.

7) Air-damper position as percentage open.

8) Control-valve position as percentage open.

2. Scope: VAV terminal air units with hydronic coils in supply-air systems, and associated

controls.

3. Purpose:

a. Occupancy-dependent room temperature set-point reset.

b. Room temperature control.


a. Cx Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: 10 percent of each model/size unit.

b. Temperature Control - Occupied: Start with the room unoccupied. Occupy the

room and observe the change to occupied status. Observe temperature control until

room temperature is stable at occupied set point, plus or minus 1.0 deg F.

c. Temperature Control - Unoccupied: Start with the room occupied. Vacate the room

and observe the change to unoccupied status. Observe temperature control until

room temperature is stable at unoccupied set point, plus or minus 1.0 deg F.


a. Temperature Control - Occupied:

1) Control system status changes from "occupied" to "unoccupied" after the

specified time.

2) Room temperature is stable at occupied set point, plus or minus 1.0 deg F

within 10 minutes of occupancy. Room temperature does not overshoot or

undershoot set point by more than 2.0 deg F during transition.

b. Temperature Control - Unoccupied:

1) Control system status changes from "unoccupied" to "occupied"

immediately.

2) Room temperature is stable at unoccupied set point, plus or minus 1.0 deg F

within 30 minutes of occupancy.

3.10 AIR-HANDLING SYSTEM Cx TESTS

A. Supply Fan(s) Variable-Volume Control:


a. Volume Control Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct

static pressure referenced to conditioned-space static pressure.

b. Volume Control Output Device: Receiver controller to modulating damper

actuator. Set inlet guide vanes to closed position when fan is stopped.






c. Volume Control Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct

static pressure referenced to conditioned-space static pressure.

d. Volume Control Output Device: Receiver controller to motor speed controller. Set

variable-speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped.

e. High-Pressure Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static

pressure referenced to static pressure outside the duct.

f. High-Pressure Output Device: Receiver controller to motor starter.

g. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication.

2) Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point.

3) Supply-fan airflow rate.

4) Supply-fan speed.

2. Scope: VAV supply fan units and associated controls.

3. Purpose:

a. Supply-air discharge static pressure control.

b. Response to excess supply-air discharge static pressure condition.


a. Minimum supply-air flow.

b. Midrange Supply-Air Flow: 50 to 60 percent of maximum.

c. Maximum supply-air flow.

d. Excess supply-air discharge static pressure.


a. At all supply-air flow rates, and during changes in supply-air flow, discharge air

static pressure is at set point plus or minus 2 percent.

b. Fan stops and an alarm is initiated at the operator's workstation when supply-air

discharge static pressure is at the excess static pressure, plus or minus 2 percent.

B. Air-Handler Mixed-Air Control:


a. Minimum Position Input Device: DDC system time schedule.

b. Output Device: Receiver controller to modulating damper actuator(s).

c. Heating Reset Input Device: Room thermostat DDC system software.

d. Mixed-Air Temperature Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor.

e. Cooling Reset Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted electronic

temperature sensors.

f. Display the following at the operator's workstation:

1) Mixed-air-temperature indication.

2) Mixed-air-temperature set point.

3) Mixed-air damper position.






2. Scope: Air handler with mixed-air control and associated controls.

3. Purpose:

a. Occupied time control.

b. Minimum damper position control.

c. Heating reset control.

d. Mixed-air temperature control.

e. Cooling reset control.

f. Unoccupied time control.


a. Occupied Time Control: Start in unoccupied schedule. Advance to occupied

schedule time.

b. Minimum Damper Position Control: Command system to mode in which

minimum damper position is required.

c. Heating Reset Control: Create a call for heating.

d. Mixed-Air Temperature Control: Override mixed-air temperature set point to a

value 2.0 deg F above current mixed-air temperature.

e. Cooling Reset Control: Override outdoor-air temperature to a value that exceeds

return-air temperature.

f. Unoccupied Time Control: Advance to unoccupied schedule time.

g. Control Data Trend Log: Set up a data trend log of the following input device

values and output device commands. Record data at hourly intervals. Submit trend

data for 24-hour periods in which natural conditions require heating reset control,

mixed-air temperature control, and cooling reset control.

1) Minimum position input device.

2) Heating reset input device.

3) Mixed-air temperature input device.

4) Cooling reset input device.


a. Occupied Time Control: Mixed-air control is active in occupied mode.

b. Minimum Damper Position Control: Controller opens minimum outdoor-air

dampers.

c. Heating Reset Control: Controller sets outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.

d. Mixed-Air Temperature Control: Controller modulates outdoor-, return-, and

relief-air dampers to maintain temporary mixed-air temperature set point, plus or

minus 1.0 deg F.

e. Cooling Reset Control: Controller sets outdoor-air dampers to minimum position

when outdoor-air temperature exceeds return-air temperature.

f. Unoccupied Time Control: Controller positions outdoor- and relief-air dampers

closed and return-air dampers open.

g. Control Data Trend Log: Data verify control according to sequence of control.






DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 230923 - 1

SECTION 230923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems.

2. Delivery of selected control devices to equipment and systems manufacturers for factory

installation and to HVAC systems installers for field installation.


1. Section 230923.22 "Position Instruments" for limit switches that connect to DDC

systems.

2. Section 230923.43 "Weather Stations" for weather stations that connect to DDC systems.

3. Communications Cabling:

a. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for balanced twisted

pair communications cable.

4. Raceways:

a. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceways for

low-voltage control cable.

5. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification requirements for

electrical components.

6. Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems" for identification

requirements for communications components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set

of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.

C. BACnet Specific Definitions:






1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A

communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a

network.

2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of

BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to

build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.

3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet

messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP

subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.

4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for

compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International.

5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that

identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.

D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a

low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used

interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.

E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing

on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network

Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller.

F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and

support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.

G. COV: Changes of value.

H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer

and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated.

I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made

at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote

subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable

of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data.

J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications.

K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic.

L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different

communication protocols.

M. HLC: Heavy load conditions.

N. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input

(AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are

continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and

temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally






represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used

interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.

O. I/P: Current to pneumatic.

P. LAN: Local area network.

Q. LNS: LonWorks Network Services.

R. LON Specific Definitions:

1. FTT-10: Echelon Transmitter-Free Topology Transceiver.

2. LonMark: Association comprising suppliers and installers of LonTalk products.

Association provides guidelines for implementing LonTalk protocol to ensure

interoperability through a standard or consistent implementation.

3. LonTalk: An open standard protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation that uses a

"Neuron Chip" for communication. LonTalk is a register trademark of Echelon.

4. LonWorks: Network technology developed by Echelon.

5. Node: Device that communicates using CEA-709.1-C protocol and that is connected to a

CEA-709.1-C network.

6. Node Address: The logical address of a node on the network, consisting of a Domain

number, Subnet number, and Node number. "Node number" portion of an address is a

number assigned to device during installation, is unique within a subnet, and is not a

factory-set unique Node ID.

7. Node ID: A unique 48-bit identifier assigned at factory to each CEA-709.1-C device.

Sometimes called a "Neuron ID."

8. Program ID: An identifier (number) stored in a device (usually EEPROM) that identifies

node manufacturer, functionality of device (application and sequence), transceiver used,

and intended device usage.

9. Standard Configuration Property Type (SCPT): Pronounced "skip-it." A standard format

type maintained by LonMark International for configuration properties.

10. Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT): Pronounced "snivet." A standard format type

maintained by LonMark used to define data information transmitted and received by

individual nodes. "SNVT" is used in two ways. It is an acronym for "Standard Network

Variable Type" and is often used to indicate a network variable itself (i.e., it can mean "a

network variable of a standard network variable type").

11. Subnet: Consists of a logical grouping of up to 127 nodes, where logical grouping is

defined by node addressing. Each subnet is assigned a number, which is unique within a

Domain. See "Node Address."

12. TP/FT-10: Free Topology Twisted Pair network defined by CEA-709.3 and is most

common media type for a CEA-709.1-C control network.

13. TP/XF-1250: High-speed, 1.25-Mbps, twisted-pair, doubly terminated bus network

defined by "LonMark Interoperability Guidelines" typically used only to connect multiple

TP/FT-10 networks.

14. User-Defined Configuration Property Type (UCPT): Pronounced "U-Keep-It." A

Configuration Property format type that is defined by device manufacturer.

15. User-Defined Network Variable Type (UNVT): Network variable format defined by

device manufacturer. UNVTs create non-standard communications that other vendors'






devices may not correctly interpret and may negatively impact system operation. UNVTs

are not allowed.

S. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

T. Mobile Device: A data-enabled phone or tablet computer capable of connecting to a cellular

data network and running a native control application or accessing a web interface.

U. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.

V. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses

twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication.

W. MTBF: Mean time between failures.

X. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application

controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for

transmission of global data.

Y. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to

another network. No routing information is added to protocol.

Z. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.

AA. POT: Portable operator's terminal.

BB. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness.

CC. RAM: Random access memory.

DD. RF: Radio frequency.

EE. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.

FF. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database.

GG. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol.

HH. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

II. USB: Universal Serial Bus.

JJ. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying

protocol.

KK. VAV: Variable air volume.

LL. WLED: White light emitting diode.






1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Multiple Submissions:

1. If multiple submissions are required to execute work within schedule, first submit a

coordinated schedule clearly defining intent of multiple submissions. Include a proposed

date of each submission with a detailed description of submittal content to be included in

each submission.

2. Clearly identify each submittal requirement indicated and in which submission the

information will be provided.

3. Include an updated schedule in each subsequent submission with changes highlighted to

easily track the changes made to previous submitted schedule.

B. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes.

2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating

process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control

signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical

power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including

temperature and humidity.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product

specification sheets.

4. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors effecting

performance.

5. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for

each unique product.

6. When manufacturer's product datasheets apply to a product series rather than a specific

product model, clearly indicate and highlight only applicable information.

7. Each submitted piece of product literature shall clearly cross reference specification and

drawings that submittal is to cover.

C. Software Submittal:

1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server,

gateway, and DDC controller.

2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products

in which software will be installed.

3. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic

software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party

D. Shop Drawings:






1. General Requirements:

a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor

and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission.

b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches

information in each title block.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable.

3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

4. Detail means of vibration isolation and show attachments to rotating equipment.

5. Plan Drawings indicating the following:

a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork,

and piping.

b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with

control products indicated.

c. Each desktop workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel

instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to

DDC controller, if included in Project.

d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed

installed condition.

e. Network communication cable and raceway routing.

f. Information, drawn to scale.

g. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing coordinated with building

services for review before installation.

6. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following:

a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal

operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and

valve, if included in Project.

b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model

number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number.

c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system.

d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating

labels for all wiring terminals.

e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different

drawings showing same point.

f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits

including interlocks, switches, relays, and interface to DDC controllers.

g. Narrative sequence of operation.

h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.

7. Control panel drawings indicating the following:

a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and tubing

connections.






b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components,

cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates, and allocated spare space.

c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend.

d. Unique drawing for each panel.

8. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each.

b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system.

c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of

interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or optical fiber cable

type. Indicate raceway type and size for each.

d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of

operator interface with unique identification for each.

9. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following:

a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements

(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line

conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power

supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each.

c. Each product requiring power with requirements

(volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each.

d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each.

10. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:

a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O.

b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product.

c. Control signal tubing to sensors, switches, and transmitters.

d. Process signal tubing to sensors, switches, and transmitters.

e. Pneumatic main air and control signal tubing to pneumatic damper and valve

actuators, pilot-positioners if applicable, and associated transducers.

11. Color graphics indicating the following:

a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided.

b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of

pictures, graphics, and data displayed.

c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens.

E. System Description:

1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator interfaces

and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other

network devices, and power supplies.

2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing, and

events which initiate generation.






3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Loss of power.

b. Loss of network communication signal.

c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints.

d. Operator workstation failure.

e. Server failure.

f. Gateway failure.

g. Network failure

h. Controller failure.

i. Instrument failure.

j. Control damper and valve actuator failure.

4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner.

5. Description of testing plans and procedures.

6. Description of Owner training.

F. Samples:

1. For each of the following exposed product, installed in finished space for approval of

selection of aesthetic characteristics:

a. Gas instruments specified in Section 230923.16 "Gas Instruments."

b. Moisture instruments specified in Section 230923.19 "Moisture Instruments."

c. Motion instruments specified in Section 230923.21 "Motion Instruments."

d. Pressure instruments specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments."

e. Temperature instruments specified in Section 230923.27 "Temperature

Instruments."

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For DDC system products and installation indicated as being

delegated.

1. Supporting documentation showing DDC system design complies with performance

requirements indicated, including calculations and other documentation necessary to

prove compliance.

2. Schedule and design calculations for control dampers and actuators.

a. Flow at Project design and minimum flow conditions.

b. Face velocity at Project design and minimum airflow conditions.

c. Pressure drop across damper at Project design and minimum airflow conditions.

d. AMCA 500-D damper installation arrangement used to calculate and schedule

pressure drop, as applicable to installation.

e. Maximum close-off pressure.

f. Leakage airflow at maximum system pressure differential (fan close-off pressure).

g. Torque required at worst case condition for sizing actuator.

h. Actuator selection indicating torque provided.

i. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close, or modulate).

j. Actuator position on loss of power.






k. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

3. Schedule and design calculations for control valves and actuators.


b. Pressure-differential drop across valve at Project design flow condition.

c. Maximum system pressure-differential drop (pump close-off pressure) across valve

at Project minimum flow condition.

d. Design and minimum control valve coefficient with corresponding valve position.


f. Leakage flow at maximum system pressure differential.



i. Actuator signal to control damper (on, close or modulate).

j. Actuator position on loss of power.

k. Actuator position on loss of control signal.

4. Schedule and design calculations for selecting flow instruments.

a. Instrument flow range.

b. Project design and minimum flow conditions with corresponding accuracy, control

signal to transmitter, and output signal for remote control.

c. Extreme points of extended flow range with corresponding accuracy, control signal

to transmitter, and output signal for remote control.

d. Pressure-differential loss across instrument at Project design flow conditions.

e. Where flow sensors are mated with pressure transmitters, provide information for

each instrument separately and as an operating pair.


A. Coordination Drawings:

1. Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to scale, on which

the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from


a. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe and

equipment.

b. Structural members to which products will be attached.

c. Wall-mounted instruments located in finished space showing relationship to light

switches, fire-alarm devices and other installed devices.

d. Size and location of wall access panels for products installed behind walls and

requiring access.

2. Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

a. Ceiling components.






b. Size and location of access panels for products installed above inaccessible ceiling

assemblies and requiring access.

c. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

1) Lighting fixtures.

2) Air outlets and inlets.

3) Speakers.

4) Sprinklers.

5) Access panels.

6) Motion sensors.

7) Pressure sensors.

8) Temperature sensors and other DDC control system instruments.

B. Qualification Data:

1. Systems Provider Qualification Data:

a. Resume of project manager assigned to Project.

b. Resumes of application engineering staff assigned to Project.

c. Resumes of installation and programming technicians assigned to Project.

d. Resumes of service technicians assigned to Project.

e. Brief description of past project including physical address, floor area, number of

floors, building system cooling and heating capacity, and building's primary

function.

f. Description of past project DDC system, noting similarities to Project scope and

complexity indicated.

g. Names of staff assigned to past project that will also be assigned to execute work

of this Project.

h. Owner contact information for past project including name, phone number, and e-

mail address.

i. Contractor contact information for past project including name, phone number, and

e-mail address.

j. Architect and Engineer contact information for past project including name, phone

number, and e-mail address.

2. Manufacturer's qualification data.

3. Testing agency's qualifications data.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Product Certificates:

1. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certifying that each proposed DDC system

component complies with ASHRAE 135.

2. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certifying that each proposed DDC system

component complies with LonWorks.

E. Product Test Reports: For each product that requires testing to be performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.






F. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each separate test performed.

G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation, and




a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided

in electronic PDF format.

b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of

reports, checklists, and trend logs.

c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data.

d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses, and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer

and service representatives for DDC system and products.

e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging

on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding

computer control, and changing set points and variables.

f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of

statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and

modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to:

1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware.

2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration.

3) Debug hardware problems.

4) Repair or replace hardware.

h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language

including set points, tuning parameters, and object database.

i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as

DVDs.

j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.

k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information

for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors.

l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems,

custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics

software.

m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents.






n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time

between tasks; and task descriptions.

o. Owner training materials.


A. Furnish extra materials and parts that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Include product manufacturers' recommended parts lists for proper product operation over four-

year period following warranty period. Parts list shall be indicated for each year.

C. Furnish parts, as indicated by manufacturer's recommended parts list, for product operation

during one-year period following warranty period.

D. Furnish quantity indicated of matching product(s) in Project inventory for each unique size and

type of following:

1. Network Controller: One.

2. Programmable Application Controller: One.

3. Application-Specific Controller: One.

4. Room Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: One.

5. Room Temperature Sensor: One.

6. General-Purpose Relay: One.

7. Multifunction Time-Delay Relay: One.

8. Latching Relay: One.

9. Current-Sensing Relay: One.

10. Combination On-Off Status Sensor and On-Off Relay: One.

11. Transformer: One.

12. DC Power Supply: One.


A. DDC System Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of DDC systems and products.

2. DDC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a continuous period of five

years within time of bid.

3. DDC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at least three

past projects.

4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, operation, and maintenance

manuals for all products intended for use.

5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:

a. Product research and development.

b. Product and application engineering.






c. Product manufacturing, testing, and quality control.

d. Technical support for DDC system installation training, commissioning, and

troubleshooting of installations.

e. Owner operator training.

B. DDC System Provider Qualifications:

1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer.

2. In-place facility located within 100 miles of Project.

3. Demonstrated past experience with installation of DDC system products being installed

for period within three consecutive years before time of bid.

4. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and value.

5. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.

6. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to

execute work according to schedule.

7. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period.

8. Product parts inventory to support on-going DDC system operation for a period of not

less than 5 years after Substantial Completion.

9. DDC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to

comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by

manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products that fail

in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in

service to Owner.

2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve

deficiencies.

a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization.

3. Warranty service shall occur during normal business hours and commence within 24

hours of Owner's warranty service request.

4. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

a. For Gateway: Two-year parts and labor warranty for each.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DDC SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS



1. Alerton Inc.

2. Delta Controls Inc.

3. Honeywell International Inc.

4. Johnson Controls, Inc.

5. Reliable Controls Corporation.

6. Siemens Industry, Inc. (Building Technologies Division).

7. Trane.

2.2 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and program

logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and

processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control

algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of predefined conditions.

1. DDC system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC

controllers, other network devices, operator interfaces, and software.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


2.3 WEB ACCESS

A. DDC system shall be web based.

1. Web-Based Access to DDC System:

a. DDC system software shall be based on server thin-client architecture, designed

around open standards of web technology. DDC system server shall be accessed

using a web browser over DDC system network, using Owner's LAN, and

remotely over Internet through Owner's LAN.

b. Intent of thin-client architecture is to provide operators complete access to DDC

system via a web browser. No special software other than a web browser shall be

required to access graphics, point displays, and trends; to configure trends, points,

and controllers; and to edit programming.

c. Web access shall be password protected.















A. Delegated Design, Qualified Professional: Engage a qualified professional to design DDC

system to satisfy requirements indicated.

1. System Performance Objectives:

a. DDC system shall manage HVAC systems.

b. DDC system control shall operate HVAC systems to achieve optimum operating

costs while using least possible energy and maintaining specified performance.

c. DDC system shall respond to power failures, HVAC equipment failures, and

adverse and emergency conditions encountered through connected I/O points.

d. DDC system shall operate while unattended by an operator and through operator

interaction.

e. DDC system shall record trends and transaction of events and produce report

information such as performance, energy, occupancies, and equipment operation.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Products installed in ducts, equipment, and return-air paths

shall comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with

appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. DDC System Speed:

1. Response Time of Connected I/O:

a. AI point values connected to DDC system shall be updated at least every two

seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with

this requirement.

b. BI point values connected to DDC system shall be updated at least every two

seconds for use by DDC controllers. Points used globally shall also comply with

this requirement.

c. AO points connected to DDC system shall begin to respond to controller output

commands within one second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this

requirement.

d. BO point values connected to DDC system shall respond to controller output

commands within one second(s). Global commands shall also comply with this

requirement.

2. Display of Connected I/O:

a. Analog point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at

least every five seconds for use by operator.

b. Binary point COV connected to DDC system shall be updated and displayed at

least every five seconds for use by operator.

c. Alarms of analog and digital points connected to DDC system shall be displayed

within 15 seconds of activation or change of state.






d. Graphic display refresh shall update within four seconds.

e. Point change of values and alarms displayed from workstation to workstation when

multiple operators are viewing from multiple workstations shall not exceed graphic

refresh rate indicated.

D. Network Bandwidth: Design each network of DDC system to include at least 30 percent

available spare bandwidth with DDC system operating under normal and heavy load conditions

indicated. Calculate bandwidth usage and apply a safety factor to ensure that requirement is

satisfied when subjected to testing under worst case conditions.

E. DDC System Data Storage:

1. Include capability to archive not less than 24 consecutive months of historical data for all

I/O points connected to system, including alarms, event histories, transaction logs, trends

and other information indicated.

2. Local Storage:

a. Provide server with data storage indicated. Server(s) shall use IT industry standard

database platforms and be capable of functions described in "DDC Data Access"

Paragraph.

F. DDC Data Access:

1. When logged into the system, operator shall be able to also interact with any DDC

controller connected to DDC system as required for functional operation of DDC system.

2. System(s) shall be used for application configuration; for archiving, reporting and

trending of data; for operator transaction archiving and reporting; for network

information management; for alarm annunciation; and for operator interface tasks and

controls application management.

G. Future Expandability:

1. DDC system size shall be expandable to an ultimate capacity of at least two times total

I/O points indicated.

2. Additional DDC controllers, I/O and associated wiring shall be all that is needed to

achieve ultimate capacity. Initial network infrastructure shall be designed and installed to

support ultimate capacity.

3. Operator interfaces installed initially shall not require hardware and software additions

and revisions for ultimate capacity.

H. Input Point Displayed Accuracy: Input point displayed values shall meet following end-to-end

overall system accuracy, including errors associated with meter, sensor, transmitter, lead wire or

cable, and analog to digital conversion.

1. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide: Within 50 ppm.

2. Temperature, Dew Point:






a. Air: Within 0.5 deg F.

b. Space: Within 0.5 deg F.

c. Outdoor: Within 2 deg F.

3. Temperature, Dry Bulb:




d. Heating Hot Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

e. Other Temperatures Not Indicated: Within 1 deg F.

4. Temperature, Wet Bulb:




I. Precision of I/O Reported Values: Values reported in database and displayed shall have

following precision:

1. Current:

a. Milliamperes: Nearest 1/100th of a milliampere.

b. Amperes: Nearest 1/10th of an ampere up to 100 A; nearest ampere for 100 A and

more.

2. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide (ppm): Nearest ppm.

3. Temperature:

a. Air, Ducts and Equipment: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

b. Outdoor: Nearest degree.

c. Space: Nearest 1/10th of a degree.

d. Heating Hot Water: Nearest degree.

4. Voltage: Nearest 1/10 volt up to 100 V; nearest volt above 100 V.

J. Control Stability: Control variables indicated within the following limits:

1. Gas:

a. Carbon Dioxide: Within 50 ppm.

2. Temperature, Dry Bulb:








c. Chilled Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

d. Condenser Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

e. Heating Hot Water: Within 0.5 deg F.

f. Energy Recovery Runaround Liquid: Within 0.5 deg F.

3. Temperature, Wet Bulb:



K. Environmental Conditions for Controllers, Gateways, and Routers:

1. Products shall operate without performance degradation under ambient environmental

temperature, pressure and humidity conditions encountered for installed location.

a. If product alone cannot comply with requirement, install product in a protective

enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance.

Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated, cooled and ventilated as

required by product and application.

2. Products shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following minimum

requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Products not available

with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed in

protective secondary enclosures. Installed location shall dictate the following NEMA 250

enclosure requirements:

a. Outdoors, Protected: Type 2.

b. Outdoors, Unprotected: Type 4.

c. Indoors, Heated with Filtered Ventilation: Type 1.

d. Indoors, Heated with Non-Filtered Ventilation: Type 2.

e. Indoors, Heated and Air Conditioned: Type 1.

f. Mechanical Equipment Rooms:

1) Chiller and Boiler Rooms: Type 12.

2) Air-Moving Equipment Rooms: Type 1.

g. Localized Areas Exposed to Washdown: Type 4.

h. Within Duct Systems and Air-Moving Equipment Not Exposed to Possible

Condensation: Type 2.

i. Within Duct Systems and Air-Moving Equipment Exposed to Possible


j. Hazardous Locations: Explosion-proof rating for condition.

L. Environmental Conditions for Instruments and Actuators:

1. Instruments and actuators shall operate without performance degradation under the

ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions

specified and encountered for installed location.






a. If instruments and actuators alone cannot comply with requirement, install

instruments and actuators in protective enclosures that are isolated and protected

from conditions impacting performance. Enclosure shall be internally insulated,

electrically heated, cooled and ventilated as required by instrument and

application.

2. Instruments and accessories shall be protected with enclosures satisfying the following

minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Instruments not

available with integral enclosures complying with requirements indicated shall be housed

in protective secondary enclosures. Instrument's installed location shall dictate following

NEMA 250 enclosure requirements:















M. DDC System Reliability:

1. Design, install and configure DDC controllers, routers, to yield a MTBF of at least

40,000 hours, based on a confidence level of at least 90 percent. MTBF value shall

include any failure for any reason to any part of products indicated.

2. If required to comply with MTBF indicated, include DDC system and product

redundancy to maintain DCC system, and associated systems and equipment that are

being controlled, operational and under automatic control.

3. Critical systems and equipment that require a higher degree of DDC system redundancy

than MTBF indicated shall be indicated on Drawings.

N. Electric Power Quality:

1. Power-Line Surges:

a. Protect susceptible DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from

power-line surges to comply with requirements of IEEE C62.41.

b. Do not use fuses for surge protection.

c. Test protection in the normal mode and in the common mode, using the following

two waveforms:






1) 10-by-1000-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 V and a peak

current of 60 A.

2) 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 V and a peak

current of 500 A.

2. Power Conditioning:

a. Protect susceptible DDC system products connected to ac power circuits from

irregularities and noise rejection. Characteristics of power-line conditioner shall be

as follows:

1) At 85 percent load, output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or

minus 1 percent of nominal when input voltage fluctuates between minus 20

percent to plus 10 percent of nominal.

2) During load changes from zero to full load, output voltage shall not deviate

by more than plus or minus 3 percent of nominal.

3) Accomplish full correction of load switching disturbances within five

cycles, and 95 percent correction within two cycles of onset of disturbance.

4) Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3-1/2 percent at full load.

3. Ground Fault: Protect products from ground fault by providing suitable grounding.

Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition.

O. Continuity of Operation after Electric Power Interruption:

1. Equipment and associated factory-installed controls, field-installed controls, electrical

equipment, and power supply connected to building normal and backup power systems

shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to operating state occurring

immediately before loss of normal power, without need for manual intervention by

operator when power is restored either through backup power source or through normal

power if restored before backup power is brought online.

2.5 PANEL-MOUNTED, MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCHES

A. Manual Override of Control Dampers:

1. Include panel-mounted, two-position, selector switch for each automatic control damper

being controlled by DDC controller.

2. Label each switch with damper designation served by switch.

3. Label switch positions to indicate either "Manual" or "Auto" control signal to damper.

4. With switch in "Auto" position signal to control damper actuator shall be control loop

output signal from DDC controller.

5. With switch in "Manual" position, signal to damper actuator shall be controlled at panel

with either an integral or separate switch to include local control.

a. For Binary Control Dampers: Manual two-position switch shall have "Close" and

"Open" switch positions indicated. With switch in "Close" position, damper shall

close. With switch in "Open" position, damper shall open.






b. For Analog Control Dampers: A gradual switch shall have "Close" and "Open"

switch limits indicated. Operator shall be able to rotate switch knob to adjust

damper to any position from close to open.

6. DDC controller shall monitor and report position of each manual override selector

switch. With switch placed in "manual" position, DDC controller shall signal an override

condition to alert operator that damper is under manual, not automatic, control.

7. Configure manual override switches to allow operator to manually operate damper while

at panel without DDC controller installed and operational.

8. Terminal equipment including VAV units, and unit heaters do not require manual

override unless otherwise indicated by sequence of operation.

B. Manual Override of Control Valves:

1. Include panel-mounted, two-position, selector switch for each automatic control valve

being controlled by a DDC controller.

2. Label each switch with valve designation served by switch.

3. Label switch positions to indicate either "Manual" or "Auto" control signal to valve.

4. With switch in "Auto" position, signal to control-valve actuator shall be a control loop

output signal from DDC controller.

5. With switch in "Manual" position, signal to valve actuator shall be controlled at panel

with either an integral or a separate switch to include local control.

a. For Binary Control Dampers: Manual two-position switch shall have "Close" and

"Open" switch positions indicated. With switch in "Close" position, damper shall

close. With switch in "Open" position, damper shall open.

b. For Analog Control Dampers: A gradual switch shall have "Open" and "Close"

switch limits indicated. Operator shall be able to rotate switch knob to adjust

damper to any position from close to open.

6. DDC controller shall monitor and report position of each manual override selector

switch. With switch placed in "manual" position, DDC controller shall signal an override

condition to alert operator that valve is under manual, not automatic, control.

7. Configure manual override switches to allow operator to manually operate valve while at

panel without DDC controller installed and operational.

8. Terminal equipment including VAV units, and unit heaters do not require manual

override unless otherwise indicated by sequence of operation.

2.6 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. System architecture shall consist of no more than two or three levels of LANs.

1. Level one LAN shall connect network controllers and operator workstations.

2. Level one or Level two LAN shall connect programmable application controllers to other

programmable application controllers, and to network controllers.

3. Level two or Level three LAN shall connect application-specific controllers to

programmable application controllers and network controllers.






4. Level two or Level three LAN shall connect application-specific controllers to

application-specific controllers.

B. Minimum Data Transfer and Communication Speed:

1. LAN Connecting Operator Workstations and Network Controllers: 100 Mbps.

2. LAN Connecting Programmable Application Controllers: 1000 kbps.

3. LAN Connecting Application-Specific Controllers: 115,000 bps.

C. DDC system shall consist of dedicated LANs that are not shared with other building systems

and tenant data and communication networks.

D. System architecture shall be modular and have inherent ability to expand to not less than two

times system size indicated with no impact to performance indicated.

E. System architecture shall perform modifications without having to remove and replace existing

network equipment.

F. Number of LANs and associated communication shall be transparent to operator. All I/O points

residing on any LAN shall be capable of global sharing between all system LANs.

G. System design shall eliminate dependence on any single device for system alarm reporting and

control execution. Each controller shall operate independently by performing its' own control,

alarm management and historical data collection.

H. Special Network Architecture Requirements:

1. Air-Handling Systems: For control applications of an air-handling system that consists of

air-handling unit(s) and VAV terminal units, include a dedicated LAN of application-

specific controllers serving VAV terminal units connected directly to controller that is

controlling air-handling system air-handling unit(s). Basically, create a DDC system

LAN that aligns with air-handling system being controlled.

2.7 DDC SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES

A. Operator Means of System Access: Operator shall be able to access entire DDC system through

any of multiple means, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Remote connection through web access.

B. Access to system, regardless of operator means used, shall be transparent to operator.

C. Network Ports: For hardwired connection of desktop or portable workstation. Network port

shall be easily accessible, properly protected, clearly labeled, and installed at the following

locations:

1. Each mechanical equipment room.

2. Each boiler room.

3. Fire-alarm system command center.






D. Critical Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator-selected critical alarms shall be sent by DDC system to notify operator of

critical alarms that require immediate attention.

2. DDC system shall send alarm notification to multiple recipients that are assigned for each

alarm.

3. DDC system shall notify recipients by any or all means, including e-mail, text message

and prerecorded phone message to mobile and landline phone numbers.

2.8 NETWORKS

A. Acceptable networks for connecting workstations, mobile devices, and network controllers


1. ATA 878.1, ARCNET.

2. CEA-709.1-C.

3. IP.

4. IEEE 8802-3, Ethernet.

2.9 NETWORK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

A. Network communication protocol(s) used throughout entire DDC system shall be open to

Owner and available to other companies for use in making future modifications to DDC system.

B. ASHRAE 135 Protocol:

1. ASHRAE 135 communication protocol shall be sole and native protocol used throughout

entire DDC system.

2. DDC system shall not require use of gateways except to integrate HVAC equipment and

other building systems and equipment, not required to use ASHRAE 135 communication

protocol.

3. If used, gateways shall connect to DDC system using ASHRAE 135 communication

protocol and Project object properties and read/write services indicated by

interoperability schedule.

4. Operator workstations, controllers and other network devices shall be tested and listed by

BACnet Testing Laboratories.

2.10 DDC SYSTEM WIRELESS NETWORKS

A. Use Zigbee or an open industry standard and technology used by multiple DDC system

manufacturers technology to create a wireless mesh network to provide wireless connectivity

for network devices at multiple system levels including communications from programmable

application controllers and application-specific controllers to temperature sensors and from

network controllers to programmable application controllers and application-specific

controllers.






B. Installer shall design wireless networks to comply with DDC system performance requirements

indicated. Wireless network devices shall co-exist on same network with hardwired devices.

C. Hardwired controllers shall be capable of retrofit to wireless devices with no special software.

D. A wireless coordinator shall provide a wireless interface between programmable application

controllers, application-specific controllers, and network controllers.

E. Wireless Coordinators:

1. Each wireless mesh network shall use wireless coordinator(s) for initiation and formation

of network.

2. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.

3. Operate on the 2.4-GHz ISM Band.

4. Comply with IEEE 802.15.4 for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting systems.

5. FCC compliant to 47 CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

6. Operate as a bidirectional transceiver with sensors and routers to confirm and

synchronize data transmission.

7. Capable of communication with sensors and routers up to a maximum distance of 250

feet in line of sight.

8. Include visual indicators to provide diagnostic information required for operator

verification of operation.

F. Wireless Routers:

1. Each wireless mesh network shall use wireless routers with any controller to provide a

wireless interface to a network controller, through a wireless coordinator.




5. FCC compliant to 47 CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

6. Operate as a bidirectional transceiver with other mesh network devices to ensure network

integrity.

7. Capable of communication with other mesh network devices at a maximum distance of

250 feet in line of sight.

8. Include indication for use in commissioning and troubleshooting.

G. Wireless Temperature Sensors:

1. Wireless temperature sensors shall sense and transmit room temperatures, temperature set

point, room occupancy notification and low battery condition to an associated router.




5. FCC compliant to CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

6. Include set point adjustment between 55 to 85 deg F.

7. Multiple sensors shall be able to report to a router connected to a DDC controller for

averaging or high and low selection.






H. One-to-One Wireless Network Receivers:

1. One-to-one wireless receivers shall receive wireless RF signals containing temperature

data from multiple wireless room temperature sensors and communicate information to

programmable application controllers or application-specific controllers.

a. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.

b. Operate on the 2.4-GHz ISM Band.

c. Comply with IEEE 802.15.4 for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting

systems.

d. FCC compliant to 47 CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

e. Operate as a bidirectional transceiver with the sensors to confirm and synchronize

data transmission.

f. Capable of communication up to a distance of 200 feet.

g. Include visual indication of the following:

1) Power.

2) Receiver activity.

3) Wireless RF transmission from wireless sensors.

4) No transmission, weak signal, adequate signal or excellent signal.

I. One-to-One Wireless Network Sensors:

1. One-to-one wireless sensors shall sense and report room temperatures to one-to-one

receiver.

a. Use direct sequence spread spectrum RF technology.

b. Operate on the 2.4-GHz ISM Band.

c. Comply with IEEE 802.15.4 for low-power, low duty-cycle RF transmitting

systems.

d. FCC compliant to CFR 15, Subpart B, Class A.

e. Include set point adjustment between 55 to 85 deg F.

2.11 SERVERS

A. Description: x86-based permanently installed computer used for client-server computing.

B. Mounting: Tower.

C. Power: Single power supply, minimum 300 W.

D. Performance Requirements:

1. Performance requirements may dictate equipment exceeding minimum requirements

indicated.

2. Energy Star compliant.

E. Servers shall include the following:






1. Full-feature backup server (server and backup minimum requirement).

2. Software licenses.

3. Cable installation between server(s) and network.

F. Web Server:

1. If required to be separate, include web server hardware and software to match, except

backup server is not required.

2. Firewalls between server web and networks.

3. Password protection for access to server from web server.

4. Cable installation between the server(s) and building Ethernet network.

2.12 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. System Software Minimum Requirements:

1. Real-time multitasking and multiuser 32- or 64-bit operating system that allows

concurrent multiple operator workstations operating and concurrent execution of multiple

real-time programs and custom program development.

2. Operating system shall be capable of operating DOS and Microsoft Windows

applications.

3. Database management software shall manage all data on an integrated and non-redundant

basis. Additions and deletions to database shall be without detriment to existing data.

Include cross linkages so no data required by a program can be deleted by an operator

until that data have been deleted from respective programs.

4. Network communications software shall manage and control multiple network

communications to provide exchange of global information and execution of global

programs.

5. Operator interface software shall include day-to-day operator transaction processing,

alarm and report handling, operator privilege level and data segregation control, custom

programming, and online data modification capability.

6. Scheduling software shall schedule centrally based time and event, temporary, and

exception day programs.

B. Operator Interface Software:

1. Minimize operator training through use of English language prorating and English

language point identification.

2. Minimize use of a typewriter-style keyboard through use of a pointing device similar to a

mouse.

3. Operator sign-off shall be a manual operation or, if no keyboard or mouse activity takes

place, an automatic sign-off.

4. Automatic sign-off period shall be programmable from one to 60 minutes in one-minute

increments on a per operator basis.

5. Operator sign-on and sign-off activity shall be recorded and sent to printer.

6. Security Access:

a. Operator access to DDC system shall be under password control.






b. An alphanumeric password shall be field assignable to each operator.

c. Operators shall be able to access DDC system by entry of proper password.

d. Operator password shall be same regardless of which computer or other interface

means is used.

e. Additions or changes made to passwords shall be updated automatically.

f. Each operator shall be assigned an access level to restrict access to data and

functions the operator is cable of performing.

g. Software shall have at least five access levels.

h. Each menu item shall be assigned an access level so that a one-for-one

correspondence between operator assigned access level(s) and menu item access

level(s) is required to gain access to menu item.

i. Display menu items to operator with those capable of access highlighted. Menu

and operator access level assignments shall be online programmable and under

password control.

7. Data Segregation:

a. Include data segregation for control of specific data routed to a workstation, to an

operator or to a specific output device, such as a printer.

b. Include at least 32 segregation groups.

c. Segregation groups shall be selectable such as "fire points," "fire points on second

floor," "space temperature points," "HVAC points," and so on.

d. Points shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups. Display and output of

data to printer or monitor shall occur where there is a match of operator or

peripheral segregation group assignment and point segregations.

e. Alarms shall be displayed and printed at each peripheral to which segregation

allows, but only those operators assigned to peripheral and having proper

authorization level will be allowed to acknowledge alarms.

f. Operators and peripherals shall be assignable to multiple segregation groups and

all assignments are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Operators shall be able to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Start or stop selected equipment.

b. Adjust set points.

c. Add, modify, and delete time programming.

d. Enable and disable process execution.

e. Lock and unlock alarm reporting for each point.

f. Enable and disable totalization for each point.

g. Enable and disable trending for each point.

h. Override control loop set points.

i. Enter temporary override schedules.

j. Define holiday schedules.

k. Change time and date.

l. Enter and modify analog alarm limits.

m. Enter and modify analog warning limits.

n. View limits.

o. Enable and disable demand limiting.

p. Enable and disable duty cycle.






q. Display logic programming for each control sequence.

9. Reporting:

a. Generated automatically and manually.

b. Sent to displays, printers and disk files.

c. Types of Reporting:

1) General listing of points.

2) List points currently in alarm.

3) List of off-line points.

4) List points currently in override status.

5) List of disabled points.

6) List points currently locked out.

7) List of items defined in a "Follow-Up" file.

8) List weekly schedules.

9) List holiday programming.

10) List of limits and deadbands.

10. Summaries: For specific points, for a logical point group, for an operator selected

group(s), or for entire system without restriction due to hardware configuration.

C. Graphic Interface Software:

1. Include a full interactive graphical selection means of accessing and displaying system

data to operator. Include at least five levels with the penetration path operator assignable

(for example, site, building, floor, air-handling unit, and supply temperature loop). Native

language descriptors assigned to menu items are to be operator defined and modifiable

under password control.

2. Include a hierarchical-linked dynamic graphic operator interface for accessing and

displaying system data and commanding and modifying equipment operation. Interface

shall use a pointing device with pull-down or penetrating menus, color and animation to

facilitate operator understanding of system.

3. Include at least 10 levels of graphic penetration with the hierarchy operator assignable.

4. Descriptors for graphics, points, alarms and such shall be modified through operator's

workstation under password control.

5. Graphic displays shall be online user definable and modifiable using the hardware and

software provided.

6. Data to be displayed within a graphic shall be assignable regardless of physical hardware

address, communication or point type.

7. Graphics are to be online programmable and under password control.

8. Points may be assignable to multiple graphics where necessary to facilitate operator

understanding of system operation.

9. Graphics shall also contain software points.

10. Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic name as graphics are

selected to facilitate operator understanding.

11. Back-trace feature shall permit operator to move upward in the hierarchy using a pointing

device. Back trace shall show all previous penetration levels. Include operator with






option of showing each graphic full screen size with back trace as horizontal header or by

showing a "stack" of graphics, each with a back trace.

12. Display operator accessed data on the monitor.

13. Operator shall select further penetration using pointing device to click on a site, building,

floor, area, equipment, and so on. Defined and linked graphic below that selection shall

then be displayed.

14. Include operator with means to directly access graphics without going through

penetration path.

15. Dynamic data shall be assignable to graphics.

16. Display points (physical and software) with dynamic data provided by DDC system with

appropriate text descriptors, status or value, and engineering unit.

17. Use color, rotation, or other highly visible means, to denote status and alarm states. Color

shall be variable for each class of points, as chosen by operator.

18. Points shall be dynamic with operator adjustable update rates on a per point basis from

one second to over a minute.

19. For operators with appropriate privilege, points shall be commanded directly from

display using pointing device.

a. For an analog command point such as set point, current conditions and limits shall

be displayed and operator can position new set point using pointing device.

b. For a digital command point such as valve position, valve shall show its current

state such as open or closed and operator could select alternative position using

pointing device.

c. Keyboard equivalent shall be available for those operators with that preference.

20. Operator shall be able to split or resize viewing screen into quadrants to show one

graphic on one quadrant of screen and other graphics or spreadsheet, bar chart, word

processing, curve plot and other information on other quadrants on screen. This feature

shall allow real-time monitoring of one part of system while displaying other parts of

system or data to better facilitate overall system operation.

21. Help Features:

a. On-line context-sensitive help utility to facilitate operator training and

understanding.

b. Bridge to further explanation of selected keywords. Document shall contain text

and graphics to clarify system operation.

1) If help feature does not have ability to bridge on keywords for more

information, a complete set of user manuals shall be provided in an indexed

word-processing program, which shall run concurrently with operating

system software.

c. Available for Every Menu Item:

1) Index items for each system menu item.

22. Graphic generation software shall allow operator to add, modify, or delete system graphic

displays.






a. Include libraries of symbols depicting HVAC symbols such as fans, coils, filters,

dampers, valves pumps, and electrical symbols similar to those indicated.

b. Graphic development package shall use a pointing device in conjunction with a

drawing program to allow operator to perform the following:

1) Define background screens.

2) Define connecting lines and curves.

3) Locate, orient and size descriptive text.

4) Define and display colors for all elements.

5) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points

or other displays.

D. Project-Specific Graphics: Graphics documentation including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Site plan showing each building, and additional site elements, which are being controlled

or monitored by DDC system.

2. Plan for each building floor, including interstitial floors, and each roof level of each

building, showing the following:

a. Room layouts with room identification and name.

b. Locations and identification of all monitored and controlled HVAC equipment and

other equipment being monitored and controlled by DDC system.

c. Location and identification of each hardware point being controlled or monitored

by DDC system.

3. Control schematic for each of following, including a graphic system schematic

representation, similar to that indicated on Drawings, with point identification, set point

and dynamic value indication, sequence of operation and control logic diagram.

4. Graphic display for each piece of equipment connected to DDC system through a data

communications link. Include dynamic indication of all points associated with equipment.

5. DDC system network riser diagram that shows schematic layout for entire system

including all networks and all controllers, other network devices.

E. Customizing Software:

1. Software to modify and tailor DDC system to specific and unique requirements of

equipment installed, to programs implemented and to staffing and operational practices

planned.

2. Online modification of DDC system configuration, program parameters, and database

using menu selection and keyboard entry of data into preformatted display templates.

3. As a minimum, include the following modification capability:

a. Operator assignment shall include designation of operator passwords, access

levels, point segregation and auto sign-off.

b. Peripheral assignment capability shall include assignment of segregation groups

and operators to consoles and printers, designation of backup workstations and

printers, designation of workstation header points and enabling and disabling of

print-out of operator changes.






c. System configuration and diagnostic capability shall include communications and

peripheral port assignments, DDC controller assignments to network, DDC

controller enable and disable, assignment of command trace to points and

application programs and initiation of diagnostics.

d. System text addition and change capability shall include English or native

language descriptors for points, segregation groups and access levels and action

messages for alarms, run time and trouble condition.

e. Time and schedule change capability shall include time and date set, time and

occupancy schedules, exception and holiday schedules and daylight savings time

schedules.

f. Point related change capability shall include the following:

1) System and point enable and disable.

2) Run-time enable and disable.

3) Assignment of points to segregation groups, calibration tables, lockout, and

run time and to a fixed I/O value.

4) Assignment of alarm and warning limits.

g. Application program change capability shall include the following:

1) Enable and disable of software programs.

2) Programming changes.

3) Assignment of comfort limits, global points, time and event initiators, time

and event schedules and enable and disable time and event programs.

4. Software shall allow operator to add points, or groups of points, to DDC system and to

link them to energy optimization and management programs. Additions and

modifications shall be online programmable using operator workstation, downloaded to

other network devices and entered into their databases. After verification of point

additions and associated program operation, database shall be uploaded and recorded on

hard drive and disk for archived record.

5. Include high-level language programming software capability for implementation of

custom DDC programs. Software shall include a compiler, linker, and up- and down-load

capability.

6. Include a library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and

relational operators for implementation of control sequences. Also include, as a

minimum, the following:

a. Proportional control (P).

b. Proportional plus integral (PI).

c. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID).

d. Adaptive and intelligent self-learning control.

1) Algorithm shall monitor loop response to output corrections and adjust loop

response characteristics according to time constant changes imposed.

2) Algorithm shall operate in a continuous self-learning manner and shall

retain in memory a stored record of system dynamics so that on system shut

down and restart, learning process starts from where it left off.






7. Fully implemented intrinsic control operators including sequence, reversing, ratio, time

delay, time of day, highest select AO, lowest select AO, analog controlled digital output,

analog control AO, and digitally controlled AO.

8. Logic operators such as "And," "Or," "Not," and others that are part of a standard set

available with a high-level language.

9. Arithmetic operators such as "Add," "Subtract," "Multiply," "Divide," and others that are

part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

10. Relational operators such as "Equal To," "Not Equal To," "Less Than," "Greater Than,"

and others that are part of a standard set available with a high-level language.

F. Alarm Handling Software:

1. Include alarm handling software to report all alarm conditions monitored and transmitted

through DDC controllers and other network devices.

2. Include first in, first out handling of alarms according to alarm priority ranking, with

most critical alarms first, and with buffer storage in case of simultaneous and multiple

alarms.

3. Alarm handling shall be active at all times to ensure that alarms are processed even if an

operator is not currently signed on to DDC system.

4. Alarms display shall include the following:

a. Indication of alarm condition such as "Abnormal Off," "Hi Alarm," and "Low

Alarm."

b. "Analog Value" or "Status" group and point identification with native language

point descriptor such as "Space Temperature, Building 110, 2nd Floor,

Room 212."

c. Discrete per point alarm action message, such as "Call Maintenance Dept. Ext-

5561."

d. Include extended message capability to allow assignment and printing of extended

action messages. Capability shall be operator programmable and assignable on a

per point basis.

5. Alarms shall be directed to appropriate operator workstations, printers, and individual

operators by privilege level and segregation assignments.

6. Send e-mail alarm messages to designated operators.

7. Send e-mail, page, text and voice messages to designated operators for critical alarms.

8. Alarms shall be categorized and processed by class.

a. Class 1:

1) Associated with fire, security and other extremely critical equipment

monitoring functions; have alarm, trouble, return to normal, and

acknowledge conditions printed and displayed.

2) Unacknowledged alarms to be placed in unacknowledged alarm buffer.

3) All conditions shall cause an audible sound and shall require individual

acknowledgment to silence audible sound.

b. Class 2:






1) Critical, but not life-safety related, and processed same as Class 1 alarms,

except do not require individual acknowledgment.

2) Acknowledgement may be through a multiple alarm acknowledgment.

c. Class 3:

1) General alarms; printed, displayed and placed in unacknowledged alarm

buffer queues.

2) Each new alarm received shall cause an audible sound. Audible sound shall

be silenced by "acknowledging" alarm or by pressing a "silence" key.

3) Acknowledgement of queued alarms shall be either on an individual basis or

through a multiple alarm acknowledgement.

4) Alarms returning to normal condition shall be printed and not cause an

audible sound or require acknowledgment.

d. Class 4:

1) Routine maintenance or other types of warning alarms.

2) Alarms to be printed only, with no display, no audible sound and no

acknowledgment required.

9. Include an unacknowledged alarm indicator on display to alert operator that there are

unacknowledged alarms in system. Operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms on an

individual basis or through a multiple alarm acknowledge key, depending on alarm class.

10. To ensure that no alarm records are lost, it shall be possible to assign a backup printer to

accept alarms in case of failure of primary printer.

G. Reports and Logs:

1. Include reporting software package that allows operator to select, modify, or create

reports using DDC system I/O point data available.

2. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval and date.

3. Report data shall be sampled and stored on DDC controller, within storage limits of DDC

controller, and then uploaded to archive on server for historical reporting.

4. Operator shall be able to obtain real-time logs of all I/O points by type or status, such as

alarm, point lockout, or normal.

5. Reports and logs shall be stored on server hard drives in a format that is readily

accessible by other standard software applications, including spreadsheets and word

processing.

6. Reports and logs shall be readily printed and set to be printed either on operator

command or at a specific time each day.

H. Standard Reports: Standard DDC system reports shall be provided and operator shall be able to

customize reports later.

1. All I/O: With current status and values.

2. Alarm: All current alarms, except those in alarm lockout.

3. Disabled I/O: All I/O points that are disabled.

4. Alarm Lockout I/O: All I/O points in alarm lockout, whether manual or automatic.






5. Alarm Lockout I/O in Alarm: All I/O in alarm lockout that are currently in alarm.

6. Logs:

a. Alarm history.

b. System messages.

c. System events.

d. Trends.

I. Custom Reports: Operator shall be able to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly,

monthly, or annual report. Reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report

title.

2.13 ASHRAE 135 GATEWAYS

A. Include BACnet communication ports, whenever available as an equipment OEM standard

option, for integration via a single communication cable. BACnet-controlled plant equipment

includes, but is not limited to, boilers and variable-speed drives.

B. Include gateways to connect BACnet to legacy systems, existing non-BACnet devices, and

existing non-BACnet DDC-controlled equipment, only when specifically requested and

approved by Owner.

C. Include with each gateway an interoperability schedule showing each point or event on legacy

side that BACnet "client" will read, and each parameter that BACnet network will write to.

Describe this interoperability of BACnet services, or BIBBs, defined in ASHRAE 135,

Annex K.

D. Gateway Minimum Requirements:

1. Read and view all readable object properties on non-BACnet network to BACnet network

and vice versa where applicable.

2. Write to all writeable object properties on non-BACnet network from BACnet network

and vice versa where applicable.

3. Include single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet without intermediary protocols)

translation from non-BACnet protocol to BACnet and vice versa.

4. Comply with requirements of Data Sharing Read Property, Data Sharing Write Property,

Device Management Dynamic Device Binding-B, and Device Management

Communication Control BIBBs according to ASHRAE 135.

5. Hardware, software, software licenses, and configuration tools for operator-to-gateway

communications.

6. Backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to modify, download,

backup, and restore gateway configuration.

2.14 ASHRAE 135 PROTOCOL ANALYZER

A. Analyzer and required cables and fittings for connection to ASHRAE 135 network.






B. Analyzer shall include the following minimum capabilities:

1. Capture and store to a file data traffic on all network levels.

2. Measure bandwidth usage.

3. Filtering options with ability to ignore select traffic.

2.15 WIRELESS ROUTERS FOR OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Dual-Band Wireless Routers:

1. Description: High-speed, dual-band router with integral Ethernet ports and USB port.

2. Technology: IEEE 802.11n; 2.4- and 5-GHz speed bands.

3. Speed: Up to 300 Mbps on 2.4-GHz band and up to 450 Mbps on 5-GHz band.

4. Compatibility: IEEE 802.11n/g/b/a wireless devices.

5. Ethernet Ports: Four, gigabit (1000 Mbps).

6. USB Port: One, USB 2.0 or 3.0.

7. Wireless Security: Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and WPA2 according to

IEEE 802.11i.

2.16 DDC CONTROLLERS

A. DDC system shall consist of a combination of network controllers, programmable application

controllers and application-specific controllers to satisfy performance requirements indicated.

B. DDC controllers shall perform monitoring, control, energy optimization and other requirements

indicated.

C. DDC controllers shall use a multitasking, multiuser, real-time digital control microprocessor

with a distributed network database and intelligence.

D. Each DDC controller shall be capable of full and complete operation as a completely

independent unit and as a part of a DDC system wide distributed network.

E. Environment Requirements:

1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

2. Controllers located in conditioned space shall be rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

F. Power and Noise Immunity:

1. Controller shall operate at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform

an orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.

2. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios

with up to 5 W of power located within 36 inches of enclosure.

G. DDC Controller Spare Processing Capacity:






1. Include spare processing memory for each controller. RAM, PROM, or EEPROM will

implement requirements indicated with the following spare memory:

a. Network Controllers: 50 percent.

b. Programmable Application Controllers: Not less than 60 percent.

c. Application-Specific Controllers: Not less than 70 percent.

2. Memory shall support DDC controller's operating system and database and shall include

the following:

a. Monitoring and control.

b. Energy management, operation and optimization applications.

c. Alarm management.

d. Historical trend data of all connected I/O points.

e. Maintenance applications.

f. Operator interfaces.

g. Monitoring of manual overrides.

H. DDC Controller Spare I/O Point Capacity: Include spare I/O point capacity for each controller

as follows:

1. Network Controllers:

a. 10 percent of each AI, AO, BI, and BO point connected to controller.

b. Minimum Spare I/O Points per Controller:

1) AIs: Three.

2) AOs: Three.

3) BIs: Five.

4) BOs: Five.

2. Programmable Application Controllers:



1) AIs: Three.

2) AOs: Three.

3) BIs: Five.

4) BOs: Five.

3. Application-Specific Controllers:



1) AIs: Three.

2) AOs: Three.

3) BIs: Five.






4) BOs: Five.

I. Maintenance and Support: Include the following features to facilitate maintenance and support:

1. Mount microprocessor components on circuit cards for ease of removal and replacement.

2. Means to quickly and easily disconnect controller from network.

3. Means to quickly and easily access connect to field test equipment.

4. Visual indication that controller electric power is on, of communication fault or trouble,

and that controller is receiving and sending signals to network.

J. General Requirements for CEA-709.1-C DDC Controllers:

1. Controllers shall be LonMark certified.

2. Distinguishable and accessible switch, button, or pin, when pressed shall broadcast its 48-

bit Node ID and Program ID over network.

3. TP/FT-10 transceiver according to CEA-709.3 and connections for TP/FT-10 control

network wiring.

4. TP/XF-1250 transceiver according to CEA-709.3 and connections for TP/XF-1250

control network wiring.

5. Communicate using CEA-709.1-C protocol.

6. Controllers configured into subnets, as required, to comply with performance

requirements indicated.

7. Network communication through LNS network management and database standard for

CEA-709.1-C network devices.

8. Locally powered, not powered through network connection.

9. Functionality required to support applications indicated, including, but not limited to, the

following:

a. Input and outputs indicated and as required to support sequence of operation and

application in which it is used. SNVTs shall have meaningful names identifying

the value represented by an SNVT. Unless an SNVT of an appropriate engineering

type is unavailable, all network variables shall be of an SNVT with engineering

units appropriate to value the variable represents.

b. Configurable through SCPTs defined in LonMark SCPT List, operator-defined

UCPTs, network configuration inputs (NCIs) of an SNVT type defined in

LonMark SNVT List, NCIs of an operator-defined network variable type, or

hardware settings on controller itself for all settings and parameters used by

application in which it is used.

10. Programmable controllers shall conform to LonMark Interoperability Guidelines and

have LonMark certification.

K. Input and Output Point Interface:

1. Hardwired input and output points shall connect to network, programmable application

and application-specific controllers.

2. Input and output points shall be protected so shorting of point to itself, to another point,

or to ground will not damage controller.






3. Input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration so that

contact will not damage controller.

4. AIs:

a. AIs shall include monitoring of low-voltage (zero- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20

mA) and resistance signals from thermistor and RTD sensors.

b. AIs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to, sensor and transmitters

installed.

c. Controller AIs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a

minimum resolution of 8 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements

indicated.

d. Signal conditioning including transient rejection shall be provided for each AI.

e. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span.

f. Incorporate common-mode noise rejection of at least 50 dB from zero to 100 Hz

for differential inputs, and normal-mode noise rejection of at least 20 dB at 60 Hz

from a source impedance of 10000 ohms.

5. AOs:

a. Controller AOs shall perform analog-to-digital (A-to-D) conversion with a

minimum resolution of 8 bits or better to comply with accuracy requirements

indicated.

b. Output signals shall have a range of 4 to 20 mA dc or zero- to 10-V dc as required

to include proper control of output device.

c. Capable of being individually calibrated for zero and span.

d. AOs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year.

6. BIs:

a. Controller BIs shall accept contact closures and shall ignore transients of less than

5-ms duration.

b. Isolation and protection against an applied steady-state voltage of up to 180-V ac

peak.

c. BIs shall include a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with

commonly available control devices and shall be protected against effects of

contact bounce and noise.

d. BIs shall sense "dry contact" closure without external power (other than that

provided by the controller) being applied.

e. Pulse accumulation input points shall comply with all requirements of BIs and

accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse accumulation. Buffer shall be provided

to totalize pulses. Pulse accumulator shall accept rates of at least 20 pulses per

second. The totalized value shall be reset to zero on operator's command.

7. BOs:

a. Controller BOs shall include relay contact closures or triac outputs for momentary

and maintained operation of output devices.






1) Relay contact closures shall have a minimum duration of 0.1 second. Relays

shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Electromagnetic interference

suppression shall be provided on all output lines to limit transients to non-

damaging levels. Minimum contact rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

2) Triac outputs shall include at least 180 V of isolation. Minimum contact

rating shall be 1 A at 24-V ac.

b. BOs shall include for two-state operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse-

width modulation control.

c. BOs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.

d. Include tristate outputs (two coordinated BOs) for control of three-point floating-

type electronic actuators without feedback.

e. Limit use of three-point floating devices to VAV terminal unit control applications.

Control algorithms shall operate actuator to one end of its stroke once every 12

hours for verification of operator tracking.

2.17 NETWORK CONTROLLERS

A. General Network Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated.

2. System shall consist of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor-based

network controllers to manage global strategies indicated.

3. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and

programming requirements.

4. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

5. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to

allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for

central monitoring and alarms.

6. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

7. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and

generate an alarm notification.

8. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Network controllers shall communicate with other devices on DDC system Level one

network.

2. Network controller also shall perform routing if connected to a network of programmable

application and application-specific controllers.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a

portable operator's workstation.

2. Local Keypad and Display:






a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing

data.

b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual

indication of power, communication, and processor.

2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips

or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss

for at least 72 hours.

2.18 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. General Programmable Application Controller Requirements:

1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated.

2. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and

programming requirements.

3. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices.

4. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to

allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for

central monitoring and alarms.

5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

6. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an

abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and

generate an alarm notification.

7. Controllers shall be fully programmable.

B. Communication:

1. Programmable application controllers shall communicate with other devices on network.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a

portable operator's workstation or mobile device.

2. Local Keypad and Display:

a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing

data.

b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password.

D. Serviceability:

1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual

indication of power, communication, and processor.






2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips

or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss

for at least 72 hours.

2.19 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. General Controller Software Requirements:

1. Software applications shall reside and operate in controllers. Editing of applications shall

occur at operator workstations.

2. I/O points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and up to 16-character

point descriptor. Same names shall be used at operator workstations.

3. Control functions shall be executed within controllers using DDC algorithms.

4. Controllers shall be configured to use stored default values to ensure fail-safe operation.

Default values shall be used when there is a failure of a connected input instrument or

loss of communication of a global point value.

B. Security:

1. Operator access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.

2. Passwords shall restrict operator to points, applications, and system functions as assigned

by system manager.

3. Operator log-on and log-off attempts shall be recorded.

4. System shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off after last

keystroke. The delay time shall be operator-definable.

C. Scheduling: Include capability to schedule each point or group of points in system. Each

schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Weekly Schedule:

a. Include separate schedules for each day of week.

b. Each schedule should include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal

stop, and night economizer.

c. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events.

d. When a group of objects are scheduled together, include capability to adjust start

and stop times for each member.

2. Exception Schedules:

a. Include ability for operator to designate any day of the year as an exception

schedule.

b. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception

schedule is executed, it will be discarded and replaced by regular schedule for that

day of week.

3. Holiday Schedules:






a. Include capability for operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules.

b. Schedules may be placed on scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year.

c. Operator shall be able to define length of each holiday period.

D. System Coordination:

1. Include standard application for proper coordination of equipment.

2. Application shall include operator with a method of grouping together equipment based

on function and location.

3. Group may then be used for scheduling and other applications.

E. Binary Alarms:

1. Each binary point shall be set to alarm based on operator-specified state.

2. Include capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

F. Analog Alarms:

1. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits.

2. Alarming shall be able to be automatically and manually disabled.

G. Alarm Reporting:

1. Operator shall be able to determine action to be taken in event of an alarm.

2. Alarms shall be routed to appropriate operator workstations based on time and other

conditions.

3. Alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in event log, generate custom

messages, and display graphics.

H. Remote Communication:

1. System shall have ability to dial out in the event of an alarm.

I. Electric Power Demand Limiting:

1. Demand-limiting program shall monitor building or other operator-defined electric power

consumption from signals connected to electric power meter or from a watt transducer or

current transformer.

2. Demand-limiting program shall predict probable power demand such that action can be

taken to prevent exceeding demand limit. When demand prediction exceeds demand

limit, action will be taken to reduce loads in a predetermined manner. When demand

prediction indicates demand limit will not be exceeded, action will be taken to restore

loads in a predetermined manner.

3. Demand reduction shall be accomplished by the following means:

a. Reset air-handling unit supply temperature set points.

b. Reset space temperature set points.

c. De-energize equipment based on priority.






4. Demand-limiting parameters, frequency of calculations, time intervals, and other relevant

variables shall be based on the means by which electric power service provider computes

demand charges.

5. Include demand-limiting prediction and control for any individual meter monitored by

system or for total of any combination of meters.

6. Include means operator to make the following changes online:

a. Addition and deletion of loads controlled.

b. Changes in demand intervals.

c. Changes in demand limit for meter(s).

d. Maximum shutoff time for equipment.

e. Minimum shutoff time for equipment.

f. Select rotational or sequential shedding and restoring.

g. Shed and restore priority.

7. Include the following information and reports, to be available on an hourly, daily,

weekly, monthly and annual basis:

a. Total electric consumption.

b. Peak demand.

c. Date and time of peak demand.

d. Daily peak demand.

J. Maintenance Management: System shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance

messages based on operator-designated run-time, starts, and calendar date limits.

K. Sequencing: Include application software based on sequences of operation indicated to properly

sequence chillers, boilers, and other applicable HVAC equipment.

L. Control Loops:

1. Support any of the following control loops, as applicable to control required:

a. Two-position (on/off, open/close, slow/fast) control.

b. Proportional control.

c. Proportional plus integral (PI) control.

d. Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control.

1) Include PID algorithms with direct or reverse action and anti-windup.

2) Algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an

output or stage a series of outputs.

3) Controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be operator-selectable.

e. Adaptive (automatic tuning).

M. Staggered Start: Application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously

restarting after a power outage. Order which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started,

along with the time delay between starts, shall be operator-selectable.






N. Energy Calculations:

1. Include software to allow instantaneous power or flow rates to be accumulated and

converted to energy usage data.

2. Include an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window average (rolling average).

Algorithm shall be flexible to allow window intervals to be operator specified (such as

15, 30, or 60 minutes).

3. Include an algorithm that calculates a fixed-window average. A digital input signal shall

define start of window period (such as signal from utility meter) to synchronize fixed-

window average with that used by utility.

O. Anti-Short Cycling:

1. BO points shall be protected from short cycling.

2. Feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

P. On and Off Control with Differential:

1. Include an algorithm that allows a BO to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set

point.

2. Algorithm shall be direct- or reverse-acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.

Q. Run-Time Totalization:

1. Include software to totalize run-times for all BI and BO points.

2. A high run-time alarm shall be assigned, if required, by operator.

2.20 ENCLOSURES

A. General Enclosure Requirements:

1. House each controller and associated control accessories in a single enclosure. Enclosure

shall serve as central tie-in point for control devices such as switches, transmitters,

transducers, power supplies and transformers.

2. Do not house more than one controller in a single enclosure.

3. Include enclosure door with key locking mechanism. Key locks alike for all enclosures

and include one pair of keys per enclosure.

B. Internal Arrangement:

1. Internal layout of enclosure shall group and protect pneumatic, electric, and electronic

components associated with a controller, but not an integral part of controller.

2. Arrange layout to group similar products together.

3. Include a barrier between line-voltage and low-voltage electrical and electronic products.

4. Factory or shop install products, tubing, cabling and wiring complying with requirements

and standards indicated.

5. Terminate field cable and wire using heavy-duty terminal blocks.

6. Include spare terminals, equal to not less than 10 percent of used terminals.






7. Include spade lugs for stranded cable and wire.

8. Install a maximum of two wires on each side of a terminal.

9. Include enclosure field power supply with a toggle-type switch located at entrance inside

enclosure to disconnect power.

10. Include enclosure with a line-voltage nominal 20-A GFCI duplex receptacle for service

and testing tools. Wire receptacle on hot side of enclosure disconnect switch and include

with a 5-A circuit breaker.

11. Mount products within enclosure on removable internal panel(s).

12. Include products mounted in enclosures with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplates

(black letters on a white background). The nameplates shall have at least 1/4-inch-high

lettering.

13. Route tubing cable and wire located inside enclosure within a raceway with a continuous

removable cover.

14. Label each end of cable, wire and tubing in enclosure following an approved

identification system that extends from field I/O connection and all intermediate

connections throughout length to controller connection.

15. Size enclosure internal panel to include at least 25 percent spare area on face of panel.

C. Environmental Requirements:

1. Evaluate temperature and humidity requirements of each product to be installed within

each enclosure.

2. Calculate enclosure internal operating temperature considering heat dissipation of all

products installed within enclosure and ambient effects (solar, conduction and wind) on

enclosure.

3. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled electrical heat to maintain

inside of enclosure above minimum operating temperature of product with most stringent

requirement.

4. Where required by application, include temperature-controlled ventilation fans with

filtered louver(s) to maintain inside of enclosure below maximum operating temperature

of product with most stringent requirement.

5. Include temperature-controlled cooling within the enclosure for applications where

ventilation fans cannot maintain inside temperature of enclosure below maximum

operating temperature of product with most stringent requirement.

6. Where required by application, include humidity-controlled electric dehumidifier or

cooling to maintain inside of enclosure below maximum relative humidity of product

with most stringent requirement and to prevent surface condensation within enclosure.

D. Wall-Mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1:

1. Enclosure shall be NRTL listed according to UL 50 or UL 50E.

2. Construct enclosure of steel, not less than:

a. Enclosure size less than 24 in.: 0.053 in. or 0.067 in. thick.

b. Enclosure size 24 in. and larger: 0.067 in. or 0.093 in. thick.

3. Finish enclosure inside and out with polyester powder coating that is electrostatically

applied and then baked to bond to substrate.

a. Exterior color shall be manufacturer's standard.






b. Interior color shall be white.

4. Hinged door full size of front face of enclosure and supported using:

a. Enclosures sizes less than 36 in. tall: Multiple butt hinges.

b. Enclosures sizes 36 in. tall and larger: Continuous piano hinges.

5. Removable internal panel with a white polyester powder coating that is electrostatically

applied and then baked to bond to substrate.

a. Size less than 24 in.: Solid or Perforated steel, 0.053 in. thick.

b. Size 24 in. and larger: Solid aluminum, 0.10 in. or steel, 0.093 in. thick.

6. Internal panel mounting hardware, grounding hardware and sealing washers.

7. Grounding stud on enclosure body.

8. Thermoplastic pocket on inside of door for record Drawings and Product Data.

2.21 RELAYS

A. General-Purpose Relays:

1. Relays shall be heavy duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz.

2. Relays shall be either double pole double throw (DPDT) or three-pole double throw,

depending on the control application.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with an eight-pin octal plug for DPDT relays and an 11-pin

octal plug for three-pole double-throw relays.

4. Construct the contacts of either silver cadmium oxide or gold.

5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover.

6. Relays shall have LED indication and a manual reset and push-to-test button.

7. Performance:

a. Mechanical Life: At least 10 million cycles.

b. Electrical Life: At least 100,000 cycles at rated load.

c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less.

d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less.

e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage.

f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage.

g. Power Consumption: 2 VA.

h. Ambient Operating Temperatures: Minus 40 to 115 deg F.

8. Equip relays with coil transient suppression to limit transients to non-damaging levels.

9. Plug each relay into an industry-standard, 35-mm DIN rail socket. Plug all relays located

in control panels into sockets that are mounted on a DIN rail.

10. Relay socket shall have screw terminals. Mold into the socket the coincident screw

terminal numbers and associated octal pin numbers.

B. Multifunction Time-Delay Relays:

1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 240-V ac and 60 Hz.






2. Relays shall be DPDT relay with up to eight programmable functions to provide on/off

delay, interval and recycle timing functions.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with either an 8- or 11-pin octal plug.


5. Enclose the relay in a dust-tight cover.

6. Include knob and dial scale for setting delay time.

7. Performance:



c. Timing Ranges: Multiple ranges from 0.1 seconds to 100 minutes.

d. Repeatability: Within 2 percent.

e. Recycle Time: 45 ms.

f. Minimum Pulse Width Control: 50 ms.

g. Power Consumption: 5 VA or less at 120-V ac.







C. Latching Relays:

1. Relays shall be continuous duty and rated for at least 10 A at 250-V ac and 60 Hz.

2. Relays shall be either DPDT or three-pole double throw, depending on the control

application.

3. Use a plug-in-style relay with a multibladed plug.


5. Enclose the relay in a clear transparent polycarbonate dust-tight cover.

6. Performance:



c. Pickup Time: 15 ms or less.

d. Dropout Time: 10 ms or less.

e. Pull-in Voltage: 85 percent of rated voltage.

f. Dropout Voltage: 50 percent of nominal rated voltage.

g. Power Consumption: 2 VA.







D. Current Sensing Relay:






1. Monitors ac current.

2. Independent adjustable controls for pickup and dropout current.

3. Energized when supply voltage is present and current is above pickup setting.

4. De-energizes when monitored current is below dropout current.

5. Dropout current is adjustable from 50 to 95 percent of pickup current.

6. Include a current transformer, if required for application.

7. House current sensing relay and current transformer in its own enclosure. Use

NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure for indoors and NEMA 250, Type 4 for outdoors.

E. Combination On-Off Status Sensor and On-Off Relay:

1. Description:

a. On-off control and status indication in a single device.

b. LED status indication of activated relay and current trigger.

c. Closed-Open-Auto override switch located on the load side of the relay.

2. Performance:

a. Ambient Temperature: Minus 30 to 140 deg F.

b. Voltage Rating: Single-phase loads rated for 300-V ac. Three-phase loads rated for

600-V ac.

3. Status Indication:

a. Current Sensor: Integral sensing for single-phase loads up to 20 A and external

solid or split sensing ring for three-phase loads up to 150 A.

b. Current Sensor Range: As required by application.

c. Current Set Point: Fixed or adjustable as required by application.

d. Current Sensor Output:

1) Solid-state, single-pole double-throw contact rated for 30-V ac and dc and

for 0.4 A.

2) Solid-state, single-pole double-throw contact rated for 120-V ac and 1.0 A.

3) Analog, zero- to 5- or 10-V dc.

4) Analog, 4 to 20 mA, loop powered.

4. Relay: Single-pole double-throw, continuous-duty coil; rated for 10-million mechanical

cycles.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2.22 ELECTRICAL POWER DEVICES

A. Transformers:

1. Transformer shall be sized for the total connected load, plus an additional 25 percent of

connected load.

2. Transformer shall be at least 40 VA.

3. Transformer shall have both primary and secondary fuses.






B. Power-Line Conditioner:

1. General Power-Line Conditioner Requirements:

a. Design to ensure maximum reliability, serviceability and performance.

b. Overall function of the power-line conditioner is to receive raw, polluted electrical

power and purify it for use by electronic equipment. The power-line conditioner

shall provide isolated, regulated, transient, and noise-free sinusoidal power to loads

served.

2. Standards: NRTL listed per UL 1012.

3. Performance:

a. Single phase, continuous, 100 percent duty rated KVA/KW capacity. Design to

supply power for linear or nonlinear, high crest factor, resistive and reactive loads.

b. Automatically regulate output voltage to within 2 percent or better with input

voltage fluctuations of plus 10 to minus 20 percent of nominal when system is

loaded 100 percent. Use Variable Range Regulation to obtain improved line

voltage regulation when operating under less than full load conditions.

1) At 75 Percent Load: Output voltage automatically regulated to within 3

percent with input voltage fluctuations of plus 10 to minus 35 percent of

nominal.



nominal.



nominal.

c. With input voltage distortion of up to 40 percent, limit the output voltage sine

wave to a maximum harmonic content of 5 percent.

d. Automatically regulate output voltage to within 2.5 percent when load (resistive)

changes from zero percent to 100 percent to zero percent.

e. Output voltage returns to 95 percent of nominal level within two cycles and to 100

percent within three cycles when the output is taken from no load to full resistive

load or vice-versa. Recovery from partial resistive load changes is corrected in a

shorter period of time.

f. K Factor: 30, designed to operate with nonlinear, non-sinusoidal, high crest factor

loads without overheating.

g. Input power factor within 0.95 approaching unity with load power factor as poor as

0.6.

h. Attenuate load-generated odd current harmonics 23 dB at the input.

i. Electrically isolate the primary from the secondary. Meet isolation criteria as

defined in NFPA 70, Article 250-5D.

j. Lighting and Surge Protection: Compares to UL 1449 rating of 330 V when

subjected to Category B3 (6000 V/3000 A) combination waveform as established

by IEEE C62.41.

k. Common-mode noise attenuation of 140 dB.

l. Transverse-mode noise attenuation of 120 dB.






m. With loss of input power for up to 16.6 ms, the output sine wave remains at usable

ac voltage levels.

n. Reliability of 200,000 hours' MTBF.

o. At full load, when measured at 1-m distance, audible noise is not to exceed 54 dB.

p. Approximately 92 percent efficient at full load.

4. Transformer Construction:

a. Ferroresonant, dry type, convection cooled, 600V class. Transformer windings of

Class H (220 deg C) insulated copper.

b. Use a Class H installation system throughout with operating temperatures not to

exceed 150 deg C over a 40-deg C ambient temperature.

c. Configure transformer primary for multi-input voltage. Include input terminals for

source conductors and ground.

d. Manufacture transformer core using M-6 grade, grain-oriented, stress-relieved

transformer steel.

e. Configure transformer secondary in a 240/120-V split with a 208-V tap or straight

120 V, depending on power output size.

f. Electrically isolate the transformer secondary windings from the primary windings.

Bond neutral conductor to cabinet enclosure and output neutral terminal.

g. Include interface terminals for output power hot, neutral and ground conductors.

h. Label leads, wires and terminals to correspond with circuit wiring diagram.

i. Vacuum impregnate transformer with epoxy resin.

5. Cabinet Construction:

a. Design for panel or floor mounting.

b. NEMA 250, Type 1, general-purpose, indoor enclosure.

c. Manufacture the cabinet from heavy gauge steel complying with UL 50.

d. Include a textured baked-on paint finish.

C. Transient Voltage Suppression and High-Frequency Noise Filter Unit:

1. The maximum continuous operating voltage shall be at least 125 percent.

2. The operating frequency range shall be 47 to 63 Hz.

3. Protection modes according to NEMA LS-1.

4. The rated single-pulse surge current capacity, for each mode of protection, shall be no

less than the following:

a. Line to Neutral: 45,000 A.

b. Neutral to Ground: 45,000 A.

c. Line to Ground: 45,000 A.

d. Per Phase: 90,000 A.

5. Clamping voltages shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures defined in

NEMA LS-1. Maximum clamping voltage shall be as follows:

a. Line to Neutral: 360 V.

b. Line to Ground: 360 V.






c. Neutral to Ground: 360 V.

6. Electromagnetic interference and RF interference noise rejection or attenuation values

shall comply with test and evaluation procedures defined in NEMA LS-1.

a. Line to Neutral:

1) 100 kHz: 42 dB.

2) 1 MHz: 25 dB.

3) 10 MHz: 21 dB.

4) 100 MHz: 36 dB.

b. Line to Ground:

1) 100 kHz: 16 dB.

2) 1 MHz: 55 dB.

3) 10 MHz: 81 dB.

4) 100 MHz: 80 dB.

7. Unit shall have LED status indicator that extinguishes to indicate a failure.

8. Unit shall be listed by an NRTL as a transient voltage surge suppressor per UL 1449, and

as an electromagnetic interference filter per UL 1283.

9. Unit shall not generate any appreciable magnetic field.

10. Unit shall not generate an audible noise.

D. DC Power Supply:

1. Plug-in style suitable for mating with a standard eight-pin octal socket. Include the power

supply with a mating mounting socket.

2. Enclose circuitry in a housing.

3. Include both line and load regulation to ensure a stable output. To protect both the power

supply and the load, power supply shall have an automatic current limiting circuit.

4. Performance:

a. Output voltage nominally 25-V dc within 5 percent.

b. Output current up to 100 mA.

c. Input voltage nominally 120-V ac, 60 Hz.

d. Load regulation within 0.5 percent from zero- to 100-mA load.

e. Line regulation within 0.5 percent at a 100-mA load for a 10 percent line change.

f. Stability within 0.1 percent of rated volts for 24 hours after a 20-minute warmup.

2.23 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire: Single conductor control wiring above 24 V.

1. Wire size shall be at least No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductor shall be 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with 2- to 2.5-inch lay.






3. Conductor insulation shall be 600 V, Type THWN or Type THHN, and 90 deg C

according to UL 83.

4. Conductor colors shall be black (hot), white (neutral), and green (ground).

5. Furnish wire on spools.

B. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable above 24 V:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall have a Type THHN/THWN or Type TFN rating.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 0.35/0.5-mil aluminum/Mylar tape, helically applied

with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 600-V, 90-deg C rating and shall be Type TC cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor

colors shall be black, red and white.


C. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable 24 V and Less:

1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG.

2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper stranding with a 2- to 2.5-inch

lay.

3. Conductor insulation shall have a nominal 15-mil thickness, constructed from flame-

retardant PVC.

4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 1.35-mil aluminum/polymer tape, helically applied

with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire.

5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 300-V, 105-deg C rating and shall be Type PLTC

cable.

6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor

colors shall be black, red and white.


D. LAN and Communication Cable: Comply with DDC system manufacturer requirements for

network being installed.

1. Cable shall be balanced twisted pair.

2. Comply with the following requirements and for balanced twisted pair cable described in

Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."

a. Cable shall be plenum rated.

b. Cable shall have a unique color that is different from other cables used on Project.

2.24 RACEWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

electrical power raceways and boxes.






2.25 ACCESSORIES

A. Pressure Electric Switches:

1. Diaphragm-operated snap acting switch.

2. Set point adjustable from 3 to 20 psig.

3. Differential adjustable from 2 to 6 psig.

4. Rated for resistance loads at 120-V ac.

5. Body and switch housing shall be metal.

B. Damper Blade Limit Switches:

1. Sense positive open and/or closed position of the damper blades.

2. NEMA 250, Type 13, oil-tight construction.

3. Arrange for the mounting application.

4. Additional waterproof enclosure when required by its environment.

5. Arrange to prevent "over-center" operation.

C. I/P and E/P Transducers:

1. Commercial Grade:

a. The transducer shall convert an AO signal to a stepped pneumatic signal. Unless

otherwise required by the operating sequence, use a 3- to 15-psig pneumatic signal

for pneumatic actuation.

b. Construct the entire assembly so that shock and vibration will neither harm the

transducer nor affect its accuracy.

c. Transducer shall have auto/manual output switch, manual output control and an

output pressure gauge.

d. Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of the output span.

e. Linearity: Within 0.5 percent of the output span.

f. Output Capacity: Not less than 550 scim at 15 psig.

g. Transducer shall have separate zero and span calibration adjustments.

h. The transducer shall withstand up to 40 psig of supply pressure without damage.

i. For use on only modulating pneumatic outputs that are associated with terminal

units, including fan-coil units, VAV units, unit heaters and.

2. Industrial Grade:

a. The transducer shall convert an AO signal to a proportional pneumatic signal.

Unless otherwise required by the operating sequence, use a 3- to 15-psig

pneumatic signal for pneumatic actuation. A stepped pneumatic signal is

unacceptable.

b. Construct the entire assembly so that shock and vibration will neither harm the

transducer nor affect its accuracy.

c. Suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range of minus 40 to 150 deg F.

d. Accuracy: Within 0.5 percent of the output span.

e. Linearity: Within 0.5 percent of the output span.

f. Output Capacity: Not less than 5 scfm.






g. Transducer shall have zero and span calibration adjustments.

h. The transducer shall withstand up to 50 psig of supply pressure without damage.

i. For use on all modulating pneumatic outputs, not requiring a commercial-grade

transducer.

D. E/P Switch:

1. Construct the body of cast aluminum or brass; three pipe body (common, normally open,

and normally closed).

2. Internal construction of steel, copper or brass.

3. Air Connections: Barb.

4. Rating of 30 psig when installed in systems below 25 psig and of 150 psig when installed

in systems above 25 psig.

5. Include coil transient suppression.

E. Instrument Enclosures:

1. Include instrument enclosure for secondary protection to comply with requirements

indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. NRTL listed and labeled to UL 50.

3. Sized to include at least 25 percent spare area on subpanel.

4. Instrument(s) mounted within enclosure on internal subpanel(s).

5. Enclosure face with engraved, laminated phenolic nameplate for each instrument within

enclosure.

6. Enclosures housing pneumatic instruments shall include main pressure gauge and a

branch pressure gauge for each pneumatic device, installed inside.

7. Enclosures housing multiple instruments shall route tubing and wiring within enclosure

in a raceway having a continuous removable cover.

8. Enclosures larger than 12 inches shall have a hinged full-size face cover.

F. Manual Valves:

1. Needle Type:

a. PTFE packing.

b. Construct of brass for use with copper and polyethylene tubing and of stainless

steel for use with stainless steel tubing.

c. Aluminum T-bar handle.

d. Include tubing connections.

2. Ball Type:

a. Body: Bronze ASTM B62 or ASTM B61.

b. Ball: Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Stem: Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Seats: Reinforced PTFE.

e. Packing Ring: Reinforced PTFE.

f. Lever: Stainless steel with a vinyl grip.

g. 600 WOG.






h. Threaded end connections.

2.26 IDENTIFICATION

A. Control Equipment, Instruments, and Control Devices:

1. Self-adhesive label or Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign bearing unique

identification.

a. Include instruments with unique identification identified by equipment being

controlled or monitored, followed by point identification.

B. Valve Tags:

1. Brass tags and brass chains attached to valve.

2. Tags shall be at least 1.5 inches in diameter.

3. Include tag with unique valve identification indicating control influence such as flow,

level, pressure, or temperature; followed by location of valve, and followed by three-digit

sequential number. For example: TV-1.001.

4. Valves with Project-specific identification tags having unique identification numbers

following requirements indicated and provided by original manufacturer do not require

an additional tag.

C. Raceway and Boxes:

1. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

2. Paint cover plates on junction boxes and conduit same color as the tape banding for

conduits. After painting, label cover plate "HVAC Controls," using an engraved phenolic

tag.

3. For raceways housing pneumatic tubing, add a phenolic tag labeled "HVAC Instrument

Air Tubing."

4. For raceways housing air signal tubing, add a phenolic tag labeled "HVAC Air Signal

Tubing."

D. Equipment Warning Labels:

1. Self-adhesive label with pressure-sensitive adhesive back and peel-off protective jacket.

2. Lettering size shall be at least 14-point type with white lettering on red background.

3. Warning label shall read "CAUTION-Equipment operated under remote automatic

control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch electric power

disconnecting means to OFF position before servicing."

4. Lettering shall be enclosed in a white line border. Edge of label shall extend at least 0.25

inch beyond white border.







A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate the following according to

industry standards for each product, and to verify DDC system reliability specified in

performance requirements:

B. Product(s) and material(s) will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.

B. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

1. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of

connections before installation.

2. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations

of connections before installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be

installed.

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Communication Interface to Equipment with Integral Controls:

1. DDC system shall have communication interface with equipment having integral controls

and having a communication interface for remote monitoring or control.

2. Equipment to Be Connected:

a. Boilers specified in Section 235216 "Condensing Boilers."

b. Air-handling units specified in Section 237313.13 "Indoor, Basic Air-Handling

Units."






B. Communication Interface to Other Building Systems:

1. DDC system shall have a communication interface with systems having a communication

interface.

2. Systems to Be Connected:

a. Fire-alarm system specified in Section 284621.11 "Addressable Fire-Alarm

Systems."

3.3 CONTROL DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION BY INSTALLERS

A. Deliver selected control devices, specified in indicated HVAC instrumentation and control

device Sections, to identified equipment and systems manufacturers for factory installation and

to identified installers for field installation.

B. Deliver the following to duct fabricator and Installer for installation in ductwork. Include

installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control dampers, which are specified in Section 230923.12 "Control Dampers."

2. Airflow sensors and switches, which are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow

Instruments."

3. Pressure sensors, which are specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments."

C. Deliver the following to plumbing and HVAC piping installers for installation in piping. Include

installation instructions to Installer and supervise installation for compliance with requirements.

1. DDC control valves, which are specified in Section 230923.11 "Control Valves."

2. Pipe-mounted flow meters, which are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow

Instruments."

3. Pipe-mounted sensors, switches, and transmitters. Flow meters are specified in

Section 230923.14 "Flow Instruments."

4. Tank-mounted sensors, switches, and transmitters. Pressure sensors, switches, and

transmitters are specified in Section 230923.23 "Pressure Instruments."

5. Liquid temperature sensors, switches, and transmitters are specified in Section 230923.27

"Temperature Instruments."

6. Pipe- and tank-mounted thermowells. Liquid thermowells are specified in

Section 230923.27 "Temperature Instruments."


A. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.

B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

C. Support products, tubing, piping wiring and raceways. Brace products to prevent lateral

movement and sway or a break in attachment when subjected to a force.






D. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with

requirements in codes and referenced standards.

E. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation

of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work

to avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition.

F. Firestop Penetrations Made in Fire-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

G. Seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Welding Requirements:

1. Restrict welding and burning to supports and bracing.

2. No equipment shall be cut or welded without approval. Welding or cutting will not be

approved if there is risk of damage to adjacent Work.

3. Welding, where approved, shall be by inert-gas electric arc process and shall be

performed by qualified welders according to applicable welding codes.

4. If requested on-site, show satisfactory evidence of welder certificates indicating ability to

perform welding work intended.

I. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other

parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force

or by oversized wrenches.

3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

J. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that

will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without

removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment.

3.5 SERVER INSTALLATION

A. Install one server(s) at location(s) directed by Owner.

B. Install number of servers required to suit requirements indicated. Review Project requirements

and indicate layout of proposed location in Shop Drawings.

C. Install software indicated on server(s) and verify that software functions properly.

D. Develop Project-specific graphics, trends, reports, logs, and historical database.






3.6 ROUTER INSTALLATION

A. Install routers if required for DDC system communication interface requirements indicated.

B. Test router to verify that communication interface functions properly.

3.7 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Connect controllers to field power supply.

C. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute


D. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance

indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation.

E. Installation of Network Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of network controllers shall be determined by DDC system

manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.

F. Installation of Programmable Application Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of programmable application controllers shall be determined by

DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor.

G. Application-Specific Controllers:

1. Quantity and location of application-specific controllers shall be determined by DDC

system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated.

2. For controllers not mounted directly on equipment being controlled, install controllers in

a protected location that is easily accessible by operators.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF WIRELESS ROUTERS FOR OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Install wireless routers to achieve optimum performance and best possible coverage.

B. Mount wireless routers in a protected location that is within 60 inches of floor and easily

accessible by operators.






C. Connect wireless routers to field power supply and to UPS units if network controllers are

powered through UPS units.

D. Install wireless router with latest version of applicable software and configure wireless router

with WPA2 security and password protection. Create access password with not less than 12

characters consisting of letters and numbers and at least one special character. Document

password in operations and maintenance manuals for reference by operators.

E. Test and adjust wireless routers for proper operation with portable workstation and other

wireless devices intended for use by operators.

3.9 ENCLOSURES INSTALLATION

A. Install the following items in enclosures, to comply with indicated requirements:

1. Routers.

2. Controllers.

3. Relays.

4. Accessories.

5. Instruments.

6. Actuators

B. Attach wall-mounted enclosures to wall using the following types of steel struts:

1. For NEMA 250, Type 1 Enclosures: Use painted steel strut and hardware.

2. For NEMA 250, Type 4 Enclosures and Enclosures Located Outdoors: Use stainless steel

strut and hardware.

3. Install plastic caps on exposed cut edges of strut.

C. Align top of adjacent enclosures of like size.

D. Install continuous and fully accessible wireways to connect conduit, wire, and cable to multiple

adjacent enclosures. Wireway used for application shall have protection equal to NEMA 250

rating of connected enclosures.

3.10 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections.

B. Design of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power is delegated to DDC

system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70 and other requirements

indicated.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for

electrical power circuit breakers.






D. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for electrical power conductors and cables.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

electrical power raceways and boxes.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification products and

installation.

B. Install self-adhesive labels, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with unique

identification on face for each of the following:

1. Server.

2. Router.

3. Protocol analyzer.

4. DDC controller.

5. Enclosure.

6. Accessory.

C. Install unique instrument identification on face of each instrument connected to a DDC

controller.

D. Install unique identification on face of each control damper and valve actuator connected to a

DDC controller.

E. Where product is installed above accessible tile ceiling, also install matching identification on

face of ceiling grid located directly below.

F. Where product is installed above an inaccessible ceiling, also install identification on face of

access door directly below.

G. Warning Labels and Signs:

1. Shall be permanently attached to equipment that can be automatically started by DDC

control system.

2. Shall be located in highly visible location near power service entry points.

3.12 NETWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install balanced twisted pair or copper cable (as required by equipment) when connecting

between the following:

1. Gateways.

2. Gateways and network controllers or programmable application controllers.






3. Routers.

4. Routers and network controllers or programmable application controllers.

5. Network controllers and programmable application controllers.

6. Programmable application controllers.

7. Programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers.

8. Application-specific controllers.

B. Install cable in continuous raceway.

1. Where indicated on Drawings, cable trays may be used for copper cable in lieu of

conduit.

3.13 NETWORK NAMING AND NUMBERING

A. Coordinate with Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for networks and devices.

B. ASHRAE 135 Networks:

1. MAC Address:

a. Every network device shall have an assigned and documented MAC address

unique to its network.

b. Ethernet Networks: Document MAC address assigned at its creation.

c. ARCNET or MS/TP networks: Assign from 00 to 64.

2. Network Numbering:

a. Assign unique numbers to each new network.

b. Provide ability for changing network number through device switches or operator

interface.

c. DDC system, with all possible connected LANs, can contain up to 65,534 unique

networks.

3. Device Object Identifier Property Number:

a. Assign unique device object identifier property numbers or device instances for

each device network.

b. Provide for future modification of device instance number by device switches or

operator interface.

c. LAN shall support up to 4,194,302 unique devices.

4. Device Object Name Property Text:

a. Device object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters.

b. Assign unique device "Object Name" property names with plain-English

descriptive names for each device.






1) Example 1: Device object name for device controlling boiler plant at

Building 1000 would be "HW System B1000."

2) Example 2: Device object name for a VAV terminal unit controller could be

"VAV unit 102".

5. Object Name Property Text for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Object name property field shall support 32 minimum printable characters.

b. Assign object name properties with plain-English names descriptive of application.

1) Example 1: "Zone 1 Temperature."

2) Example 2 "Fan Start and Stop."

6. Object Identifier Property Number for Other Than Device Objects:

a. Assign object identifier property numbers according to Drawings or tables

indicated.

b. If not indicated, object identifier property numbers may be assigned at Installer's

discretion but must be approved by Owner in advance, be documented and be

unique for like object types within device.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF PROCESS TUBING

A. Install process tubing for signal to instruments in liquid and steam systems. Instruments include,

but are not limited to, the following:

1. Meters.

2. Sensors.

3. Switches.

4. Transmitters.

B. Support tubing according to MSS SP-69, Table 3, but at intervals no less than 60 inches.

C. Install NPS 1/2 process tubing for industrial-grade sensors, transmitters, and switches. Install

stainless steel bushings where required.

D. Make tubing bends with a bending tool. Flattened or wrinkled bends are unacceptable.

E. Support tubing independent of other trades.

F. Route tubing parallel to and at right angles to building construction.

G. Install tubing concealed in areas with ceilings.

H. Install a dirt leg with an isolation valve and threaded plug in drain valve at each connection to a

transmitter and switch.






I. Insulate process piping connected to hot water and steam systems for personnel protection if the

surface temperature exceeds 120 deg F. Only insulate piping within maintenance personnel

reach from floor, platform, or catwalk.

J. Wrap pipe threads of fitting in process tubing with service temperatures below 350 deg F with a

single wrap of PTFE tape.

K. Coat pipe threads of fittings on process tubing in services with temperatures exceeding 350

deg F with pipe compound before being made up to reduce the possibility of galling.

L. Do not make tubing connections to a fitting before completing makeup of the connection.

M. Check tubing for correct diameter and wall thickness. Cut the tube ends square and deburred.

Exercise care during cutting to keep tubing round.

N. Do not install fittings close to a bend. A length of straight tubing, not deformed by bending, is

required for a proper connection.

O. Align tubing with fitting when installed. Avoid springing tube into position.

P. Install tubing with extreme care exercised to keep foreign matter out of system. Open tubing

ends shall be kept plugged to keep out dust, dirt and moisture.

Q. Do not attach tubing to equipment that may be removed frequently for maintenance or may

impart vibration and expansion from temperature change.

R. Protect exposed tubing in mechanical equipment rooms from inadvertent mechanical damage

within 76 inches above floor. Use aluminum channel reversed and secured over tubing to

protect tubing from damage.

S. Process Tubing Isolation Valves Installation:

1. Install valves full size of piping and tubing.

2. Install isolation valves at the following locations:

a. Process connection.

b. Inlet to each instrument including, sensors, transmitters, switches, gauges, and

other control devices.

3. Locate valves to be readily accessible from floor.

3.15 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wire and Cable Installation:






1. Comply with installation requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical

Power Cables."

2. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271313 "Communications Copper

Backbone Cabling."

3. Comply with installation requirements in Section 271513 "Communications Copper

Horizontal Cabling."

4. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding

continuous temperatures of 90 deg C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical

properties of cable.

a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and

equipment.

5. Terminate wiring in a junction box.

a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box.

b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between

the clamping point and terminal block.

6. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control

devices having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks.

7. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a,

NFPA 70, and as indicated.

8. Use shielded cable to transmitters.

9. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors.

10. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation.

C. Conduit Installation:

1. Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for control-

voltage conductors.

2. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for balanced

twisted pair cabling and optical fiber installation.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


equipment.

3. Testing of Pneumatic and Air-Signal Tubing:






a. Test for leaks and obstructions.

b. Disconnect each pipe and tubing line before a test is performed, and blowout dust,

dirt, trash, condensate and other foreign materials with compressed air. Use

commercially pure compressed air or nitrogen as distributed in gas cylinders. Air

from an oil-free compressor with an air dryer is an acceptable alternative for the

test.

c. After foreign matter is expelled and line is free from obstructions, plug far end of

tubing run.

d. Connect a pressure source to near end of run with a needle valve between air

supply and tubing run.

e. Connect a pressure gauge accurate to within 0.5 percent of test between the shutoff

needle valve and tubing run under test.

f. For system pressures above 30 psig, apply a pressure of 1.5 times operating

pressure. Record pressure in tubing run every 10 minutes for one hour. Allowable

drop in pressure in one-hour period shall not exceed 1 psig.

g. For system pressures 30 psig and below, apply a pressure of 2.0 times operating

pressure to piping and tubing run. Record pressure in tubing run every 5 minutes

for one hour. Allowable drop in pressure in one-hour period shall not exceed 0.5

psig.

C. Testing:

1. Perform preinstallation, in-progress, and final tests, supplemented by additional tests, as

necessary.

2. Preinstallation Cable Verification: Verify integrity and serviceability for new cable

lengths before installation. This assurance may be provided by using vendor verification

documents, testing, or other methods. As a minimum, furnish evidence of verification for

cable attenuation and bandwidth parameters.

3. In-Progress Testing: Perform standard tests for correct pair identification and termination

during installation to ensure proper installation and cable placement. Perform tests in

addition to those specified if there is any reason to question condition of material

furnished and installed. Testing accomplished is to be documented by agency conducting

tests. Submit test results for Project record.

4. Final Testing: Perform final test of installed system to demonstrate acceptability as

installed. Testing shall be performed according to a test plan supplied by DDC system

manufacturer. Defective Work or material shall be corrected and retested. As a minimum,

final testing for cable system, including spare cable, shall verify conformance of

attenuation, length, and bandwidth parameters with performance indicated.

5. Test Equipment: Use an optical fiber time domain reflectometer for testing of length and

optical connectivity.

6. Test Results: Record test results and submit copy of test results for Project record.

3.17 DDC SYSTEM I/O CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests and calibration.

B. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.






C. Check instruments for proper installation on direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

D. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material and

support.

E. For pneumatic products, verify that air supply for each product is properly installed.

F. Control Damper Checkout:

1. For pneumatic dampers, verify that pressure gauges are provided in each air line to

damper actuator and positioner.

2. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction.

3. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

4. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed.

5. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment is secure.

6. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source.

7. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

G. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction.

2. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment is secure.

4. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed and connected to correct power source.

5. Verify that valve ball, disc or plug travel is unobstructed.

6. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace

the valve if leaks persist.

H. Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that instrument is correctly installed for location, orientation, direction and

operating clearances.

2. Verify that attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that conduit connections are properly secured and sealed.

4. Verify that wiring is properly labeled with unique identification, correct type and size and

is securely attached to proper terminals.

5. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal.

6. For instruments with tubing connections, verify that tubing attachment is secure and

isolation valves have been provided.

7. For flow instruments, verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have

been maintained.

8. For temperature instruments:

a. Verify sensing element type and proper material.

b. Verify length and insertion.






3.18 DDC SYSTEM I/O ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION AND TESTING:

A. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration

documentation.

B. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each

type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

C. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and

accuracy.

D. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument manufacturer's

written instructions.

E. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

F. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have

accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. An installed instrument with an

accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

G. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer.

H. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.

I. Comply with field testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE's Guideline 11,

"Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to

supplement requirements indicated.

J. Analog Signals:

1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100

percent.

2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating

span using a precision-resistant source.

K. Digital Signals:

1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire.

2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

L. Control Dampers:

1. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure,

from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent

closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.






3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less

than 30 seconds.

4. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at

multiple positions to confirm proper position indication.

M. Control Valves:

1. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from

100 percent open to 100 percent closed and back to 100 percent open.

2. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent

closed and 100 percent open at proper air pressures.

3. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time less

than 30 seconds.

4. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at


N. Meters: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

O. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

P. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

Q. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

3.19 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLER CHECKOUT

A. Verify power supply.

1. Verify voltage, phase and hertz.

2. Verify that protection from power surges is installed and functioning.

3. Verify that ground fault protection is installed.

4. If applicable, verify if connected to UPS unit.

5. If applicable, verify if connected to a backup power source.

6. If applicable, verify that power conditioning units, transient voltage suppression and

high-frequency noise filter units are installed.

B. Verify that wire and cabling is properly secured to terminals and labeled with unique

identification.

C. Verify that spare I/O capacity is provided.






3.20 DDC CONTROLLER I/O CONTROL LOOP TESTS

A. Testing:

1. Test every I/O point connected to DDC controller to verify that safety and operating

control set points are as indicated and as required to operate controlled system safely and

at optimum performance.

2. Test every I/O point throughout its full operating range.

3. Test every control loop to verify operation is stable and accurate.

4. Adjust control loop proportional, integral and derivative settings to achieve optimum

performance while complying with performance requirements indicated. Document

testing of each control loop's precision and stability via trend logs.

5. Test and adjust every control loop for proper operation according to sequence of

operation.

6. Test software and hardware interlocks for proper operation. Correct deficiencies.

7. Operate each analog point at the following:

a. Upper quarter of range.

b. Lower quarter of range.

c. At midpoint of range.

8. Exercise each binary point.

9. For every I/O point in DDC system, read and record each value at operator workstation,

at DDC controller and at field instrument simultaneously. Value displayed at operator

workstation, at DDC controller and at field instrument shall match.

10. Prepare and submit a report documenting results for each I/O point in DDC system and

include in each I/O point a description of corrective measures and adjustments made to

achieve desire results.

3.21 DDC SYSTEM VALIDATION TESTS

A. Perform validation tests before requesting final review of system. Before beginning testing, first

submit Pretest Checklist and Test Plan.

B. After approval of Test Plan, execute all tests and procedures indicated in plan.

C. After testing is complete, submit completed test checklist.

D. Pretest Checklist: Submit the following list with items checked off once verified:

1. Detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or verified.

2. Required mechanical installation work is successfully completed and HVAC equipment

is working correctly.

3. HVAC equipment motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.

4. Required DDC system components, wiring, and accessories are installed.

5. Installed DDC system architecture matches approved Drawings.

6. Control electric power circuits operate at proper voltage and are free from faults.

7. Required surge protection is installed.






8. DDC system network communications function properly, including uploading and

downloading programming changes.

9. Using BACnet protocol analyzer, verify that communications are error free.

10. Each controller's programming is backed up.

11. Equipment, products, tubing, wiring cable, and conduits are properly labeled.

12. All I/O points are programmed into controllers.

13. Testing, adjusting, and balancing work affecting controls is complete.

14. Dampers and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly.

15. Each control damper and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power.

16. Valves and actuators zero and span adjustments are set properly.

17. Each control valve and actuator goes to failed position on loss of power.

18. Meter, sensor and transmitter readings are accurate and calibrated.

19. Control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation.

20. View trend data where applicable.

21. Each controller works properly in standalone mode.

22. Safety controls and devices function properly.

23. Interfaces with fire-alarm system function properly.

24. Electrical interlocks function properly.

25. Operator workstations and other interfaces are delivered, all system and database

software is installed, and graphic are created.

26. Record Drawings are completed.

E. Test Plan:

1. Prepare and submit a validation test plan including test procedures for performance

validation tests.

2. Test plan shall address all specified functions of DDC system and sequences of operation.

3. Explain detailed actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with


4. Explain method for simulating necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate

performance.

5. Include a test checklist to be used to check and initial that each test has been successfully

completed.

6. Submit test plan documentation 10 business days before start of tests.

F. Validation Test:

1. Verify operating performance of each I/O point in DDC system.

a. Verify analog I/O points at operating value.

b. Make adjustments to out-of-tolerance I/O points.

1) Identify I/O points for future reference.

2) Simulate abnormal conditions to demonstrate proper function of safety

devices.

3) Replace instruments and controllers that cannot maintain performance

indicated after adjustments.

2. Simulate conditions to demonstrate proper sequence of control.






3. Readjust settings to design values and observe ability of DDC system to establish desired

conditions.

4. After 24 Hours following Initial Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during initial test.

b. Identify I/O points that still require additional correction and make corrections

necessary to achieve desired results.

5. After 24 Hours of Second Validation Test:

a. Re-check I/O points that required corrections during second test.

b. Continue validation testing until I/O point is normal on two consecutive tests.

6. Completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to ensure

that DDC system performs according to requirements indicated.

7. After validation testing is complete, prepare and submit a report indicating all I/O points

that required correction and how many validation re-tests it took to pass. Identify

adjustments made for each test and indicate instruments that were replaced.

G. DDC System Response Time Test:

1. Simulate HLC.

a. Heavy load shall be an occurrence of 50 percent of total connected binary COV,

one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, and 50 percent of total

connected analog COV, one-half of which represent an "alarm" condition, that are

initiated simultaneously on a one-time basis.

2. Initiate 10 successive occurrences of HLC and measure response time to typical alarms

and status changes.

3. Measure with a timer having at least 0.1-second resolution and 0.01 percent accuracy.

4. Purpose of test is to demonstrate DDC system, as follows:

a. Reaction to COV and alarm conditions during HLC.

b. Ability to update DDC system database during HLC.

5. Passing test is contingent on the following:

a. Alarm reporting at printer beginning no more than two seconds after the initiation

(time zero) of HLC.

b. All alarms, both binary and analog, are reported and printed; none are lost.

c. Compliance with response times specified.

6. Prepare and submit a report documenting HLC tested and results of test including time

stamp and print out of all alarms.

H. DDC System Network Bandwidth Test:






1. Test network bandwidth usage on all DDC system networks to demonstrate bandwidth

usage under DDC system normal operating conditions and under simulated HLC.

2. To pass, none of DDC system networks shall use more than 70 percent of available

bandwidth under normal and HLC operation.

3.22 DDC SYSTEM WIRELESS NETWORK VERIFICATION

A. DDC system Installer shall design wireless DDC system networks to comply with performance


B. Installer shall verify wireless network performance through field testing and shall document

results in a field test report.

C. Testing and verification of all wireless devices shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

1. Speed.

2. Online status.

3. Signal strength.

3.23 FINAL REVIEW

A. Submit written request to Architect and Construction Manager when DDC system is ready for

final review. Written request shall state the following:

1. DDC system has been thoroughly inspected for compliance with contract documents and

found to be in full compliance.

2. DDC system has been calibrated, adjusted and tested and found to comply with

requirements of operational stability, accuracy, speed and other performance


3. DDC system monitoring and control of HVAC systems results in operation according to

sequences of operation indicated.

4. DDC system is complete and ready for final review.

B. Review by Architect and Construction Manager shall be made after receipt of written request. A

field report shall be issued to document observations and deficiencies.

C. Take prompt action to remedy deficiencies indicated in field report and submit a second written

request when all deficiencies have been corrected. Repeat process until no deficiencies are

reported.

D. Should more than two reviews be required, DDC system manufacturer and Installer shall

compensate entity performing review for total costs, labor and expenses, associated with third

and subsequent reviews. Estimated cost of each review shall be submitted and approved by

DDC system manufacturer and Installer before making the review.

E. Prepare and submit closeout submittals when no deficiencies are reported.






F. A part of DDC system final review shall include a demonstration to parties participating in final

review.

1. Provide staff familiar with DDC system installed to demonstrate operation of DDC

system during final review.

2. Provide testing equipment to demonstrate accuracy and other performance requirements

of DDC system that is requested by reviewers during final review.

3. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Accuracy and calibration of 10 I/O points randomly selected by reviewers. If

review finds that some I/O points are not properly calibrated and not satisfying

performance requirements indicated, additional I/O points may be selected by

reviewers until total I/O points being reviewed that satisfy requirements equals

quantity indicated.

b. HVAC equipment and system hardwired and software safeties and life-safety

functions are operating according to sequence of operation. Up to 10 I/O points

shall be randomly selected by reviewers. Additional I/O points may be selected by

reviewers to discover problems with operation.

c. Correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption

after electrical power is restored for randomly selected HVAC systems.

d. Operation of randomly selected dampers and valves in normal-on, normal-off and

failed positions.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for randomly selected alarms, including different

classes of alarms, to ensure that alarms are properly received by operators and

operator workstations.

f. Trends, summaries, logs and reports set-up for Project.

g. For up to three HVAC systems randomly selected by reviewers, use graph trends

to show that sequence of operation is executed in correct manner and that HVAC

systems operate properly through complete sequence of operation including

different modes of operations indicated. Show that control loops are stable and

operating at set points and respond to changes in set point of 20 percent or more.

h. Software's ability to communicate with controllers, operator workstations,

uploading and downloading of control programs.

i. Software's ability to edit control programs off-line.

j. Data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability including parameter

changes.

k. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update,

and direct access to graphics.

l. Execution of digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

m. Spreadsheet and curve plot software and its integration with database.

n. Online user guide and help functions.

o. Multitasking by showing different operations occurring simultaneously on four

quadrants of split screen.

p. System speed of response compared to requirements indicated.

q. For Each Network and Programmable Application Controller:

1) Memory: Programmed data, parameters, trend and alarm history collected

during normal operation is not lost during power failure.






2) Operator Interface: Ability to connect directly to each type of digital

controller with a portable workstation and mobile device. Show that

maintenance personnel interface tools perform as indicated in

manufacturer's technical literature.

3) Standalone Ability: Demonstrate that controllers provide stable and reliable

standalone operation using default values or other method for values

normally read over network.

4) Electric Power: Ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power

source.

5) Wiring Labels: Match control drawings.

6) Network Communication: Ability to locate a controller's location on

network and communication architecture matches Shop Drawings.

7) Nameplates and Tags: Accurate and permanently attached to control panel

doors, instrument, actuators, and devices.

r. Communications and Interoperability: Demonstrate proper interoperability of data

sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and

network management. Use ASHRAE 135 protocol analyzer to help identify

devices, view network traffic, and verify interoperability. Requirements must be

met even if only one manufacturer's equipment is installed.

1) Data Presentation: On each operator workstation, demonstrate graphic

display capabilities.

2) Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate ability to read and display any used

readable object property of any device on network.

3) Set Point and Parameter Modifications: Show ability to modify set points

and tuning parameters indicated.

4) Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Network devices are installed and configured

to perform without need for operator intervention to implement Project

sequence of operation and to share global data.

5) Alarm and Event Management: Alarms and events are installed and

prioritized according to Owner. Demonstrate that time delays and other

logic are set up to avoid nuisance tripping. Show that operators with

sufficient privileges are permitted.

6) Schedule Lists: Schedules are configured for start and stop, mode change,

occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in sequence of operations.

7) Schedule Display and Modification: Ability to display any schedule with

start and stop times for calendar year. Show that all calendar entries and

schedules are modifiable from any connected operator workstation by an

operator with sufficient privilege.

8) Archival Storage of Data: Data archiving is handled by operator workstation

and server and local trend archiving and display is accomplished.

9) Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Operator with sufficient

privilege can change logged data points, sampling rate, and trend duration.

10) Device and Network Management:

a) Display of network device status.

b) Display of BACnet Object Information.

c) Silencing devices transmitting erroneous data.






d) Time synchronization.

e) Remote device re-initialization.

f) Backup and restore network device programming and master

database(s).

g) Configuration management of routers.

3.24 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.25 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include

six months' full maintenance by DDC system manufacturer's authorized service representative.

Include semiannual preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, cleaning, calibration and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and

supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.26 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific

system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC

system.

B. Extent of Training:

1. Base extent of training on scope and complexity of DDC system indicated and training

requirements indicated. Provide extent of training required to satisfy requirements

indicated even if more than minimum training requirements are indicated.

2. Inform Owner of anticipated training requirements if more than minimum training

requirements are indicated.

3. Minimum Training Requirements:

a. Provide not less than five days of training total.

b. Stagger training over multiple training classes to accommodate Owner's

requirements. All training shall occur before end of warranty period.

c. Total days of training shall be broken into not more than two separate training

classes.

d. Each training class shall be not less than one consecutive day(s).

C. Training Schedule:

1. Schedule training with Owner 20 business days before expected Substantial Completion.






2. Schedule training to provide Owner with at least 10 business days of notice in advance of

training.

3. Training shall occur within normal business hours at a mutually agreed on time. Unless

otherwise agreed to, training shall occur Monday through Friday, except on U.S. Federal

holidays, with two morning sessions and two afternoon sessions. Each morning session

and afternoon session shall be split in half with 30-minute break between sessions.

Morning and afternoon sessions shall be separated by 60-minute lunch period. Training,

including breaks and excluding lunch period, shall not exceed eight hours per day.

4. Provide staggered training schedule as requested by Owner.

D. Training Attendee List and Sign-in Sheet:

1. Request from Owner in advance of training a proposed attendee list with name, phone

number and e-mail address.

2. Provide a preprinted sign-in sheet for each training session with proposed attendees listed

and no fewer than six blank spaces to add additional attendees.

3. Preprinted sign-in sheet shall include training session number, date and time, instructor

name, phone number and e-mail address, and brief description of content to be covered

during session. List attendees with columns for name, phone number, e-mail address and

a column for attendee signature or initials.

4. Circulate sign-in sheet at beginning of each session and solicit attendees to sign or initial

in applicable location.

5. At end of each training day, send Owner an e-mail with an attachment of scanned copy

(PDF) of circulated sign-in sheet for each session.

E. Training Attendee Headcount:

1. Plan in advance of training for two attendees.

2. Make allowance for Owner to add up to two attendee(s) at time of training.

3. Headcount may vary depending on training content covered in session. Attendee access

may be restricted to some training content for purposes of maintaining system security.

F. Training Attendee Prior Knowledge: For guidance in planning required training and instruction,

assume attendees have the following:

1. High school education and degree.

2. Basic user knowledge of computers and office applications.

3. Basic knowledge of HVAC systems.

4. knowledge of DDC systems.

5. Basic knowledge of DDC system and products installed.

G. Attendee Training Manuals:

1. Provide each attendee with a color hard copy of all training materials and visual

presentations.

2. Hard-copy materials shall be organized in a three-ring binder with table of contents and

individual divider tabs marked for each logical grouping of subject matter. Organize

material to provide space for attendees to take handwritten notes within training manuals.






3. In addition to hard-copy materials included in training manual, provide each binder with

a sleeve or pocket that includes a DVD or flash drive with PDF copy of all hard-copy

materials.

H. Instructor Requirements:

1. One or multiple qualified instructors, as required, to provide training.

2. Instructors shall have not less than five years of providing instructional training on not

less than five past projects with similar DDC system scope and complexity to DDC

system installed.

I. Organization of Training Sessions:

1. Organize training sessions into logical groupings of technical content and to reflect

different levels of operators having access to system. Plan training sessions to

accommodate the following three levels of operators:

a. Daily operators.

b. Advanced operators.

c. System managers and administrators.

2. Plan and organize training sessions to group training content to protect DDC system

security. Some attendees may be restricted to some training sessions that cover restricted

content for purposes of maintaining DDC system security.

J. Training Outline:

1. Submit training outline for Owner review at least 10 business day before scheduling

training.

2. Outline shall include a detailed agenda for each training day that is broken down into

each of four training sessions that day, training objectives for each training session and

synopses for each lesson planned.

K. On-Site Training:

1. Owner will provide conditioned classroom or workspace with ample desks or tables,

chairs, power and data connectivity for instructor and each attendee.

2. Instructor shall provide training materials, projector and other audiovisual equipment

used in training.

3. Provide as much of training located on-site as deemed feasible and practical by Owner.

4. On-site training shall include regular walk-through tours, as required, to observe each

unique product type installed with hands-on review of operation, calibration and service

requirements.

5. Operator workstation provided with DDC system shall be used in training. If operator

workstation is not indicated, provide a temporary workstation to convey training content.

L. Off-Site Training:






1. Provide conditioned training rooms and workspace with ample tables desks or tables,

chairs, power and data connectivity for each attendee.

2. Provide capability to remotely access to Project DDC system for use in training.

3. Provide a workstation for use by each attendee.

M. Training Content for Daily Operators:

1. Basic operation of system.

2. Understanding DDC system architecture and configuration.

3. Understanding each unique product type installed including performance and service

requirements for each.

4. Understanding operation of each system and equipment controlled by DDC system

including sequences of operation, each unique control algorithm and each unique

optimization routine.

5. Operating operator workstations, printers and other peripherals.

6. Logging on and off system.

7. Accessing graphics, reports and alarms.

8. Adjusting and changing set points and time schedules.

9. Recognizing DDC system malfunctions.

10. Understanding content of operation and maintenance manuals including control

drawings.

11. Understanding physical location and placement of DDC controllers and I/O hardware.

12. Accessing data from DDC controllers.

13. Operating portable operator workstations.

14. Review of DDC testing results to establish basic understanding of DDC system operating

performance and HVAC system limitations as of Substantial Completion.

15. Running each specified report and log.

16. Displaying and demonstrating each data entry to show Project-specific customizing

capability. Demonstrating parameter changes.

17. Stepping through graphics penetration tree, displaying all graphics, demonstrating

dynamic updating, and direct access to graphics.

18. Executing digital and analog commands in graphic mode.

19. Demonstrating control loop precision and stability via trend logs of I/O for not less than

10 percent of I/O installed.

20. Demonstrating DDC system performance through trend logs and command tracing.

21. Demonstrating scan, update, and alarm responsiveness.

22. Demonstrating spreadsheet and curve plot software, and its integration with database.

23. Demonstrating on-line user guide and help function and mail facility.

24. Demonstrating multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction

operating simultaneously via split screen.

25. Demonstrating the following for HVAC systems and equipment controlled by DDC

system:

a. Operation of HVAC equipment in normal-off, -on and failed conditions while

observing individual equipment, dampers and valves for correct position under

each condition.

b. For HVAC equipment with factory-installed software, show that integration into

DDC system is able to communicate with DDC controllers or gateways, as

applicable.






c. Using graphed trends, show that sequence of operation is executed in correct

manner, and HVAC systems operate properly through complete sequence of

operation including seasonal change, occupied and unoccupied modes, warm-up

and cool-down cycles and other modes of operation indicated.

d. Hardware interlocks and safeties function properly and DDC system performs

correct sequence of operation after electrical power interruption and resumption

after power is restored.

e. Reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm, and confirm that alarms are received

at assigned locations, including operator workstations.

f. Each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within time

period indicated.

g. Sharing of previously graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each

control loop is stable and set points are being maintained.

N. Training Content for Advanced Operators:

1. Making and changing workstation graphics.

2. Creating, deleting and modifying alarms including annunciation and routing.

3. Creating, deleting and modifying point trend logs including graphing and printing on an

ad-hoc basis and operator-defined time intervals.

4. Creating, deleting and modifying reports.

5. Creating, deleting and modifying points.

6. Creating, deleting and modifying programming including ability to edit control programs

off-line.

7. Creating, deleting and modifying system graphics and other types of displays.

8. Adding DDC controllers and other network communication devices such as gateways and

routers.

9. Adding operator workstations.

10. Performing DDC system checkout and diagnostic procedures.

11. Performing DDC controllers operation and maintenance procedures.

12. Performing operator workstation operation and maintenance procedures.

13. Configuring DDC system hardware including controllers, workstations, communication

devices and I/O points.

14. Maintaining, calibrating, troubleshooting, diagnosing and repairing hardware.

15. Adjusting, calibrating and replacing DDC system components.

O. Training Content for System Managers and Administrators:

1. DDC system software maintenance and backups.

2. Uploading, downloading and off-line archiving of all DDC system software and

databases.

3. Interface with Project-specific, third-party operator software.

4. Understanding password and security procedures.

5. Adding new operators and making modifications to existing operators.

6. Operator password assignments and modification.

7. Operator authority assignment and modification.

8. Workstation data segregation and modification.

P. Video of Training Sessions:






1. Provide a digital video and audio recording of each training session. Create a separate

recording file for each session.

2. Stamp each recording file with training session number, session name and date.

3. Provide Owner with two copies of digital files on DVDs or flash drives for later reference

and for use in future training.

4. Owner retains right to make additional copies for intended training purposes without

having to pay royalties.






CONTROL VALVES 230923.11 - 1

SECTION 230923.11 - CONTROL VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes control valves and actuators for DDC systems.


1. Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" control equipment

and software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire,

and cable.

2. Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that

relate to Section 230923.11.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cv: Design valve coefficient.

B. DDC: Direct-digital control.

C. NBR: Nitrile butadiene rubber.

D. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene

E. RMS: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean

value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:















4. Installation, operation, and maintenance instructions, including factors affecting

performance.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.



connection.


4. Include diagrams for pneumatic signal and main air tubing.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Schedule and design calculations for control valves and actuators, including the

following:

a. Flow at project design and minimum flow conditions.

b. Pressure differential drop across valve at project design flow condition.

c. Maximum system pressure differential drop (pump close-off pressure) across valve

at project minimum flow condition.

d. Design and minimum control valve coefficient with corresponding valve position.


f. Leakage flow at maximum system pressure differential.




A. Coordination Drawings: Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to

scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input

from installers of the items involved:

1. Control valve installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe, and

equipment.

2. Size and location of wall access panels for control valves installed behind walls.

3. Size and location of ceiling access panels for control valves installed above inaccessible

ceilings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For control valves to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality

Requirements," to size products where indicated as delegated design.

D. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

E. Backup Power Source: Systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have

associated control valve actuators served from a backup power source.

F. Environmental Conditions:

1. Provide electric control valve actuators, with protective enclosures satisfying the

following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Electric control valve actuators not available with integral enclosures, complying with

requirements indicated, shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures.

a. Hazardous Locations: Explosion-proof rating for condition.

G. Determine control valve sizes and flow coefficients by ISA 75.01.01.

H. Control valve characteristics and rangeability shall comply with ISA 75.11.01.

I. Selection Criteria:

1. Control valves shall be suitable for operation at following conditions:

a. Heating Hot Water: 110-140F

2. Control valve shutoff classifications shall be FCI 70-2, Class IV or better unless


3. Valve pattern, three-way or straight through, shall be as indicated on Drawings.

4. Modulating straight-through pattern control valves shall have equal percentage flow-

throttling characteristics unless otherwise indicated.

5. Modulating three-way pattern water valves shall have linear flow-throttling

characteristics. The total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the

valve's position.

6. Fail positions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Heating Hot Water: Close.






7. Globe-type control valves shall pass the design flow required with not more than 95

percent of stem lift unless otherwise indicated.

8. Rotary-type control valves, such as ball and butterfly valves, shall have Cv falling

between 65 and 75 degrees of valve full open position and minimum valve Cv between

15 and 25 percent of open position.

9. Selection shall consider viscosity, flashing, and cavitation corrections.

10. Valves shall have stable operation throughout full range of operation, from design to

minimum Cv.

11. Minimum Cv shall be calculated at 10 percent of design flow, with a coincident pressure

differential equal to the system design pump head.

12. In water systems, select modulating control valves at terminal equipment for a design Cv

based on a pressure drop of 5 psig at design flow unless otherwise indicated.

13. Two-position control valves shall be line size unless otherwise indicated.

14. In water systems, use ball- or globe-style control valves for two-position control for

valves NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly style for valves larger than NPS 2.

15. Control valve, pneumatic-control signal shall not exceed 200 feet. For longer distances,

provide an electric/electronic control signal to the valve and an electric solenoid valve or

electro-pneumatic transducer at the valve to convert the control signal to pneumatic.

2.2 BALL-STYLE CONTROL VALVES

A. Ball Valves with Single Port and Characterized Disk:

1. Pressure Rating for NPS 1 and Smaller: Nominal 600 WOG.

2. Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 through NPS 2: Nominal 400 WOG.

3. Close-off Pressure: 200 psig.

4. Process Temperature Range: Zero to 212 deg F.

5. Body and Tail Piece: Cast bronze ASTM B61, ASTM B62, ASTM B584, or forged brass

with nickel plating.

6. End Connections: Threaded (NPT) ends.

7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or bronze.

8. Stem and Stem Extension:

a. Material to match ball.

b. Blowout-proof design.

c. Sleeve or other approved means to allow valve to be opened and closed without

damaging the insulation or the vapor barrier seal.

9. Ball Seats: Reinforced PTFE.

10. Stem Seal: Reinforced PTFE packing ring with a threaded packing ring follower to retain

the packing ring under design pressure with the linkage removed. Alternative means,

such as EPDM O-rings, are acceptable if an equivalent cycle endurance can be

demonstrated by testing.

11. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Examine roughing-in for valves installed in piping to verify actual locations of piping


C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONTROL VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Control Valves:

1. Select from valves specified in "Control Valves" Article to achieve performance

requirements and characteristics indicated while subjected to full range of system

operation encountered.

2. Hot water System, Two-Way Applications Controlled by Flow: Ball valves with single

port and characterized disk


A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.


C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduits to comply with requirements

indicated.

D. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before

proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that

could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent

condition.

E. Firestop penetrations made in fire-rated assemblies and seal penetrations made in acoustically

rated assemblies.

F. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.








3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly.

G. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance

from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access,

confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.

H. Corrosive Environments:

1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they will be subjected.

2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments, including. but not


a. Laboratory exhaust airstreams.

b. Process exhaust airstreams.

3. Use Type 316 stainless-steel tubing and fittings when in contact with a corrosive

environment.

4. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive environment, use Type 316 stainless-steel

conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosive-resistant

coating that is suitable for environment.

5. Where control devices are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive

resistant from manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure

constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.

3.4 ELECTRIC POWER

A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections.

B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 262816 "Enclosed

Switches and Circuit Breakers."

C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.5 CONTROL VALVES

A. Install pipe reducers for valves smaller than line size. Position reducers as close to valve as

possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Install with

manufacturer-recommended clearance.

B. Install flanges or unions to allow drop-in and -out valve installation.






C. Where indicated, install control valve with three-valve bypass manifold to allow for control

valve isolation and removal without interrupting system flow by providing manual throttling

valve in bypass pipe.

D. Valve Orientation:

1. Where possible, install globe and ball valves installed in horizontal piping with stems

upright and not more than 15 degrees off of vertical, not inverted.

2. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

3. Where possible, install butterfly valves that are installed in horizontal piping with stems

in horizontal position and with low point of disc opening with direction of flow.

E. Clearance:

1. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support of valves that cannot be

handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism.

2. Install valves with at least 12 inches of clear space around valve and between valves and

adjacent surfaces.

F. Threaded Valves:

1. Note internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall,

to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

2. Align threads at point of assembly.

3. Apply thread compound to external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is

specified.

4. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Apply wrench on valve end as pipe is being threaded.

G. Flanged Valves:

1. Align flange surfaces parallel.

2. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and

gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten

bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with

requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and

tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at

points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems."






B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with valve identification on valve.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign

materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces.

B. Wash and shine glazing.

C. Polish glossy surfaces to a clean shine.

3.9 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

A. Control Valve Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check valves for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check valves for proper installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance.

4. For pneumatic products, verify air supply for each product is properly installed.

5. For pneumatic valves, verify that pressure gauges are provided in each air line to valve

actuator and positioner.

6. Verify that control valves are installed correctly for flow direction.

7. Verify that valve body attachment is properly secured and sealed.

8. Verify that valve actuator and linkage attachment are secure.

9. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source.

10. Verify that valve ball, disc, and plug travel are unobstructed.

11. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before insulating and

balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace

the valve if leaks persist.

3.10 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING

A. Stroke and adjust control valves following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100

percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Stroke control valves with pilot positioners. Adjust valve and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so valve is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed, and

100 percent open at proper air pressures.

C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than

30 seconds.

D. For control valves equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple

positions to confirm proper position indication.











CONTROL DAMPERS 230923.12 - 1

SECTION 230923.12 - CONTROL DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of control dampers and actuators for DDC systems:

1. General control-damper actuator requirements.

2. Electric and electronic actuators.


1. Section 230923 "Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC" for control equipment and

software, relays, electrical power devices, uninterruptible power supply units, wire, and

cable.

2. Section 089116 “Operable Wall Louvers” for the combination louver dampers that the

control damper actuators will be connecting to.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital control.

B. RMS: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean

value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.

















4. Installation instructions, including factors affecting performance.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.



connection.






1. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, and equipment.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For control dampers to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded.

D. Backup Power Source: Systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have

associated control damper actuators served from a backup power source.

E. Environmental Conditions:

1. Provide electric control-damper actuators, with protective enclosures satisfying the

following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated.






Electric control-damper actuators not available with integral enclosures, complying with

requirements indicated, shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures.

F. Selection Criteria:

1. Dampers shall have stable operation throughout full range of operation, from design to

minimum airflow over varying pressures and temperatures encountered.

2. Select modulating dampers for a pressure drop of 2 percent of fan total static pressure


3. Two-position dampers shall be full size of duct or equipment connection unless otherwise

indicated.

4. Control-damper, pneumatic-control signal shall not exceed 200 feet. For longer distances,

provide an electric/electronic control signal to the damper and an electric solenoid valve

or electro-pneumatic transducer at the damper to convert the control signal to pneumatic.

2.2 GENERAL CONTROL-DAMPER ACTUATORS REQUIREMENTS

A. Actuators shall operate related damper(s) with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth

modulating action or two-position action and proper speed of response at velocity and pressure

conditions to which the damper is subjected.

B. Actuators shall produce sufficient power and torque to close off against the maximum system

pressures encountered. Actuators shall be sized to close off against the fan shutoff pressure as a

minimum requirement.

C. The total damper area operated by an actuator shall not exceed 80 percent of manufacturer's

maximum area rating.

D. Provide one actuator for each damper assembly where possible. Multiple actuators required to

drive a single damper assembly shall operate in unison.

E. Avoid the use of excessively oversized actuators which could overdrive and cause linkage

failure when the damper blade has reached either its full-open or closed position.

F. Use jackshafts and shaft couplings in lieu of blade-to-blade linkages when driving axially

aligned damper sections.

G. Provide mounting hardware and linkages for connecting actuator to damper.

H. Select actuators to fail in desired position in the event of a power failure.

I. Actuator Fail Positions: As indicated below:

1. Exhaust Air: Close.

2. Outdoor Air: Close.






2.3 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS

A. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic.

B. Voltage:

1. Voltage selection is delegated to professional designing control system.

2. Actuator shall deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled

device from limit to limit when operated at rated voltage.

3. Actuator shall function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate

voltage.

C. Construction:

1. Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon

bearings, and pressed steel enclosures.

2. 100 up to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft-hardened steel running in

bronze, copper alloy, or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed

in dustproof cast-iron, cast-steel, or cast-aluminum housing.

3. Greater Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand

crank and permanently lubricated bearings.

D. Field Adjustment:

1. Spring return actuators shall be easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field

without replacement.

2. Provide gear-type actuators with an external manual adjustment mechanism to allow

manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.

E. Two-Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type.

F. Modulating Actuators:

1. Capable of stopping at all points across full range and starting in either direction from

any point in range.

2. Control Input Signal:

a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counterclockwise inputs.

One input drives actuator to open position, and other input drives actuator to close

position. No signal of either input remains in last position.

b. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates

throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10-V dc signals.

c. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Actuator drives to a specified position according

to a pulse duration (length) of signal from a dry-contact closure, triac sink or

source controller.

d. Programmable Multi-Function:

1) Control input, position feedback, and running time shall be factory or field

programmable.






2) Diagnostic feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload,

mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit.

3) Service data, including at a minimum, number of hours powered and

number of hours in motion.

G. Position Feedback:

1. Equip two-position actuators with limits switches or other positive means of a position

indication signal for remote monitoring of open and close position.

2. Equip modulating actuators with a position feedback through current or voltage signal for

remote monitoring.

3. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and

closed travel limits.

H. Fail-Safe:

1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position.

2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or

close) on loss of power.

3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are

acceptable only where uniquely indicated.

I. Integral Overload Protection:

1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions.

2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or

magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection.

J. Damper Attachment:

1. Unless otherwise required for damper interface, provide actuator designed to be directly

coupled to damper shaft without need for connecting linkages.

2. Attach actuator to damper drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power

and torque without slippage.

3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two

points of attachment.

K. Temperature and Humidity:

1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with

minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 deg F.

2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating

range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

L. Enclosure:

1. Suitable for ambient conditions encountered by application.

2. NEMA 250, Type 2 for indoor and protected applications.

3. NEMA 250, Type 4 or Type 4X for outdoor and unprotected applications.






4. Provide actuator enclosure with a heater and controller where required by application.

M. Stroke Time:

1. Operate damper from fully closed to fully open within 15 seconds.

2. Operate damper from fully open to fully closed within 15 seconds.

3. Move damper to failed position within 5 seconds.

4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation.

5. Actuators operating in smoke control systems comply with governing code and NFPA

requirements.

N. Sound:

1. Spring Return: 62 dBA.

2. Non-Spring Return: 45 dBA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Examine roughing-in for dampers and instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual

locations of connections before installation.




A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated.

B. Properly support dampers and actuators, tubing, wiring, and conduit to comply with

requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in

attachment when subjected to a force.

C. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before



condition.

D. Seal penetrations made in fire-rated and acoustically rated assemblies.

E. Fastening Hardware:






1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, or other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts.




F. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance



3.3 ELECTRIC POWER








3.4 CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Service Access:

1. Dampers actuators shall be accessible for visual inspection and service.

2. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of damper to allow service

personnel to hand clean any portion of damper, linkage, and actuator. Comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install dampers straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions. Install

supplementary structural steel reinforcement for large multiple-section dampers if factory

support alone cannot handle loading.

C. Attach actuator(s) to damper drive shaft.

D. For duct-mounted and equipment-mounted dampers installed outside of equipment, install a

visible and accessible indication of damper position from outside.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with

requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."






3.6 IDENTIFICATION






A. Control-Damper Actuator Checkout:

1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check dampers for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material,

and support.

4. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction.

5. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

6. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed.

7. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment are secure.

8. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source.

9. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed.

3.8 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING:

A. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100

percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open.

B. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed,

and 100 percent open at proper air pressure.

C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than

30 seconds.

D. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at







FLOW INSTRUMENTS 230923.14 - 1

SECTION 230923.14 - FLOW INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Airflow switches.

2. Airflow transmitters.

3. Liquid flow switches.

4. Liquid flow transmitters.




cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Ethernet: Local area network based on IEEE 802.3 standards.

B. FEP: Fluorinated ethylene propylene.

C. HART: Highway addressable remote transducer protocol is the global standard for sending and

receiving digital information across analog wires between smart devices and control or

monitoring systems through bi-directional communication that provides data access between

intelligent field instruments and host systems. A host can be any software application from

technician's hand-held device or laptop to a plant's process control, asset management, safety, or

other system using any control platform.

D. PEEK: Polyetheretherketone.

E. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

F. PPS: Polyphenylene sulfide.

G. RS-485: A TIA standard for multipoint communications using two twisted pairs.






H. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

I. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.





2. Operating characteristics; electrical characteristics; and furnished accessories indicating








5. Product certificates.

B. Shop Drawings:




connection.


4. Include diagrams for air and process signal tubing.

5. Number-coded identification system for unique identification of wiring, cable, and tubing

ends.


1. Schedule and design calculations for flow instruments, including the following.


b. Pressure drop at Project design and minimum flow conditions.


A. Product Certificates: For each product requiring a certificate.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a

qualified testing agency.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For instruments to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.




B. Provide parts, as indicated by manufacturer's recommended parts list, for product operation

during one-year period following warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Select and size products to achieve specified performance requirements.

B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for


2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FLOW INSTRUMENTS

A. Air sensors and transmitters shall have an extended range of 10 percent above Project design

flow and 10 percent below minimum Project flow to signal abnormal flow conditions and to

provide flexibility for changes in operation.

B. Liquid and steam sensors, meters, and transmitters shall have an extended range of 10 percent

above Project design flow and 10 percent below Project minimum flow to signal abnormal flow

conditions and to provide flexibility for changes in operation.

C. Source Limitations: For flow instruments, obtain products from single source from single

manufacturer.

2.3 AIRFLOW SWITCHES

A. Stainless Steel Single Vane Switch:

1. Description:

a. Velocities up to 2000 fpm.

b. Suitable for mounting with air direction in horizontal.






2. Performance:

a. Voltage: 125-, 240-, and 480-V ac.

b. Full Load Current: 9.8 A at 125-V ac.

c. Field-Adjustable Velocity Set Point: 400 to 1600 fpm.

d. Maximum Process Temperature: 180 deg F.

e. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 125 deg F.

3. Construction:

a. Stainless steel vane.

b. Vane actuates a SPDT snap switch.

c. Enclosure Material: Die-cast metal.

d. Enclosure with removable cover.

e. NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

f. Screw set-point adjustment.

g. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

h. Conduit Connections: 1-inch trade size conduit knock outs on top and bottom.

2.4 AIRFLOW TRANSMITTERS

A. Pressure Differential Transmitters for Airflow Measurement:

1. Performance:

a. Range: As required by application and at least 10 percent below minimum airflow

and 10 percent greater than design airflow.

b. Accuracy: Within 0.5 percent of the full-scale range.

c. Hysteresis: Within 0.10 percent of full scale.

d. Repeatability: Within 0.05 percent of full scale.

e. Stability: Within one percent of span per year.

f. Overpressure: 10 psig.

g. Temperature Limits: Zero to 150 deg F.

h. Compensate Temperature Limits: 40 to 150 deg F.

i. Thermal Effects: 0.033 percent of full scale per degree F.

j. Shock and vibration shall not harm the transmitter.

2. Output Signals:

a. Analog Current Signal:

1) Two-wire, 4- to 20-mA dc current source.

2) Signal capable of operating into 800-ohm load.

b. Analog Voltage Signal:

1) Three wire, zero to 10 V.






2) Minimum Load Resistance: 1000 ohms.

3. Display: Four-digit digital with minimum 0.4-inch-high numeric characters.

4. Operator Interface:

a. Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.

5. Construction:

a. Plastic casing with removable plastic cover.

b. Fittings: Swivel fittings for connection to copper tubing or barbed fittings for

connection to polyethylene tubing. Fittings on bottom of instrument case.

c. Screw terminal block for wire connections.

d. Vertical plane mounting.

e. NEMA 250, Type 4.

f. Mounting Bracket: Appropriate for installation.

2.5 LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES

A. Liquid Flow Switch (Bellows Type):

1. Description:

a. Field-adjustable four-vane combinations.

b. Field-adjustable set-point adjustment screw.

c. Suitable for pipe sizes NPS 1 through NPS 8.

d. Switch mounted vertically in horizontal pipe.

2. Performance:

a. Flow Rate Actuation and De-actuation: Varies with vane combination and set-

point adjustment.

b. Pressure Limit: 145 psig.

c. Temperature Limit: 230 deg F.

d. Electrical Rating: 10 A resistive, 3 A conductive at 250-V ac.

e. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

3. Wetted Parts Construction:

a. Bellows: Tin-bronze.

b. Vanes: Stainless steel.

c. Body: Forged brass.

d. Process Connection: NPS 1.

4. Enclosure:






a. Die-cast aluminum alloy.

b. NEMA 250, Type 4.

c. Electrical Connection: Cable gland with attached wire leads.

2.6 LIQUID FLOW TRANSMITTERS

A. Liquid Pressure Differential Transmitter for Flow Measurement:

1. Performance:

a. Range: Approximately 2 times the set point.

b. Span: Adjustable plus or minus 1 mA, non-interactive.

c. Accuracy: Within 0.25 percent of full scale.

d. Maximum Operating Pressure: 2.5 times range.

e. Temperature Limits: Zero to 175 deg F.

f. Compensate Temperature Limits: 30 to 150 deg F.

g. Thermal Effects: 0.02 percent of full scale per degree F.

h. Response Time: 30 to 50 ms.

i. Shock and vibration shall not harm the transmitter.

2. Analog Output Current Signal:

a. Two wire, 4- to 20-mA dc current source.

b. Signal capable of operating into 1000-ohm load.

3. Operator Interface:

a. Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.

b. Bleed screws on side of body, two screws on low-pressure side and one screw on

high-pressure side, for air in line and pressure cavity.

4. Construction:

a. Aluminum and stainless-steel enclosure with removable cover.

b. Wetted parts of transmitter constructed of 17-4 PH or 300 series stainless steel.

c. NPS 1/4 process connections on side of instrument enclosure.

d. Knock out for 1/2-inch trade size conduit connection on side of instrument

enclosure.

e. Screw terminal block for wire connections.

f. NEMA 250, Type 4X.

g. Mounting bracket shall be suitable for installation.

5. Transmitter shall have three-valve manifold. Construct manifold of brass, bronze, or

stainless steel. Manifold shall have NPS 1/4 process connections.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections

before installation.

C. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of


D. Provide the services of an independent inspection agency to confirm that proposed mounting

locations comply with requirements indicated and approved submittals.

1. Indicate dimensioned locations with mounting height for all surface-mounted products to

walls and ceilings on shop drawings.

2. Do not begin installation without submittal approval of mounting location.

E. Complete installation rough-in only after confirmation by independent inspection is complete

and approval of location is documented for review by Owner and Architect on request.

F. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTRUMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Select from instrument types to achieve performance requirements and characteristics indicated

while subjected to full range of system operation encountered.

B. Airflow Switches:

1. Measured Velocities 400 fpm and Less: Polymer film sail switch.

2. Measured Velocities Greater than 400 fpm: Stainless steel single-vane switch.

C. Liquid Flow Switches:

1. System,: Bellows type.

D. Liquid Flow Transmitters:

1. System,: Liquid pressure differential transmitter.







A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.


C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements

indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment

when subjected to a force.

D. Install ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before



condition.

E. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance



F. Corrosive Environments:

1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they will be subjected.

2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments, including, but not




3. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive environment, use Type 316 stainless steel

conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings with a corrosive-resistant coating that is

suitable for environment.

4. Where instruments are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive resistant

from the manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure


3.4 ELECTRIC POWER













3.5 INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Mounting Location:

1. Rough-in: Outline instrument-mounting locations before setting instruments and routing

cable, wiring, tubing, and conduit to final location.

2. Install switches and transmitters for air and liquid flow associated with individual air-

handling units and connected ductwork and piping near air-handlings units co-located in

air-handling unit system control panel, to provide service personnel a single and

convenient location for inspection and service.

3. Install liquid and steam flow switches and transmitters for indoor applications in

mechanical equipment rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated

specifically on Drawings.

4. Install airflow switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical equipment

rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated specifically on Drawings.

5. Mount switches and transmitters not required to be mounted within system control panels

on walls, floor-supported freestanding pipe stands, or floor-supported structural support

frames. Use manufacturer mounting brackets to accommodate field mounting. Securely

support and brace products to prevent vibration and movement.

6. Install instruments in steam, liquid, and liquid-sealed-piped services below their process

connection point. Slope tubing down to instrument with a slope of 2 percent.

7. Install instruments in dry gas and non-condensable-vapor piped services above their

process connection point. Slope process connection lines up to instrument with a

minimum slope of 2 percent.

B. Mounting Height:

1. Mount instruments in user-occupied space to match mounting height of light switches

unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Mounting height shall comply with codes and

accessibility requirements.

2. Mount switches and transmitters, located in mechanical equipment rooms and other

similar space not subject to code, state, and federal accessibility requirements, within a

range of 42 to 72 inches above the adjacent floor, grade, or service catwalk or platform.

a. Make every effort to mount at 60 inches.

C. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static-

pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated using neoprene gaskets or grommets.

3.6 FLOW INSTRUMENTS INSTALLATION

A. Airflow Sensors:

1. Install sensors in straight sections of duct with manufacturer-recommended straight duct

upstream and downstream of sensor.






2. Installed sensors shall be accessible for visual inspection and service. Install access

door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of sensor, to allow service personnel to

hand clean sensors.

B. Liquid Switches:

1. Install system process connection full size of switch connection, but not less than NPS 1.

Install bushing if required to mate switch to system connection.

2. Install switch in top dead center of horizontal pipe positioned in an accessible location to

allow for inspection and replacement.

3. In applications where top-dead-center location is not possible due to field constraints,

install switch at location along top half of pipe if switch is acceptable by manufacturer for

mounting orientation.

C. Transmitters:

1. Install airflow transmitters serving an air system in a single location adjacent to or within

system control panel.

2. Install liquid flow transmitters, not integral to sensors, in vicinity of sensor. Where

multiple flow transmitters serving same system are located in same room, co-locate

transmitters by system to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for

inspection and service.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION





3.8 CLEANING






A. Description:

1. Check out installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.






3. Check instruments for proper installation with respect to direction of flow, elevation,

orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact

performance.

4. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material,

and support.

B. Flow Instrument Checkout:

1. Verify that sensors are installed correctly with respect to flow direction.

2. Verify that sensor attachment is properly secured and sealed.

3. Verify that processing tubing attachment is secure and isolation valves have been

provided.

4. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal.

5. Verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have been maintained.


A. Description:

1. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with

calibration documentation.

2. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating

each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

3. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and

accuracy.

4. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall meet instrument manufacturer's

recommendations.

5. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment.

6. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall

have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an

installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with

an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

7. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by

manufacturer.

8. If after-calibration-indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.

9. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE

Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific

requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated.

B. Analog Signals:


percent.









C. Digital Signals:


2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact.

D. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

E. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

F. Transmitters:



precision-resistance source.



12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include

semiannual preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,

cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be

manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain instrumentation and

control devices.

B. Coordinate video with operation and maintenance manuals and classroom instruction for use by

Owner in operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting.

C. Record videos on DVD disks.

D. Owner shall have right to make additional copies of video for internal use without paying

royalties.






GAS INSTRUMENTS 230923.16 - 1

SECTION 230923.16 - GAS INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes the Following Gas Instruments:

1. Carbon-dioxide sensors and transmitters.

2. Multipoint carbon-monoxide monitoring system.




cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NDIR: Nondispersive infrared.








2. Installation instructions, including factor affecting performance.

3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, product


B. Shop Drawings:









ends.

C. Samples: For each exposed product installed in finished space.



scale, on which wall-mounted instruments located in finished space are shown and coordinated

with each other, showing relationship to light switches, fire alarm devices, and other installed

devices using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gas instruments to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARBON-DIOXIDE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS

A. Description:

1. NDIR technology or equivalent technology providing long-term stability and reliability.

2. Two-wire, 4-20 mA output signal, linearized to carbon-dioxide concentration in ppm.

B. Construction:

1. House electronics in an ABS plastic enclosure. Provide equivalent of NEMA 250, Type 1

enclosure for wall-mounted space applications and NEMA 250, Type 4 for duct-mounted

applications.

2. Equip with digital display for continuous indication of carbon-dioxide concentration.

C. Performance:

1. Measurement Range: Zero to 2000 ppm.

2. Accuracy: Within 2 percent of reading, plus or minus 30 ppm.

3. Repeatability: Within 1 percent of full scale.

4. Temperature Dependence: Within 0.05 percent of full scale over an operating range of 25

to 110 deg F.

5. Long-Term Stability: Within 5 percent of full scale after more than five years.

6. Response Time: Within 60 seconds.






7. Warm-up Time: Within five minutes.

D. Provide calibration kit. Turn over to Owner at start of warranty period.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.



A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated.


C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements


when subjected to seismic loads.

D. Fastening Hardware:

1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods,

nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening nuts.

2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by using excessive

force or oversized wrenches.


E. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit calibration and maintenance



3.3 ELECTRICAL POWER













3.4 INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


1. Install transmitters for gas associated with individual air-handling units and associated

connected ductwork and piping near air-handlings units co-located in air-handling unit

system control panel, to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for


2. Install gas switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical equipment

rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated specifically on Drawings.



frames. Use manufacturer's mounting brackets to accommodate field mounting. Securely


4. Install instruments in dry gas and non-condensable vapor piped services above their

process connection point.

B. Mounting Height:




2. Mount switches and transmitters located in mechanical equipment rooms and other

similar space not subject to code, state, and federal accessibility requirements within a



C. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static-

pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated, using neoprene gaskets or grommets.

3.5 CARBON-MONOXIDE MONITORING SYSTEM

A. Install sample points in monitored area to provide accurate measurement of gas concentration.

B. Install exposed sampling points with a finished appearance consistent with other materials in

space. Submit proposed products to be installed for review and approval.






C. Individually install each sample point to the carbon-monoxide monitoring system.

D. Install tubing in a minimum size of NPS 3/8.

E. Use compression fittings at connections to equipment.

F. If not indicated on Drawings, locate carbon-monoxide monitoring system in a secured and

serviceable location accessible to authorized personnel.

G. Support carbon-monoxide monitoring system from floor or wall. Support floor-mounted

systems using a structural channel frame. Provide mounting brackets.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION





B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with instrument identification on face.


A. Check out installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.



depth, or other applicable considerations that impact performance.

D. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material, and

support.


A. Description:





3. For each analog instrument, perform a three-point calibration test for both linearity and

accuracy.

4. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall comply with instrument

manufacturer's written recommendations.








have an accuracy of at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example,

an installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument

with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.


manufacturer.

8. If, after calibration, indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.

9. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures in ASHRAE Guideline 11, "Field

Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to

supplement requirements indicated.

B. Analog Signals:


percent.




C. Digital Signals:



D. Meters: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

E. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values.

F. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.

G. Transmitters:















3.10 DEMONSTRATION


control devices.

B. Coordinate gas instrument demonstration video with operation and maintenance manuals and

classroom instruction for use by Owner in operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting.



royalties.






MOISTURE INSTRUMENTS 230923.19 - 1

SECTION 230923.19 - MOISTURE INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes moisture switches, sensors, and transmitters.




cable.










B. Shop Drawings:



connection.


3. Include number-coded identification system for unique identification of wiring, cable,

and tubing ends.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include in operation and maintenance manuals.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOISTURE SWITCHES

2.2 MOISTURE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS

A. Sensor and Transmitter without Display:

1. Performance:

a. Accuracy including non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability: Within 2 percent

from zero to 90 percent relative humidity and within 3 percent from 90 to 95

percent relative humidity when operating at 68 deg F.

b. Relative Humidity Range:

1) Duct: Zero to 100 percent.

2) Space: Zero to 95 percent relative.

c. Factory calibrated and NIST traceable with certificate included.

2. Construction for Space Applications:

a. Housing with integral sensor.

b. Housing shall be ABS plastic or powder-coated aluminum.

c. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

d. Provide housing with a wall-mounting plate.

3. Construction for Duct and Equipment Applications:

a. Housing with integral sensor.

b. Duct Sensor Body: 300 series stainless steel.

c. Provide sensor with sintered stainless-steel filter for duct applications.

d. Housing shall be cast aluminum.

e. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

4. Output Signal: Two-wire, 4- to 20-mA output signal with drive capacity of at least 500

ohms at 24-V dc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION








B. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of




3.2 MOISTURE INSTRUMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Sensor and transmitter without display.


A. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction.

B. Properly support instruments, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated. Brace

all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment when subjected to a

force.

C. Fastening Hardware:






D. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit calibration and maintenance



E. Corrosive Environments:

1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they are subjected.

2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments.





from manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure constructed

of Type 316L stainless steel.

3.4 ELECTRIC POWER













3.5 MOISTURE INSTRUMENTS INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Location: Rough-in instrument-mounting locations before setting instruments and

routing, cable, wiring, tubing, and conduit to final location.

B. Mounting Height:





similar space not subject to code, state, and Federal accessibility requirements within a



3.6 IDENTIFICATION






A. Check installed products before continuity tests and calibration.



depth, or other applicable considerations that impact performance.


A. Description:











accuracy.









manufacturer.

8. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.




B. Analog Signals:


percent.



span using a precision-resistance source.

C. Digital Signals:





F. Transmitters:













lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be


3.10 DEMONSTRATION


control devices.

B. Coordinate video with operation and maintenance manuals and classroom instruction for use by




royalties.






POSITION INSTRUMENTS 230923.22 - 1

SECTION 230923.22 - POSITION INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes position limit switches for use in direct-digital control systems for HVAC.




cable.



1. Include operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories

indicating default control signal with loss of power and electrical power requirements.

2. Include product description with complete technical data and product specification

sheets.

B. Shop Drawings:



connection.


3. Include number-coded identification system for unique identification of wiring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POSITION LIMIT SWITCHES

A. Description: Select type of actuating head (plunger, roller lever, or rod) to suit application.






1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for


B. Performance:

1. Life expectancy: Not less than 30 million mechanical operations and 750,000 electrical

operations.

2. Operating Frequency: 300 mechanical operations per minute and 30 electrical operations

per minute.

3. Voltage: 125-, 250-, 480-, and 600-V ac or 8-, 12-, 14-, 24-, 30-, 48-, 125-, and 250-V dc,

as required by application.

4. Current Rating: As required by application.

5. Temperature Rise: 50 deg C.

6. Ambient Temperature: 14 to 175 deg F.

7. Ambient Relative Humidity: 35 to 95 percent.

C. Construction:

1. NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure.

2. Switch Type: SPDT or DPDT, as required by application.

3. Status indicator integral to switch. Field switchable to light when contacts are actuated

and operating, or contacts are free and not operating.

4. Electrical Connection: Screw or plug-in terminals.

5. Conduit Connection: NPS 1/2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of






B. Properly support instruments, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated. Brace

all products to prevent lateral movement, sway, or a break in attachment when subjected to a

force.









2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not to overstress threads by using

excessive force or oversized wrenches.


D. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit maintenance from floor,

equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm

unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition.



2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments, including, but not

limited to:

















3.4 POSITION INSTRUMENTS INSTALLATION


1. Rough-in instrument-mounting locations before setting instruments and routing, cable,

wiring, and conduit to final location.






2. Use manufacturer mounting brackets to accommodate field mounting. Securely support

and brace products to prevent vibration and movement.

B. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static-

pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated, using neoprene gaskets or grommets.


A. Digital Signals:



B. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated.






PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS 230923.23 - 1

SECTION 230923.23 - PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Air-pressure sensors.

2. Air-pressure switches.

3. Air-pressure transmitters.

4. Liquid-pressure switches.

5. Liquid-pressure transmitters.




cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HART: Highway addressable remote transducer protocol is the global standard for sending and

receiving digital information across analog wires between smart devices and control or

monitoring systems through bi-directional communication that provides data access between

intelligent field instruments and host systems. A host can be any software application from

technician's hand-held device or laptop to a control, asset management, safety, or other system

using any control platform.





2. Operating characteristics; electrical characteristics; and furnished accessories indicating













B. Shop Drawings:




connection.


ends.





1. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe, and equipment.

2. Wall-mounted instruments located in finished space, showing relationship to light

switches, fire alarm devices, and other installed devices.

3. Size and location of wall access panels for instruments installed behind walls.

4. Size and location of ceiling access panels for instruments installed in accessible ceilings.

B. Product Certificates: For each product requiring a certificate.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product requiring test performed by manufacturer and witnessed

by a qualified testing agency.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For instruments to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Environmental Conditions:

1. Instruments shall operate without performance degradation under the ambient

environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified and

encountered for installed location.

a. If instrument alone cannot comply with requirement, install instrument in a

protective enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting

performance. Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated and

cooled, filtered, and ventilated as required by instrument and application.




















2.2 AIR-PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Duct Insertion Static Pressure Sensor:

1. Insertion length shall be at 4 inches.

2. Sensor with four radial holes of 0.04-inch diameter.

3. Brass or stainless-steel construction.

4. Sensor with threaded end support, sealing washers and nuts.

5. Connection: NPS 1/4 compression fitting.






6. Suitable for flat oval, rectangular, and round duct configurations.

2.3 AIR-PRESSURE SWITCHES

A. Air-Pressure Differential Switch:

1. Diaphragm operated to actuate an SPDT snap switch.

a. Fan safety shutdown applications: Switch with manual reset.

2. Electrical Connections: Three-screw configuration, including one screw for common

operation and two screws for field-selectable normally open or closed operation.

3. Enclosure Conduit Connection: Knock out or threaded connection.

4. User Interface: Screw-type set-point adjustment located inside removable enclosure

cover.

5. High and Low Process Connections: Threaded, NPS 1/8.

6. Enclosure:

a. Dry Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor and Wet Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

c. Hazardous Environments: Explosion proof.

7. Operating Data:

a. Electrical Rating: 15 A at 120- to 480-V ac.

b. Pressure Limits:

1) Continuous: 45 inches wg.

2) Surge: 10 psig.

c. Temperature Limits: Minus 30 to 180 deg F.

d. Operating Range: Approximately 2 times set point.

e. Repeatability: Within 3 percent.

f. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and application.

2.4 AIR-PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

A. Air-Pressure Differential Transmitter:

1. Performance:

a. Range: Approximately 2 times set point.

b. Accuracy: Within 0.5 percent of the full-scale range.

c. Hysteresis: Within 0.10 percent of full scale.

d. Repeatability: Within 0.05 percent of full scale.

e. Stability: Within 1 percent of span per year.






f. Overpressure: 10 psig.

g. Temperature Limits: Zero to 150 deg F.

h. Compensate Temperature Limits: 40 to 150 deg F.

i. Thermal Effects: 0.033 percent of full scale per degree F.


2. Output Signals:

a. Analog Current Signal:

1) Two-wire, 4- to 20-mA dc current source.

2) Signal capable of operating into 800-ohm load.

b. Analog Voltage Signal:

1) Three wire, zero to 10 V.

2) Minimum Load Resistance: 1000 ohms.

3. Display: Four-digit digital display with minimum 0.4-inch-high numeric characters.

4. Operator Interface: Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.

5. Construction:

a. Plastic casing with removable plastic cover.

b. Threaded, NPS 1/4 swivel fittings for connection to copper tubing or NPS 3/16

barbed fittings for connection to polyethylene tubing. Fittings on bottom of

instrument case.

c. Screw terminal block for wire connections.

d. Vertical plane mounting.

e. NEMA 250, Type 4.

f. Provide mounting bracket suitable for installation.

2.5 LIQUID-PRESSURE SWITCHES

A. Liquid Gage Pressure Switch, Diaphragm Operated, Low Pressure:

1. Description:

a. Diaphragm operated to actuate an SPDT snap switch.

b. Electrical Connections: Screw terminal.

c. Enclosure Conduit Connection: Knock out or threaded connection.

d. User Interface: External screw with visual set-point adjustment.

e. Process Connection: Threaded, NPS 1/4.

f. Enclosure:

1) Dry Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2) Outdoor and Wet Indoor Installations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

3) Hazardous Environments: Explosion proof.






2. Operating Data:

a. Electrical Rating: 15 A at 120-V ac.

b. Pressure Limits:

1) Range 1 to 30 psig: 60 psig.

2) Range 10 to 125 psig: 160 psig.

c. Temperature Limits: Minus 30 to 150 deg F.

d. Operating Range: 1 to 30 psig.

e. Deadband: Fixed.

3. Pressure Chamber Material: Steel or Stainless steel.

4. Diaphragm Material: Nylon or PTFE.

2.6 LIQUID-PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

A. Liquid Gage Pressure Transmitter with Adjustable Span:

1. Hazardous Classification: FM Approved for hazardous environments.

a. Intrinsically safe for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups A through H.

b. Explosion proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D.

c. Dust ignition proof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G.

d. Dust ignition proof for Class III, Division 1.

2. Performance:

a. Range: Minus 300 to 300 psig.

b. Span: Field adjustable.

c. Minimum Span: 3 psig.

d. Reference Accuracy: Within 0.07 percent of span or better.

e. Stability: Within 0.125 percent of upper range limit for 5 years.

f. Overpressure Limits: 3626 psig.

g. Process Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to 250 deg F.

h. Ambient Temperature Limits: Minus 40 to 185 deg F.

i. Temperature Effect: Within 0.025 percent of upper range limit plus 0.125 percent

of span.


3. Analog Output Current Signal:

a. Two-wire, 4- to 20-mA dc current source.

b. Signal capable of operating into 1000-ohm load.

c. Digital signal based on HART protocol carried with current signal.

d. Dampening: Field selectable from zero to 30 seconds.

4. Operator Interface: Zero and span adjustments located behind cover.






5. Display: Digital, five-digit, two-line display with 0.4-inch-high alphanumeric characters.

6. Construction:

a. Non-wetted parts of transmitter constructed of aluminum or stainless steel.

b. Enclosure with removable cover on each side.

c. Wetted parts of transmitter constructed of Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Threaded, NPS 1/2 process connection on bottom of instrument.

e. Drain/vent valve on process connection.

f. Two 1/2-inch trade size conduit connections on side of instrument enclosure.

g. Screw terminal block for wire connections.

h. NEMA 250, Type 4X.

i. Mounting Bracket: Appropriate for installation.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled pressure instruments, as indicated by instrument

requirements. Affix standards organization's certification and label.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION









3.2 PRESSURE INSTRUMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Duct-Mounted Static Pressure Sensors:

1. System: Duct insertion static pressure sensor.

B. Air-Pressure Differential Switches:






1. System: Air-pressure differential switch.

C. Air-Pressure Differential Transmitters:

1. Duct, System:

D. Liquid Gage Pressure Switches:

1. System: Liquid gage pressure switch, diaphragm operated, low pressure.

E. Liquid-Pressure Differential Switches:

1. System: Liquid-pressure differential switch.

F. Liquid-Pressure Differential Transmitters:

1. System: Liquid-pressure differential transmitter.



B. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements

indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement, sway, or a break in attachment when

subjected to a force.

C. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, wall openings, and sleeves required by installation. Before



condition.

D. Fastening Hardware:



2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not to overstress threads by using

excessive force or oversized wrenches.


E. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit calibration and maintenance



F. Corrosive Environments:






















3.5 PRESSURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION


1. Rough-in: Outline instrument-mounting locations before setting instruments and routing,


2. Install switches and transmitters for air and liquid pressure associated with individual air-

handling units and associated connected ductwork and piping near air-handlings units co-

located in air-handling unit system control panel, to provide service personnel a single

and convenient location for inspection and service.

3. Install liquid and steam pressure switches and transmitters for indoor applications in



4. Install air-pressure switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical

equipment rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated specifically on

Drawings.



frames. Use manufacturer mounting brackets to accommodate field mounting. Securely


6. Install instruments (except pressure gages) in steam, liquid, and liquid-sealed piped

services below their process connection point.

7. Install instruments in dry gas and noncondensable vapor piped services above their

process connection point.

B. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static







C. Duct Pressure Sensors:

1. Install sensors using manufacturer's recommended upstream and downstream distances.

2. Unless indicated on Drawings, locate sensors approximately 75 percent of distance of

longest hydraulic run. Location of sensors shall be submitted and approved before

installation.

3. Install mounting hardware and gaskets to make sensor installation airtight.

4. Route tubing from the sensor to transmitter.

5. Use compression fittings at terminations.

6. Install sensor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

7. Support sensor to withstand maximum air velocity, turbulence, and vibration encountered

to prevent instrument failure.

D. Air-Pressure Differential Switches:

1. Install air-pressure sensor in system for each switch connection. Install sensor in an

accessible location for inspection and replacement.

2. A single sensor may be used to share a common signal to multiple pressure instruments.

3. Install access door in duct and equipment to access sensors that cannot be inspected and

replaced from outside.

4. Route NPS 3/8 tubing from sensor to switch connection.

5. Do not mount switches on rotating equipment.

6. Install switches in a location free from vibration, heat, moisture, or adverse effects, which

could damage the switch and hinder accurate operation.

7. Install switches in an easily accessible location serviceable from floor.

8. Install switches adjacent to system control panel if within 50 feet; otherwise, locate

switch in vicinity of system connection.

E. Liquid-Pressure Differential Switches:

1. Where process connections are located in mechanical equipment room, install switch in

convenient and accessible location near system control panel.

2. Where process connections are installed outside mechanical rooms, route processing

tubing to mechanical room housing system control panel and locate switch near system

control panel.

3. Where multiple switches serving same system are installed in same room, install switches

by system to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for inspection

and service.

4. System process tubing connection shall be full size of switch connection, but not less

than NPS 3/4. Install bushing if required to mate switch to system connection.

5. Connect process tubing from point of system connection and extend to switch.

6. Install isolation valves in process tubing as close to system connection as practical.

7. Install dirt leg and drain valve at each switch connection.

8. Do not mount switches on rotating equipment.

9. Install switches in a location free from vibration, heat, moisture, or adverse effects, which

could damage the switch and hinder accurate operation.

10. Install switches in an easily accessible location serviceable from floor.

F. Liquid-Pressure Transmitters:






1. Where process connections are installed in mechanical equipment room, install

transmitter in convenient and accessible location near system control panel.

2. Where process connections are installed outside mechanical rooms, route processing

tubing to mechanical room housing system control panel and locate transmitter near

system control panel.

3. Where multiple transmitters serving same system are installed in same room, install

transmitters by system to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for


4. System process tubing connection shall be full size of switch connection, but not less

than NPS 3/4. Install bushing if required to mate switch to system connection.

5. Connect process tubing from point of system connection and extend to transmitter.

6. Install isolation valves in process tubing as close to system connection as practical.

7. Install dirt leg and drain valve at each transmitter connection.

8. Do not mount transmitters on equipment.

9. Install in a location free from vibration, heat, moisture, or adverse effects, which could

damage and hinder accurate operation.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION






A. Check out installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.


C. Check instruments for proper installation with respect to direction of flow, elevation,

orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that impact performance.


A. Description:





3. For each analog instrument, perform a three-point calibration test for both linearity and

accuracy.


manufacturer's recommendations.












manufacturer.

8. If, after calibration, indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out-of-tolerance

instruments.




B. Analog Signals:


percent.


C. Digital Signals:



D. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of project design values.


F. Transmitters:

1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of project design values.

3.9 ADJUSTING






12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of systems and equipment Installer. Include









3.11 DEMONSTRATION


control devices.

B. Coordinate pressure instrument demonstration video with operation and maintenance manuals

and classroom instruction for use by Owner in operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting.



royalties.






TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS 230923.27 - 1

SECTION 230923.27 - TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Air temperature sensors.

2. Air temperature switches.

3. Liquid and steam temperature sensors.

4. Liquid temperature switches.




cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) Protocol: The global standard for sending

and receiving digital information across analog wires between smart devices and control or

monitoring systems through bidirectional communication that provides data access between

intelligent field instruments and host systems. A host can be any software application from a

technician's hand-held device or laptop to a plant's process control, asset management, safety, or

other system using any control platform.

B. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

















4. Installation operation and maintenance instructions, including factors affecting

performance.

B. Shop Drawings:




connection.



and tubing ends.

C. Samples: For each exposed product installed in finished space.





1. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe, and equipment.

2. Wall-mounted instruments located in finished space showing relationship to light

switches, fire-alarm devices, and other installed devices.

3. Sizes and locations of wall access panels for instruments installed behind walls.

4. Sizes and locations of ceiling access panels for instruments installed in inaccessible

ceilings.

B. Product Certificates: For each product requiring a certificate.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a











PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Environmental Conditions:

1. Instruments shall operate without performance degradation under the ambient

environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified and

encountered for installed location.

a. If instrument alone cannot meet requirement, install instrument in a protective

enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance.

Enclosure shall be internally insulated, electrically heated and cooled, filtered, and

ventilated as required by instrument and application.




















2.2 AIR TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. Platinum RTDs: Common Requirements:

1. 100 or 1000 ohms at zero deg C and a temperature coefficient of 0.00385

ohm/ohm/deg C.

2. Two-wire, PTFE-insulated, 22-gage stranded copper leads.

3. Performance Characteristics:






a. Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F.

b. Interchangeable Accuracy: At 32 deg F within 0.5 deg F.

c. Repeatability: Within 0.5 deg F.

d. Self-Heating: Negligible.

4. Transmitter Requirements:

a. Transmitter required for each 100-ohm RTD.

b. Transmitter optional for 1000-ohm RTD, contingent on compliance with end-to-

end control accuracy.

B. Platinum RTD, Single-Point Air Temperature Duct Sensors:

1. 1000 ohms.

2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F

3. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.

4. Length: As required by application to achieve tip at midpoint of air tunnel, up to 18

inches.

5. Enclosure: Junction box with removable cover; NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor

applications and Type 4 for outdoor applications.

6. Gasket for attachment to duct or equipment to seal penetration airtight.

7. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch

C. Platinum RTD Outdoor Air Temperature Sensors:

1. 1000 ohms.


3. Probe: Single-point sensor with a stainless-steel sheath.

4. Solar Shield: Stainless steel.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4 or 4X junction box or combination conduit and outlet box

with removable cover and gasket.

6. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Platinum RTD Space Air Temperature Sensors:

1. 1000 ohms.


3. Sensor assembly shall include a temperature sensing element mounted under a flush,

brushed-aluminum cover.

4. Provide a mounting plate that is compatible with the surface shape that it is mounted to

and electrical box used.

5. Concealed wiring connection.

E. Space Air Temperature Sensors for Use with DDC Controllers Controlling Terminal Units:

1. 1000-ohm platinum RTD.

2. Temperature Transmitter Requirements:






a. Mating transmitter required with each 100-ohm RTD.

b. Mating transmitters optional for 1000-ohm RTD and thermistor, contingent on

compliance with end-to-end control accuracy.

3. Provide digital display of sensed temperature.

4. Provide sensor with local control.

a. Local override to turn HVAC on.

b. Local adjustment of temperature set point.

c. Both features shall be capable of manual override through control system operator.

2.3 AIR TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

A. Thermostat and Switch for Low Temperature Control in Duct Applications:

1. Description:

a. Two-position control.

b. Field-adjustable set point.

c. Manual reset.

d. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and


2. Performance:

a. Operating Temperature Range: 15 to 55 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F, non-adjustable and additive.

c. Enclosure Ambient Temperature: Minus 20 to 140 deg F.

d. Sensing Element Maximum Temperature: 250 deg F.

e. Voltage: 120-V ac.

f. Current: 16 FLA.

g. Switch Type: Two SPDT snap switches operate on coldest 12-inchsection along

element length.

3. Construction:

a. Vapor-Filled Sensing Element: Nominal 20 feetlong.

b. Dual Temperature Scale: Fahrenheit and Celsius visible on face.

c. Set-Point Adjustment: Screw.

d. Enclosure: Painted metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

e. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

f. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

B. Thermostat and Switch for High Temperature Control in Duct Applications:

1. Source Limitations: Obtain temperature-measuring sensors and transmitters and airflow

from single manufacturer.

2. Description:








c. Manual reset.



3. Performance:

a. Temperature Range: 100 to 160 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F.

c. Ambient Temperature: Zero to 260 deg F.

d. Voltage: 120-V ac.

e. Current: 16 FLA.

f. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

4. Construction:

a. Sensing Element: Helical bimetal.

b. Enclosure: Metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

c. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

d. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size.

2.4 LIQUID AND STEAM TEMPERATURE SENSORS, COMMERCIAL GRADE

A. Thermowells:

1. Stem: Straight or stepped shank formed from solid bar stock.

2. Material: Brass.

3. Process Connection: Threaded, NPS 3/4.

4. Sensor Connection: Threaded, NPS 1/2.

5. Bore: Sized to accommodate sensor with tight tolerance between sensor and well.

6. Furnish thermowells installed in insulated pipes and equipment with an extended neck.

7. Length: 4, 6, or 8 inches as required by application.

8. Thermowells furnished with heat-transfer compound to eliminate air gap between wall of

sensor and thermowell and to reduce time constant.

2.5 LIQUID TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

A. Thermostat and Switch for Temperature Control in Pipe Applications:

1. Description:



c. Manual reset.








2. Performance:

a. Operating Temperature Range: 65 to 200 deg F.

b. Temperature Differential Deadband: 5 to 30 deg F, adjustable.

c. Enclosure Ambient Temperature: 150 deg F.

d. Sensing Element Pressure Rating: 200 psig.

e. Voltage: 120-V ac.

f. Current: 8 FLA.

g. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch.

3. Construction:

a. Vapor-Filled Immersion Element: Copper, nominal 3 inches long.

b. Temperature Scale: Fahrenheit, visible on face.

c. Set-Point Adjustment: Screw.

d. Enclosure: Painted metal, NEMA 250, Type 1.

e. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals.

f. Conduit Connection: 3/4-inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION









3.2 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Air Temperature Sensors:

1. Duct: 100-ohm platinum RTD.

2. Outdoor: 100-ohm platinum RTD.

3. Space: 100-ohm platinum RTD.

B. Air Temperature Transmitters:






1. Duct: Air temperature RTD transmitter.

2. Outdoor: Air temperature RTD transmitter.

3. Space: Air temperature RTD transmitter.

C. Liquid and Steam Temperature Sensors:

1. System: Liquid and steam temperature sensor, commercial grade.

D. Liquid and Temperature Transmitters:

1. System: Liquid and steam temperature transmitter, commercial grade.



B. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements


when subjected to a force.







D. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit calibration and maintenance












3.4 ELECTRIC POWER













3.5 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATIONS


1. Roughing In:

a. Outline instrument mounting locations before setting instruments and routing


b. Provide independent inspection to confirm that proposed mounting locations

comply with requirements indicated and approved submittals.

1) Indicate dimensioned locations with mounting height for all surface-

mounted products on Shop Drawings.

2) Do not begin installation without submittal approval of mounting location.

c. Complete installation rough-in only after confirmation by independent inspection

is complete and approval of location is documented for review by Owner and

Architect on request.

2. Install switches and transmitters for air and liquid temperature associated with individual

air-handling units and associated connected ductwork and piping near air-handling units

co-located in air-handling unit system control panel to provide service personnel a single

and convenient location for inspection and service.

3. Install liquid and steam temperature switches and transmitters for indoor applications in



4. Install air temperature switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical

equipment rooms. Do not locate in user-occupied space unless indicated specifically on

Drawings.

5. Mount switches and transmitters on walls, floor-supported freestanding pipe stands, or

floor-supported structural support frames. Use manufacturer's mounting brackets to

accommodate field mounting. Securely support and brace products to prevent vibration

and movement.

B. Special Mounting Requirements:

1. Protect products installed outdoors from solar radiation, building and wind effect with

stand-offs and shields constructed of Type 316 stainless.






2. Temperature instruments having performance impacted by temperature of mounting

substrate shall be isolated with an insulating barrier located between instrument and

substrate to eliminate effect. Where instruments requiring insulation are located in

finished space, conceal insulating barrier in a cover matching the instrument cover.

C. Mounting Height:

1. Mount temperature instruments in user-occupied space to match mounting height of light

switches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Mounting height shall comply with

codes and accessibility requirements.


similar space not subject to code or state and Federal accessibility requirements within a



D. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air-moving equipment to comply with duct static-


E. Space Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Conceal assembly in an electrical box of sufficient size to house sensor and transmitter, if

provided.

2. Install electrical box with a faceplate to match sensor cover if sensor cover does not

completely cover electrical box.

3. In finished areas, recess electrical box within wall.

4. In unfinished areas, electrical box may be surface mounted if electrical light switches are

surface mounted. Use a cast-aluminum electric box for surface-mounted installations.

5. Align electrical box with other electrical devices such as visual alarms and light switches

located in the vicinity to provide a neat and well-thought-out arrangement. Where

possible, align in both horizontal and vertical axis.

F. Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Mount sensor in a discrete location facing north.

2. Protect installed sensor from solar radiation and other influences that could impact

performance.

3. If required to have a transmitter, mount transmitter remote from sensor in an accessible

and serviceable location indoors.

G. Single-Point Duct Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Install single-point-type, duct-mounted, supply- and return-air temperature sensors.

Install sensors in ducts with sensitive portion of the element installed in center of duct

cross section and located to sense near average temperature. Do not exceed 24 inches in

sensor length.

2. Install return-air sensor in location that senses return-air temperature without influence

from outdoor or mixed air.

3. Rigidly support sensor to duct and seal penetration airtight.






4. If required to have transmitter, mount transmitter remote from sensor at accessible and

serviceable location.

H. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Install averaging-type air temperature sensor for temperature sensors located within air-

handling units, similar equipment, and large ducts with air tunnel cross-sectional area of

20 sq. ft. and larger.

2. Install sensor length to maintain coverage over entire cross-sectional area. Install multiple

sensors where required to maintain the minimum coverage.

3. Fasten and support sensor with manufacturer-furnished clips to keep sensor taut

throughout entire length.

4. If required to have transmitter, mount transmitter in an accessible and serviceable

location.

I. Low-Limit Air Temperature Switch Installation:

1. Install multiple low-limit switches to maintain coverage over entire cross-sectional area

of air tunnel.

2. Fasten and support sensing element with manufacturer-furnished clips to keep element

taut throughout entire length.

3. Mount switches outside of airstream at a location and mounting height to provide easy

access for switch set-point adjustment and manual reset.

4. Install on entering side of cooling coil unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

J. Liquid Temperature Sensor Installation:

1. Assembly shall include sensor, thermowell and connection head.

2. For pipe NPS 4 and larger, install sensor and thermowell length to extend into pipe

between 50 to 75 percent of pipe cross section.

3. For pipe smaller than NPS 4:

a. Install reducers to increase pipe size to NPS 4at point of thermowell installation.

b. For pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3, thermowell and sensor may be installed at

pipe elbow or tee to achieve manufacturer-recommended immersion depth in lieu

of increasing pipe size.

c. Minimum insertion depth shall be 2-1/2 inches.

4. Install matching thermowell.

5. Fill thermowell with heat-transfer fluid before inserting sensor.

6. Tip of spring-loaded sensors shall contact inside of thermowell.

7. For insulated piping, install thermowells with extension neck to extend beyond face of

insulation.

8. Install thermowell in top dead center of horizontal pipe positioned in an accessible

location to allow for inspection and replacement. If top dead center location is not

possible due to field constraints, install thermowell at location along top half of pipe.

9. For applications with transmitters, mount transmitter remote from sensor in an accessible

and serviceable location from floor service platform or catwalk.






3.6 IDENTIFICATION





B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with instrument identification and on face of ceiling

directly below instruments concealed above ceilings.

3.7 CLEANING





3.8 CHECK-OUT PROCEDURES

A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration.

B. Check temperature instruments for proper location and accessibility.

C. Verify sensing element type and proper material.

D. Verify location and length.

E. Verify that wiring is correct and secure.


A. Description:






accuracy.














manufacturer.


instruments.



requirements and to supplement requirements indicated.

B. Analog Signals:


percent.




C. Digital Signals:





F. Transmitters:







inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Perform according to manufacturer's written instruction.


equipment.







3.11 ADJUSTING








cleaning and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be


3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain temperature instruments.

B. Provide a complete set of instructional videos covering each product specified and installed and

showing the following:

1. Software programming.

2. Calibration and test procedures.

3. Operation and maintenance requirements and procedures.

4. Troubleshooting procedures.

C. Coordinate video with operation and maintenance manuals and classroom instruction for use by


D. Record videos on DVD disks.

E. Owner shall have right to make additional copies of video for internal use without paying

royalties.






WEATHER STATIONS 230923.43 - 1

SECTION 230923.43 - WEATHER STATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes weather stations connected to direct-digital controls for HVAC.




cable.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. I/O: Input/output.

B. RS-232: A TIA standard for asynchronous serial data communications between terminal

devices.

C. RS-485: A TIA standard for multipoint communications using two twisted pairs.






control signal over range, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient

operating environment including temperature and humidity.



4. Installation operation and maintenance instructions including factors affecting

performance.

B. Shop Drawings:









connection.



and tubing ends.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For weather stations to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WEATHER STATION

A. Description:

1. Weather station shall measure and record wind speed and direction, air temperature and

relative humidity, barometric pressure, solar radiation, and rain.

2. Design weather station for applications with minimal visual impact, high reliability, and a

long interval between routine servicing.

3. Weather station shall use solid-state sensors with no moving parts.

4. Weather station shall not be impaired by heavy snowfall or freezing conditions that

produce rime ice. Provide a thermostatically controlled heater element in the sensor head

that keeps the wind sensor elements and the precipitation sensor surface free of snow and

ice to minus 62 deg F.

5. Weather station shall directly connect to host device, or wirelessly connect to a host

device through a fully integrated, industrial-grade, 916-MHz spread spectrum radio-

frequency communications technology. Where required by application, replace 916-MHz

radio-frequency components with 922-MHz and 2.4-GHz radio-frequency components to

comply with local, regional, and national radio-frequency licensing requirements.

6. RS-232 serial data I/O shall be located on the bottom of the weather station and used as a

second serial communications port, for programming and testing the system, or for direct

data downloads using a personal computer or personal digital assistant.

7. Weather station shall be provided with a mounting system supplied by weather station

manufacturer that is suitable for the installation.

B. Sensor Technology:






1. Wind speed and direction shall use acoustic techniques. Sensor shall consist of three

equally spaced ultrasonic transducers in a horizontal plane. Values of any two array paths

shall enable computation of both wind speed and direction, and a signal processing

technique shall enable the measurement to be calculated using the two array paths of the

best quality.

2. Rain shall be measured using a stainless-steel piezometric impact surface that counts the

raindrops and measures their acoustic signature, integrating that information to provide a

near-real-time value for rainfall amount and rate.

3. Barometric pressure, relative humidity, air temperature, and solar radiation measurements

shall be made by scientific grade sensors.

4. Air-temperature and relative-humidity sensors shall be combined in an integrated, user-

replaceable unit that requires no calibration.

a. Relative humidity sensor shall be a thin-polymer, capacitive sensor.

b. Air-temperature sensor shall be a capacitive ceramic sensor.

5. Barometric pressure shall be measured with a capacitive silicon, temperature-corrected,

strain gage.

6. Solar radiation shall be measured by a silicon pyranometer with a cut filter limiting the

spectral exposure to the 300- to 1100-nm wavelength.

C. Performance:

1. Air Temperature:

a. Range: Minus 60 to 140 deg F.

b. Accuracy: Within 0.9 deg F.

c. Resolution: 0.1 deg F.

2. Relative Humidity:

a. Range: Zero to 100 percent.

b. Accuracy: Within 3 percent over the range of zero to 90 percent and within 5

percent between 90 to 100 percent.

c. Resolution: 0.1 percent.

3. Barometric Pressure:

a. Range: 17.72- to 32.48-in. Hg.

b. Accuracy: 0.015-in. Hg between 32 to 86 deg F.

c. Resolution: 0.03-in. Hg between minus 60 to 140 deg F.

4. Solar Radiation:

a. Spectral Range: 300 to 1100 nm.

b. Reproducibility: Within 2 percent.

c. Output: 0.2 mV per watts per square meters.

d. Range: Zero to 1000 W per square meters.

e. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 130 deg F.






5. Rain:

a. Collecting Area: 9.3 sq. in.

b. Range: Zero to 7.87 inches per hour.

c. Accuracy: Within 5 percent.

d. Resolution: 0.001 inch.

6. Wind Direction:

a. Azimuth: Zero to 360 degrees.

b. Response Time: 250 ms.

c. Accuracy: Within 2 degrees.

d. Resolution: 1 degree.

7. Wind Speed:

a. Range: Zero to 134 mph.

b. Response Time: 0.25 second.

c. Accuracy: Greater of 0.67 mph or 2 percent.

d. Resolution: 0.22 mph.

8. Data Storage: 60 days of hourly data.

D. Output Signals:

1. RS-232 or RS-485 serial interface directly from weather station to host.

2. In applications that cannot accept a serial signal, provide a serial-to-analog converter.

3. Serial-to-Analog Converter:

a. Serial converter designed to add analog outputs for measuring instruments that

have only serial output.

b. Configure to give analog outputs from all measuring sensors and calculated

parameters.

c. Each converter shall have four analog outputs with a 4- to 20-mA signal.

d. Provide multiple converters for applications requiring more points.

e. Converter requires a 24-V dc power supply.

E. Communication Interface:

1. Weatherproof serial cables shall be used to connect the RS-232 I/O on the weather

station. Cables shall use nickel-plated brass DB-9 connectors for corrosion resistance and

include a Sanoprene jacket suitable for both high-ultraviolet and direct-burial

environments.

2. An RF4xx spread spectrum radio-frequency transceiver shall be provided with every

wireless weather station.

F. Unit shall be provided with a 120-V ac, 60-Hz power supply, a serial cable, and an antenna.

G. Software:






1. Data Transfer Protocols, Software, and Data Interface Hardware: Weather stations that

communicate using a proprietary protocol shall be provided with a software development

kit to enable a qualified software developer in development of software drivers for third-

party devices or software.

2. Manufacturer shall submit description and pricing information of software application

offerings for weather station management, data acquisition and logging, report

generation, and data display for review and consideration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Properly support weather station, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated.

Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway or a break in attachment when

subjected to forces that are consistent with building code structural design requirements.







D. Corrosive Environments:






4. Where components are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive resistant








3.3 ELECTRIC POWER








3.4 IDENTIFICATION





B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with instrument identification.


A. Description:

1. Calibrate each weather station installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with


2. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment used for

calibrating. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment.

3. For each analog signal, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and

accuracy.




6. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed weather stations shall


installed weather station with a signal accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an

instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.

7. Calibrate each weather station according to instrument instruction manual supplied by

manufacturer.


instruments.



requirements and to supplement requirements indicated.






B. Analog Signals:


percent.




C. Digital Signals:








3.7 STARTUP SERVICE





quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,

lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be


3.9 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain weather stations.

B. Provide a complete set of instructional videos covering each product specified and installed and

showing the following:

1. Software programming.

2. Calibration and test procedures.

3. Operation and maintenance requirements and procedures.






4. Troubleshooting procedures.

C. Coordinate video with operation and maintenance manuals and classroom instruction for use by


D. Record videos on DVD disks.

E. Owner shall have right to make additional copies of video for internal use without paying

royalties.






HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings.

2. Steel pipe and fittings.

3. Dielectric fittings.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe and tube.

2. Fittings.

3. Joining materials.


B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment

guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and

attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.

3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior

walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.

4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated wall

and floor and ceiling assemblies.


A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items


B. Qualification Data: For Installer.






C. Welding certificates.


E. Preconstruction Test Reports:

1. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available

at Project site.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint

manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe

couplings and fittings.

2. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by

manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join fiberglass

piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and

installation.

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing on water quality.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. PP-R Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace PP-R pipe and fittings

that fail in materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Warranty is to cover labor and material costs of repairing and/or replacing defective

materials and repairing any incidental damage caused by failure of the piping system due

to defects in materials or manufacturing.






2. Warranty is to be in effect only upon submission by the Contractor to the manufacturer of

valid pressure/leak documentation indicating that the system was tested and passed the

manufacturer's pressure/leak test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 180 deg F.

2. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L.

B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Cast Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

H. Copper-Tube, Mechanically Formed Tee Fitting: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.

1. Description: Tee formed in copper tube in accordance with ASTM F2014.

I. Copper-Tube, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:



the following:

a. Elkhart Products Corporation.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Viega LLC.












2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and

wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping

Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping


D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping


E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised

ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Joint Fittings: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A47/A47M,

Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A53/A53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated

steel; or ASTM A106/A106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders

constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking

toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

2. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and EPDM or nitrile gasket of central

cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to

secure grooved pipe and fittings.

I. Plain-End Mechanical-Joint Couplings:

1. Housing: ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 segmented ductile iron or type 304 stainless steel.

2. Housing coating: None.

3. Gasket: EPDM.

4. Sealing Mechanism: Double-lip sealing system or carbon steel case-hardened jaws.

5. Bolts, hex nuts, washers, or lock bars based on manufacturer's design.

6. Minimum Pressure Rating: Equal to that of the joined pipes.






2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless


a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining

copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and pressure-seal joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.






C. Condensate-Drain Piping, Copper: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper

fittings, and soldered joints.

D. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic

piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

E. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining

methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-

plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING


systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.


and service areas.



otherwise.







J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.






K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing

of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple

with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with

the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to

the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to the following:

1. Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere

as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"

for identifying piping.

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.



B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B32.






D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut



1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.


damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll

grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe

wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

H. Plain-End Mechanical-Coupled Joints: Prepare, assemble, and test joints in accordance with

manufacturer's written installation instructions.

I. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tools and

procedure, and brazed joints.

J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tools and procedure. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

B. Install hangers for copper tubing and steel piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities


C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.






D. Support vertical runs of copper tubing and steel piping to comply with MSS-58, locally


3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment

connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are

installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gauges and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply

with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment

needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the following water

characteristics:

1. pH: 9.0 to 10.5.

2. "P" Alkalinity: 100 to 500 ppm.

3. Boron: 100 to 200 ppm.

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maximum of 100 ppm. Revise this value if closed system

contains glycol.

5. Corrosion Inhibitor:

a. Sodium Nitrate: 1000 to 1500 ppm.

b. Molybdate: 200 to 300 ppm.

c. Chromate: 200 to 300 ppm.

d. Sodium Nitrate Plus Molybdate: 100 to 200 ppm each.

e. Chromate Plus Molybdate: 50 to 100 ppm each.

6. Soluble Copper: Maximum of 0.20 ppm.

7. Tolyiriazole Copper and Yellow Metal Corrosion Inhibitor: Minimum of 10 ppm.

8. Total Suspended Solids: Maximum of 10 ppm.

9. Ammonia: Maximum of 20 ppm.

10. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maximum of 20 ppm.

11. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maximum of 1000 organisms/mL.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maximum of 100 organisms/mL.

c. Nitrate Reducers: 100 organisms/mL.

d. Sulfate Reducers: Maximum of zero organisms/mL.

e. Iron Bacteria: Maximum of zero organisms/mL.






B. Fill systems that have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: Minimum of 30 percent propylene glycol.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains

installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to

pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum

yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building

Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing

components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.






3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.






HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Air-control devices.

2. Strainers.

3. Connectors.


1. Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for ball valves common to most piping systems.

2. Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for check valves common to most piping systems.

3. Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation

requirements for gate valves common to most piping systems.

4. Section 230923.11 "Control Valves" for automatic control valve and sensor

specifications, installation requirements, and locations.


A. Product Data: For each type of product:

1. Include construction details and material descriptions for hydronic piping specialties.


accessories.

3. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-

orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hydronic piping specialties to include in emergency,








A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve,

include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.


A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX.

B. Safety Valves and Pressure Vessels: Shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and

stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.


c. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

2. Body: Bronze.

3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.

7. CWP Rating: 150 psig.

8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

B. Automatic Air Vents:


following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

c. WATTS.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.














3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

4. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.

5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.



C. Diaphragm-Type Non-ASME Expansion Tanks:


following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

c. WATTS.

2. Tank: Carbon steel, rated for minimum 100-psig working pressure at minimum 200 deg F

maximum operating temperature. Non-ASME construction.

3. Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to

maintain required expansion capacity.

D. In-Line Air Separators:


following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Armstrong Products, Inc.

c. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

2. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to

maximize air separation.

3. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.

4. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.

2.2 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:


following:


b. Metraflex Company (The).

c. WATTS.

2. Body: ASTM A126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.


















3. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

4. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket.


2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.



B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body.

2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.

3. Performance: Capable of misalignment.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shut-off-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection

to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

C. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

D. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to

the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

E. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.






3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required

for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.

Install manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2

percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and

larger.

E. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge

tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.

1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.

2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of

tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building

components and structural members.

F. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system and ensure that

tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.






HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - 1

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ECM: Electronically commutated motor.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene monomer.

C. EPR: Ethylene propylene rubber.

D. FKM: Fluoroelastomer polymer.

E. HI: Hydraulic Institute.

F. NBR: Nitrile rubber or Buna-N.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump.

1. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product

indicated.

2. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and

other anchorages.







C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each pump.

1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details signed and sealed by a qualified

professional engineer.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and

for designing vibration isolation bases.

b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor

bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in

this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates for pumps, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.



2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and





1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation.

2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


following:

1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

2. Bell and Gossett.

3. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain pumps from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-

line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor

shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.

D. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gauge tappings at inlet and

outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded union-end connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,

and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match

specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft Sleeve: Bronze.

4. Pump Stub Shaft: Type 304 stainless steel.

5. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and EPDM rubber bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on

shaft between motor and seal.

6. Seal Flushing: Flush, cool, and lubricate pump seal by directing pump discharge water to

flow over the seal.

E. Shaft Coupling: Rigid, axially-split spacer coupling to allow service of pump seal without

disturbing pump or motor.

F. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."









1. Premium Efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.

2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

3. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

4. Variable-speed motor.

5. Provide integral pump motor variable-speed controller.

G. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 17.

2. Total Dynamic Head: 10.

3. Maximum Operating Pressure: 175 psig.

4. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

5. Inlet and Outlet Size: 1-1/2”.

6. Motor Speed: 2555.

7. Motor Horsepower: 1/12.

8. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 120 V.

b. Phase: Single Three.

c. Hertz: 60 Hz.

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast or ductile-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.

3. Valve with multi-turn stem and memory stop to allow valve to be returned to its original

position after shutoff.

4. Brass valve disc with EPDM rubber seat.

5. Type 304 stainless steel valve stem.

6. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

7. Brass gauge ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

2.4 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTOR (ECM)

A. Provide pumps so they are specified or scheduled with ECM.

1. Synchronous, constant torque, ECM with permanent magnet rotor. Rotor magnets to be

time-stable, nontoxic ceramic magnets (Sr-Fe).

2. Driven by a frequency converter with an integrated power factor correction filter.

Conventional induction motors will not be acceptable.

3. Each motor with an integrated variable-frequency drive, tested as one unit by

manufacturer.

4. Motor speed adjustable over full range from 0 rpm to maximum scheduled speed.






5. Variable motor speed to be controlled by a 0- to 10 V-dc or 4- to 20-mA input.

6. Integrated motor protection verified by UL to protect the pump against over-

/undervoltage, overtemperature of motor and/or electronics, overcurrent, locked rotor,

and dry run (no-load condition).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for


B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before

pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps will be installed.


3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,

couplings, and accessories.

B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and

weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring

hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529

"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Perform alignment service. When required by manufacturer to maintain warranty coverage,

engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform it.

C. Comply with requirements in HI standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims

to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base

frame.






D. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

E. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill

baseplate with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in

place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.


A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

E. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

1. Use startup strainer for initial system startup. Install permanent strainer element before

turnover of system to Owner.

F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between

pump casing and valves.

G. Install pressure gauges on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gauge tapping or

install single gauge with multiple-input selector valve.

H. Install check valve on each condensate pump unit discharge unless unit has a factory-installed

check valve.



and Cables."

B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance















B. Connect control wiring in accordance with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping. Use startup strainer for initial startup.

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains and prepare pump for

operation.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.





C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

D. Hydronic pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.







3.9 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.






REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings.

2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties.

3. Refrigerants.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and piping specialty.

1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

a. Thermostatic expansion valves.

b. Solenoid valves.

c. Hot-gas bypass valves.

d. Filter dryers.

e. Strainers.

f. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes;

flow capacities; valve arrangements and locations; slopes of horizontal runs; oil traps;

double risers; wall and floor penetrations; and equipment connection details.

2. Show piping size and piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and

pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation

difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper

operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

3. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.










A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.7 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.


A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.






D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-

long assembly.

4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.


G. Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings for Refrigerant Piping:

1. Standard: UL 207; certified by UL for field installation. Certification as a UL-recognized

component alone is unacceptable.

2. Housing: Copper.

3. O-Rings: HNBR or compatible with specific refrigerant.

4. Tools: Manufacturer's approved special tools.

5. Minimum Rated Pressure: 700 psig.

2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or

angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.

3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

4. Seat: Nylon.

5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


B. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.








C. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.

3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.



D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.


E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.

2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.



5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 115-V ac coil.



F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and

labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.

2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.





G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.






6. Superheat: Adjustable.

7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.


H. Straight-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.

3. End Connections: Socket or flare.



I. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen.

3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm).

4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.

5. End Connections: Socket or flare.



J. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).

5. End Connections: Socket.

6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



K. Receivers: Comply with AHRI 495.

1. Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an

NRTL.

2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.


4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.

5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.



L. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with AHRI 495.







2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.



2.4 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines NPS 3-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,

Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-

copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and

wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.

D. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and

wrought-copper fittings with [brazed] [or] [soldered] joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if

they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor

suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter

dryers.

E. Install a full-size, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install

solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.






2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do

not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or

at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an

integral assembly for the device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves.

2. Thermostatic expansion valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Compressor.

K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at compressors.



systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.








I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and

Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC" for solenoid valve controllers,

control wiring, and sequence of operation.

K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical

injury.

O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve

stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply

heat near expansion-valve bulb.

Q. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following

procedures:

1. Shot blast the interior of piping.

2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing

by means of a wire or electrician's tape.

3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.

Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.

4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube

or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.

5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.

6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be

open to allow unrestricted flow.

R. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.

S. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC







T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.



B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding,

to prevent scale formation.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and

Tube."

1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.

2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and to restore


1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal

threading is specified.


damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Steel pipe can be threaded, but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.







A. Comply with requirements for seismic restraints in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction

requirements, whichever are most stringent.

E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

F. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.



1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.






3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow

rates and pressures are established.






METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Sealants and gaskets.

5. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (State of California).


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

3. Seismic-restraint devices.

4. .

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.






3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts.

5. Dimensions of all duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.


1. Sheet metal thicknesses.

2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.

3. Reinforcement details and spacing.

4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items


B. Welding certificates.



A. Mockups:

1. Before installing duct systems, build mockups representing static-pressure classes in

excess of 3-inch wg. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

a. Five transverse joints.

b. One access door(s).

c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.

d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible-connector connections for each duct and

apparatus.

e. One 90-degree turn(s) with turning vanes.

f. One fire damper(s).

g. One smoke damper(s).






h. Perform leakage tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Revise mockup

construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum

acceptable results.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint

construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and

design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."

E. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -

"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

F. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are

inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."






1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with

Figure 2-1.

2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-

24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be

used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated

static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal

seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-

welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials






involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch-minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch-

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.

b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers."

D. Fiberglass-Free Duct Liner: Made from partially recycled cotton or polyester products and

containing no fiberglass. Airstream surface overlaid with fire-resistant facing to prevent surface

erosion by airstream, complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Treat natural-fiber products

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified

acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight

seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.






9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

10. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.


6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.


steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.

3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.

4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.

5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.

6. Water resistant.






Chambers."

10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.


steel, or aluminum sheets.

E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.










Chambers."

F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be

rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603.

D. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts

designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

coordination drawings.






B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.

D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.

J. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in

air ducts where indicated on Drawings.

K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials

both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied

Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction

Guidelines."

L. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes.

2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and

smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.

M. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.






C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,

and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct

Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B.

6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A.

7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C.

10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.






4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports

within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at maximum intervals of 16

feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"

and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report

for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct

sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each

designated pressure class.






b. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative

duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each


c. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative



d. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative



e. Outdoor-Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3- Inch wg or Higher: Test

representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct

area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers,

and other duct-mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or

blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage.

5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in

accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR,

"Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR.

C. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and leakage

class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and






cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and

liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner

to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated

or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan

operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning

materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.






3.9 STARTUP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC."

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as

indicated below.

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

2. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.


c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6

C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg.



d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6

D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 3-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure.



E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:






1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg.




2.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct




Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct



3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."






a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have

proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three

segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments

for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments

for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

G. Branch Configuration:


Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.






AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Duct silencers.

3. Turning vanes.

4. Duct-mounted access doors.

5. Duct access panel assemblies.




1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop, dynamic insertion loss, and self-generated noise

data. Include breakout noise calculations for high-transmission-loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories' fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Manual volume damper installations.

b. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which

ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:



the following:

a. McGill AirFlow LLC.

b. Nailor Industries Inc.

c. Ruskin Company.

2. Performance:

a. Leakage Rating Class III: Leakage not exceeding 40 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-inch wg

differential static pressure.

3. Construction:

a. Linkage out of airstream.

b. Suitable for horizontal or vertical airflow applications.

4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels.

b. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.










b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers mounted with vertical blades to have thrust bearing at each end of every

blade.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

a. Locking device to hold damper blades in a fixed position without vibration.

2.3 TURNING VANES



1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of galvanized sheet

steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct

mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded

fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into

vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in

Elbows."

E. Vane Construction:

1. Single wall.

2. Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.4 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS














2. McGill AirFlow LLC.

3. Ruskin Company.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figure 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and

Panels," and Figure 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. 24-gauge-thick galvanized steel or 0.032-inch thick aluminum door panel.

d. Vision panel.

e. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

f. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

a. 24-gauge-thick galvanized steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum frame.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.

2.5 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES



1. CL WARD & Family Inc.


3. Flame Gard, Inc.

B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 16-gauge carbon steel.

C. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

D. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96, grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for

minimum 2000 deg F.

E. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive or negative.













2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following:

1. CL WARD & Family Inc.

2. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, fabric materials, and accessory materials

shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

E. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

F. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick

aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

G. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

H. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in

compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan

discharge and duct.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of

30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at

start and stop.









2.7 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for

concealed ducts and standard, one-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

B. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories in accordance with applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 for

fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Where multiple damper sections are necessary to achieve required dimensions, provide

reinforcement to fully support damper assembly when fully closed at full system design static

pressure.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated and as needed for testing

and balancing.

G. Connect ducts to duct silencers rigidly.

H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.






2. Upstream from duct filters.

3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.

6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream

from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. Control devices requiring inspection.

8. Elsewhere as indicated.

I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

K. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. For fans developing static pressures of 5 inches wg and more, cover flexible connectors with

loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

N. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

O. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust

limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and

stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that size and location of access doors are

adequate to perform required operation.

3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation and verify that vanes do not move

or rattle.

4. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.











CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 1

SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Square in-line centrifugal fans.




profiles, and finishes for fans.

2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

4. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings:


2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for

designing vibration isolation bases.

5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with









A. Coordination Drawings: Fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent

structural and mechanical elements, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using

input from installers of the items involved.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: For fans, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.



2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in normal operation,

emergency operation, and maintenance manuals with replacement parts listing.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SQUARE IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS



1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

2. Loren Cook Company.

3. Rupp Air Management Systems.

B. Description: Square in-line centrifugal fans.

C. Housing:

1. Housing Material: See schedule.










2. Housing Coating: None.

3. Housing Construction: Side panels shall be easily removable for service. Include inlet

and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

D. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream factory wired to disconnect switch located on

outside of fan housing.

E. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosures

around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of

fan housing.

F. Fan Wheels: Aluminum airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

G. Motor Enclosure: Open, drip-proof.

H. Accessories:

1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50

percent.

3. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.

4. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

5. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard

for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.

6. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.

7. Side Discharge: Flange connector and attachment hardware to provide right-angle

discharge on side of unit.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."

B. Where variable-frequency drives are indicated or scheduled, provide fan motor compatible with

variable-frequency drive.



an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings

Seal.






C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311 and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings

Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested according to

AMCA 300.

D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified

Rating Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan

efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to

AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51.

E. Operating Limits: Classify fans according to AMCA 99.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to


C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Support duct-mounted and other hanging centrifugal fans directly from the building

structure, using suitable hanging systems as specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13

"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC


3.2 DUCTWORK AND PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times specified static

pressure, to nearest floor drain with pipe sizes matching the drain connection.






D. Install heat tracing on all drain piping subject to freezing temperature and as indicated on

Drawings. Furnish and install heat tracing according to Section 230533 "Heat Tracing for

HVAC Piping."



Cables."


Systems."

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to

NFPA 70 and NECA 1.







B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."








1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space.

4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.






5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

6. Adjust belt tension.

7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

10. See Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures.

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if

they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"

for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans.






AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modulating, single-duct air terminal units.


A. Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit.


and profiles, and finishes for air terminal units.



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units.




connection.


4. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.


1. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

2. Include design calculations for selecting hangers and supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:






1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and




a. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.

b. Instructions for adjusting software set points.




1. Fan-Powered-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION



B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Section 6 - Heating,

Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."

2.2 MODULATING, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS



1. Krueger.

2. Price Industries.









3. Titus.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a

protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.040-inch- thick galvanized steel, single wall.

1. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

2. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.

3. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket.

4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: AHRI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg

inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

E. Hydronic Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no

closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum

entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve. Provide

hydronic heating coils for air terminal units scheduled on Drawings.

F. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls system specified in

Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

1. Electric Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered open, spring return.

2. Electronic Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered open, spring return.

3. Electric Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with clock display, temperature

display in Fahrenheit and Celsius, and space temperature set point.

4. Electronic Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with temperature set-point display

in Fahrenheit and Celsius.

5. Pneumatic Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and

maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5

percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch

wg; and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet.

6. Electronic Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and

maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5

percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch

wg; and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet.

7. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume (VAV) controller

with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory

calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.

b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.

c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.







d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 230923

"Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

8. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for

connection of portable operator terminal.

G. Controls:

1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg inlet static

pressure.

2. System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.

H. Control Sequences:

1. Occupied:

a. On a call for cooling, airflow will increase as the damper opens towards maximum

setting to satisfy set point.

b. On a call for less cooling, airflow will decrease as the damper closes towards

minimum setting to satisfy set point.

c. On a call for heating, after terminal unit has reached minimum airflow set point,

hydronic heating coil valve will modulate toward open to satisfy set point.

2. Unoccupied:

a. Damper closes to minimum setting.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to AHRI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum

factory-set airflows,and AHRI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 5,

"Hangers and Supports" and with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.






2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and

for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.2 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and

maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.


A. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and

Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties," and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff

valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union

or flange.

3.4 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for connecting ducts to air terminal

units.

B. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Install field power to each air terminal unit electrical power connection. Coordinate with air

terminal unit manufacturer and installers.






B. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

C. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance


E. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and









Cables."

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum

factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and


B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest





equipment.






C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 STARTUP SERVICE



2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer

to achieve proper performance.

3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

4. Verify that control connections are complete.

5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

7. .

3.10 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.






AIR DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.13 - 1

SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Round ceiling diffusers.

2. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.

3. Fixed face grilles.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to

diffusers.



1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity,

model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. Actual size of

smallest diffuser indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

Actual size of smallest diffuser and grille indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For diffusers and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify

color selected. Actual size of smallest diffuser and grille indicated.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:






1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.

5. Duct access panels.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Supply diffuser: SD-3

1. Basis of design, Price RCD


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Krueger.

b. Price Industries.

c. Titus.

3. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

4. Material: Aluminum.

5. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

6. Face Style: Four cone.

7. Mounting: Duct connection.

8. Pattern: Fully adjustable.

9. Dampers: Butterfly.

B. Exhaust inlet: EG-2

1. Basis of design, Price RSG



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.


4. Finish: Baked enamel, white






5. Face Style: Double deflection, 1” blade spacing.

6. Mounting: Surface mounted.

7. Dampers: Butterfly

2.2 RECTANGULAR AND SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Supply diffuser: SD-1



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.



4. Finish: Baked enamel, white.

5. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches.

6. Face Style: Plaque.

7. Mounting: Surface.

8. Pattern: Fixed.


B. Supply diffuser: SD-2



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.






7. Mounting: T-bar.

8. Pattern: Fixed.


C. Return diffuser: RD-1








the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.






7. Mounting: T-bar.

8. Pattern: Fixed.

9. Dampers: Butterfly

D. Exhaust diffuser: EG-1



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.





6. Mounting: Surface.

7. Pattern: Fixed.


2.3 GRILLES

A. Fixed Face Grille: RG-1:



the following:

a. Krueger.


c. Titus.







3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal; spaced 3/4 inch apart.

5. Core Construction: Integral.

6. Frame: 1 inch wide.

7. Mounting Frame: Surface Mounted.

8. Mounting: Concealed.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of

Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final

locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,

locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with

installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of

dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before

starting air balancing.






CONDENSING BOILERS 235216 - 1

SECTION 235216 - CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gas-fired, water-tube floor-mounted condensing boilers, trim, and accessories

for generating hot water.




and profiles and finishes for boilers.


accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories.




connection.



A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other,

using input from installers of the items involved.



D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

E. Product Certificates:






1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of

authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic

testing of piping external to boiler.

2. CSA B51 pressure vessel Canadian Registration Number (CRN).


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Where "prorated" is

indicated, the boiler manufacturer will cover the indicated percentage of cost of replacement

parts. With "prorated" type, covered cost decreases as age of equipment increases.

1. Warranty Period for Floor-Mounted Water-Tube Condensing Boilers:

a. Heat Exchanger and Tank: Free from defects in material and workmanship.

b. Warranty Coverage: Prorated Year 0 to 5 - 100 percent; Year 6 to 7 - 50 percent;

Year 8 to 9 - 30 percent; Year 10- 10 percent 10 years from date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency in accordance with

Table 6.8.1-6 and other requirements in Ch. 6 of ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. ASHRAE 90.2 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency in accordance with Ch. 6 of

ASHRAE 90.2.

E. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B,

Appendix N.

F. Mounting Base: For securing boiler to concrete base.






2.2 FLOOR-MOUNTED, WATER-TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS


following:

1. AERCO; A WATTS Brand.

2. Laars Heating Systems Company; a subsidiary of Bradford White Corporation.

3. Lochinvar, LLC.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, water-tube, forced-draft, condensing

boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base, including insulated jacket;

flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain

connections; and controls. Units are to be for water-heating service only.

C. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel primary and secondary heat exchangers.

D. Combustion Chamber: Stainless steel, sealed.

E. Burner: Propane gas, forced draft drawing from gas-premixing valve.

F. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner-firing sequence and to prepurge and

postpurge the combustion chamber.

1. Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Motor Sizes: Large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in

service factor range above 1.0.

G. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.

H. Ignition: Direct-spark ignition or silicone carbide hot-surface ignition with 100 percent main-

valve shutoff and electronic flame supervision.

I. Integral Circulator: Cast-iron body and stainless steel impeller sized for minimum flow required

in heat exchanger.

J. Casing:

1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.

2. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.

3. Finish: Powder-coated protective finish.

4. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch- thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat

exchanger.

5. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.










2.3 TRIM - FOR HOT-WATER BOILERS

A. Include devices sized to comply with ASME B31.9.

B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit with automatic reset.

C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.

D. Pressure and Temperature Gauge: Minimum 3-1/2-inch-diameter, combination water-pressure

and -temperature gauge. Gauges shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges, so

normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range.

E. High and low gas-pressure switches.

F. Alarm bell with silence switch.

G. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.

H. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.

I. Circulation Pump: Non-overloading, in-line pump with split-capacitor motor having thermal-

overload protection and lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures

and temperatures.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and

Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."

B. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:

1. Control transformer.

2. Set-Point Adjust: All set points shall be adjustable.

3. Electric, factory-fabricated and factory-installed panel to modulate burner and control

burner-firing rate to maintain space temperature in response to thermostat with heat

anticipator located in heated space.

C. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit

burner operation.

1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum

boiler design temperature.

2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water.

Cutoff switch shall be automatic-reset type.

3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch factory mounted on boiler

combustion-air inlet.

4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm

for above conditions.






D. Building Automation System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable

building automation system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm low-water-level alarm.

b. Control: On/off operation, hot-water-supply temperature set-point adjustment.

2. A BACnet communication interface with building automation system shall enable

building automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the boiler from an

operator workstation. All monitoring and control features, which are available at the local

boiler control panel, shall also be available at the remote operator workstation through the

building automation system.


A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are shown on

Drawings and specified in electrical Sections.

B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,

transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power

connection to boiler.

1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Wiring shall be numbered and color coded to match wiring diagram.

3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway.

4. Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.

5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or

circuit breaker.

6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.

2.6 VENTING KITS

A. Kit: Complete system, ASTM A959, Type 29-4C stainless steel pipe, vent terminal, thimble,

indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant.

B. Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet

air coupling, and sealant.

2.7 CONDENSATE-NEUTRALIZATION UNITS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated and -assembled condensate-neutralizing capsule assembly of

corrosion-resistant plastic material with threaded or flanged inlet and outlet pipe connections.

Device functions to prevent acidic condensate from damaging grain system. It is to be piped to

receive acidic condensate discharged from condensing boiler and neutralize it by chemical






reaction with replaceable neutralizing agent. Neutralized condensate is then piped to suitable

drain.

B. Capsule features:

1. All corrosion-resistant material.

2. Suitable for use on all natural gas and propane boilers.

3. Includes initial charge of neutralizing agent.

4. Neutralizing agent to be easily replaceable when exhausted.

5. Inlet and outlet pipe connections.

C. Capsule Configuration:

1. Low-profile design for applications where boiler condensate drain is close to the floor.

2. Easily removed and opened for neutralizing agent replacement.

3. Multiple units may be used for larger capacity.


A. UL Compliance: Test gas-fired boilers having input of more than 400,000 Btu/h for compliance

with UL 795. Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. UL Compliance, Oil-Fired: Test oil-fired boilers for compliance with UL 726. Boilers shall be

listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. UL Compliance, Gas-Fired: Test gas-fired boilers for compliance with UL 2764. Boilers shall

be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. CSA Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with ANSI Z21.13-2017/CSA 4.9.

E. Performance Testing: Test and label boilers for efficiency to comply with AHRI 1500.

F. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,

oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion

efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

G. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, in accordance with 2017 ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Factory test boilers for safety and functionality; fill boiler

with water, and fire throughout firing range, to prove operation of all safety components.

H. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in

advance of testing.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping

and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations

before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.


3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install floor-mounted boilers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

2. Install wall-hung boilers where indicated on Drawings using suitable hangers. Comply

with manufacturer's mounting instructions.

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices specified

in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."



B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

C. Assemble and install boiler trim.

D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

E. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.


A. Comply with requirements for hydronic piping specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."

B. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of

materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in

Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.






D. When installing piping adjacent to boiler, allow space for service and maintenance of

condensing boilers. Arrange piping for easy removal of condensing boilers.

E. Install condensate drain piping to condensate-neutralization unit and from neutralization unit to

nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Install piping with a

minimum of 2 percent downward slope in direction of flow.

F. Install condensate piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall

be at least full size of connection. Install piping with a minimum of 2 percent downward slope

in direction of flow.

G. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas-

train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

H. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve, and union or

flange at each connection.

I. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

3.4 DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Boiler Venting:

1. Install flue-venting kit and combustion-air intake.

2. Comply with all boiler manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Field fabricate and install boiler vent and combustion-air intake.

4. Utilize vent and intake duct material, size, and configuration as indicated in boiler

manufacturer's instructions and to comply with UL 1738.


6. Connect boiler vent full size to boiler connections.

7. Comply with requirements in Section 235123 "Gas Vents."




and Cables."


Systems."


NFPA 70 and NECA 1.















Cables."

C. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation and I/O

control designation feeding connection.






A. Testing Agency, Owner: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections.

B. Testing Agency, Contractor: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:


1. Perform installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust

air-fuel ratio and combustion.


equipment.

a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set

points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.

b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

F. Boiler will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.







H. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified.

2. Provide not less than two hours of training.

3. Train personnel in operation and maintenance and to obtain maximum efficiency in plant

operation.

4. Provide instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are

coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Obtain Owner sign-off that training is complete.

6. Owner training shall be held at Project site.






AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - 1

SECTION 236313 - AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged air-cooled refrigerant condensers.


A. Product Data: For each air-cooled refrigerant condenser.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

2. Include equipment dimensions, weights and structural loads, required clearances, method

of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers.




connection.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers indicated, to comply with



1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for

designing vibration isolation bases.







A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in

this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers to include in


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

B. Coordinate location of refrigerant piping and electrical rough-ins.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp.

2. Trane.

3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain air-cooled refrigerant condensers from single source from single

manufacturer.




B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 34.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. Capacities and Characteristics:










1. Heat-Rejection Capacity: 40 Tons.

2. Condensing Temperature:

a. Saturated Discharge Temperature:126F.

b. Saturated Suction Temperature:45F.

c. Subcooling Temperature: 109F.

3. Ambient-Air Temperature: 95F.

4. Refrigerant Pipe Connections:

a. Number of Connections: 2.

b. Liquid Pipe Size: 2-1/8”.

c. Suction Pipe Size: 2-1/8”.

5. Fans:

a. Number of Condenser Fans: 3.

b. Condenser Fan Motor Size: 1 hp.

6. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Kilowatts: 150.

b. Volts: 460V.

c. Phase: 3.

d. Hertz: 60.

e. Maximum Circuit Ampacity: 63 A.

f. Maximum Instantaneous Current Flow during Startup: 80.

g. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: 80 A.

2.3 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser fans

and motors, and unit controls.

B. Refrigerant: R-410A.

C. Condenser Coil: Factory tested at 425 psig.

1. Tube: 1/2-inch-diameter seamless copper.

2. Coil Fin: Aluminum.

3. Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common

Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, air-over (TEAO).

b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough, so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

c. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.






D. Condenser Fans and Drives:

1. Directly driven propeller fans with aluminum or galvanized-steel fan blades, for vertical

air discharge; manufactured with permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors with

integral current- and thermal-overload protection.

2. Fan Motors:

a. Weather-proof motors with rain shield and shaft slinger.

b. Totally enclosed air-over (TEAO).

c. Variable speed.

E. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts; 115-

V control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and a non-

fused factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power

connection.

1. Fan Cycling Control: Head pressure sensors.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing.

2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or

moisture.

C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

D. Aluminum: ASTM B209.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of air-cooled

refrigerant condensers.

B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.






C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where air-cooled condensers will be

installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's

recommended clearances.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-cooled condenser refrigerant condensers on cast-in-place concrete equipment

bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in

Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory

mounted.


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Refrigerant Piping: Where indicated on Drawings, connect piping to unit with pressure-relief,

service valve, filter-dryer, and moisture indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line.

D. Apply labels to refrigerant lines in accordance with Section 230553, "Identification for HVAC



A. Install field power to each condenser unit electrical power connection.

B. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

C. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."






D. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance


E. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and







Cables."

C. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation and I/O

control designation feeding connection.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and perform the following:

a. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

b. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.

c. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.

d. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.

e. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.

f. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

2. Lubricate bearings on fan motors.

3. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.

4. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings.













1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.




proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.


equipment.

5. Verify proper airflow over coils.

F. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission

to structure.

G. Air-cooled refrigerant condensers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain air-cooled refrigerant condensers.






INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 1

SECTION 237313.13 - INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes factory-assembled, indoor air-handling units with limited features, including

the following components and accessories:

1. Casings.

2. Fans, drives, and motors.

3. Coils.

4. Air filtration.

5. Dampers.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit.


and profiles, and finishes.



3. Include unit dimensions and weight.

4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

5. Fans:

a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated.

b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Include fan construction and accessories.

d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

7. Include filters with performance characteristics.

8. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of indoor, basic, air-handling unit.









connection.

3. Detail fabrication and assembly of indoor, basic air-handling units, as well as procedures

and diagrams.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation indicated to comply with performance



1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration

isolation bases.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing

the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.


C. Startup service reports.


E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and





1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.

2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indoor, basic, air-handling

units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.






1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than one year(s) from date of


PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-

handling units and components.

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.2 MANUFACTURERS




2. Trane.

3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.3 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings;

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.

2. Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.

3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. Hermetically seal at each corner and

around entire perimeter.

B. Double-Wall Construction:

1. Outside Casing Wall: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge thick, with manufacturer's

standard finish.

2. Inside Casing Wall: G90 galvanized steel, solid, minimum 18 gauge thick.

3. Floor Plate: G90 galvanized steel, treadplate minimum 18 gauge thick.

4. Casing Insulation:










a. Materials: Glass-fiber blanket or board insulation, Type I or Type II

ASTM C1071.

b. Casing Panel R-Value: Minimum 13.

c. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch.

d. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in

casing walls, floors, or roofs of air-handling unit.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Panels and Doors:

1. Panels:

a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness

as casing.

b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement

shall allow panels to be opened against airflow.

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

d. Size: Large enough to allow unobstructed access for inspection and maintenance of

air-handling unit's internal components. At least 18 inches wide by full height of

unit casing up to a maximum height of 60 inches.

2. Doors:

a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness

as casing.

b. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to

be opened against airflow. Provide safety latch retainers on doors so that doors do

not open uncontrollably.

c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of frame.

d. Size: Large enough to allow for unobstructed access for inspection and

maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components. At least 18 inches wide by

full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 60 inches.

3. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors.

b. Coil Section: Panels.

c. Access Section: Doors.

d. Access Sections Immediately Upstream and Downstream of Coil Sections: Doors

Panels.

e. Damper Section: Doors.

f. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of

filters.

g. Mixing Section: Doors.

E. Condensate Drain Pans:






1. Location: Each type of cooling coil.

2. Construction:

a. Single-wall, galvanized-steel or noncorrosive polymer sheet.

3. Drain Connection:

a. Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with

threaded nipple on one end of pan.

b. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

4. Width: Entire width of water producing device.

5. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

2.4 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

B. Fans: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized steel; mounted on solid-steel

shaft.

1. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway.

2. Shaft Bearings:

a. Heavy-duty, self-aligning, pillow-block type with an L-50 rated life of minimum

100,000 hours according to ABMA 9.

3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with

shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

a. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll,

wheel, motor, and accessories.

4. Housings, Plenum Fans: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute

housing. Provide inlet screens for Type SWSI fans.

5. Forward-Curved, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades

with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to

flange and backplate; steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews.

6. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels (Plenum Fan Wheels): Smooth-curved inlet flange,

backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange

and backplate; steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews.

7. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation. Factory-mount fans with manufacturer's

standard vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1

inch.






8. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.

9. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide,

attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch-wide by 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized-steel

sheet.

a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics,

coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Drive, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive.

D. Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

2. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

3. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

E. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Comply with Section 262923 "Variable-Frequency

Motor Controllers."

2.5 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with AHRI 410.

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).

3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

B. Heating Coils:

1. Hot-Water Coils: Continuous circuit.

a. Piping Connections: Threaded, opposite ends of coil.

b. Tube Material: Copper.

c. Fin Type: Plate.

d. Fin Material: Aluminum.

e. Fin Spacing: 82 per foot.

f. Headers:

1) Cast iron with cleaning plugs and drain and air vent tappings extended to

exterior of unit.

2) Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.

3) Fabricated steel, with brazed joints, prime coated.

4) Provide insulated cover to conceal exposed outside casings of headers.






g. Frames: Channel frame, minimum 0.052-inch-thick galvanized steel.

h. Coil Working-Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.

i. Coating: None.

C. Cooling Coils:

1. Refrigerant Coil:

a. Tubes: Copper.

b. Fins:

1) Material: Aluminum.

c. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond.

d. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections.

e. Frames: Galvanized steel.

f. Coatings: None.

g. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.

1) Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig

2.6 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. Panel Filters:

1. Description: Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported disposable air filters with holding

frames.

2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900.

3. Media: Interlaced glass, synthetic, or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive

and antimicrobial coating.

B. Side-Access Filter Mounting Frames:

1. Particulate Air Filter Frames: Match inner casing and outer casing material, and

insulation thickness. Galvanized steel track.

a. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing device to ensure seal between gasketed

material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent

bypass of unfiltered air.

2.7 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: Comply with requirements in Section 230923.12 "Control Dampers."

B. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel

dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade

arrangement with steel operating rods rotating in bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel






frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed

4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

C. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Section 230923.12 "Control Dampers."

D. Electronic Damper Operators:

1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

2. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel

and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

3. Operator Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action

or two-position action.

c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring

mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of

limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

4. Non-spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque

of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and

breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000

fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear

release on non-spring-return actuators.

E. Mixing Section: Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly located immediately downstream of mixing

section.

F. Combination Filter and Mixing Section:

1. Cabinet support members shall hold 2-inch- thick, pleated, flat, permanent or throwaway

filters.






2.8 MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel.

2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet.

B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

C. Aluminum: ASTM B209.


A. AHRI 430 Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested

according to AHRI 430 and shall be listed and labeled by AHRI.

B. AMCA 300 and AMCA 301, or AHRI 260 Certification: Air-handling unit fan sound ratings

shall comply with AMCA 300, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory

Test Data" and AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test

Data," or with AHRI 260, "Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment."

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

D. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to minimum 450-psig internal pressure, and to minimum 300-

psig internal pressure while underwater, according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for


B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.

Replace with new insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and

electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:






1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Coordinate sizes and

locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Comply with requirements

for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."



B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and

maintenance.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

D. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to air-handling unit, allow for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to

nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install

cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113

"Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Install shutoff valve and

union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at

each coil return connection.

F. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232213 "Steam

and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping

Specialties." Install shutoff valve at steam supply connections, float and thermostatic trap, and

union or flange at each coil return connection.

G. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant

Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.



Cables."







Systems."


NFPA 70 and NECA 1.









B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power

Cables."

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE



2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing

operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-

recommended lubricants.

6. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close and maintain

minimum outdoor-air setting.

7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.

8. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.

9. Install new, clean filters.

10. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust

fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design

conditions.






2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"

for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial



3.8 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling unit

and air-distribution systems, and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units

internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets,

dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.






D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and

connections for leaks.

2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.

3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm


E. Air-handling unit and components will be considered defective if unit or components do not

pass tests and inspections.







3.10 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.






FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 238236 - 1

SECTION 238236 - FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hydronic, and finned-tube radiation heaters.




B. Shop Drawings:




connection.

3. Include details and dimensions of custom-fabricated enclosures.

4. Indicate location and size of each field connection.

5. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Color Samples for Initial Selection: For finned-tube radiation heaters with factory-applied color

finishes.

E. Color Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved:

1. Structural members, including wall construction, to which finned-tube radiation heaters

will be attached.






2. Method of attaching finned-tube radiation heaters to building structure.

3. Penetrations of fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HOT-WATER FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS



1. Quincy Hydronic Technology Inc.

2. Sterling HVAC Products; a Mestek company.

3. Trane.

B. Performance Ratings: Rate finned-tube radiation heaters according to Hydronics Institute's

"I=B=R Testing and Rating Standard for Finned-Tube (Commercial) Radiation."

C. Heating Elements: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced

aluminum fins resting on element supports. One end of tube shall be belled.

1. Tube Diameter: NPS 3/4.

2. Fin Size: 3 by 3 inches.

3. Fin Spacing: 40 per foot.

4. Number of Tiers:1.

5. Heat Output: 425 Btuh/h per ft.

6. Entering-Air Temperature: 65 deg F.

7. Average Water Temperature: 180 deg F.

8. Minimum Water Velocity: 1/2 fps.

D. Element Supports: Ball-bearing cradle type to permit longitudinal movement on enclosure

brackets.

E. Front Panel: Minimum 0.0428-inch- thick steel.

F. Wall-Mounted Back Panel: Minimum 0.0329-inch-thick steel, full height, with full-length

channel support for front panel without exposed fasteners.

G. Floor-Mounted Pedestals: Conceal insulated piping at maximum 36-inch spacing. Pedestal-

mounted back panel shall be solid panel matching front panel. Provide stainless-steel

escutcheon for floor openings at pedestals.

H. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch spacing to support front panel and element.

I. Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.










J. Damper: Knob-operated internal damper at enclosure outlet.

K. Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with tamper-resistant fastener, minimum size

6 by 7 inches, integral with enclosure.

L. Enclosure Style: Flat top.

1. Front Inlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing.

a. Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard

colors.

2. Front Outlet Grille: Extruded-aluminum linear bar grille; pencil-proof bar spacing.

a. Mill-finish aluminum.

b. Anodized finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard

colors.

c. Painted to match enclosure.

3. Enclosure Height: 21”.

4. Enclosure Depth: 4”.

M. Accessories: Filler sections, corners, relay sections, and splice plates all matching the enclosure

and grille finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive finned-tube radiation heaters for compliance with requirements for


B. Examine roughing-in for hydronic-piping connections to verify actual locations before

installation of finned-tube radiation heaters.


3.2 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.

C. Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.

D. Install access doors for access to valves.

E. Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall.






F. Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are indicated to

extend to adjoining walls.

G. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.

H. Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.

I. Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section

232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,

fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect hot-water finned-tube radiation heaters and components to piping according to

Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

1. Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and balancing valve on outlet.

C. Connect steam finned-tube radiation heaters and components to piping according to

Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 "Steam and

Condensate Heating Piping Specialties."

1. Install shutoff valve on inlet; install strainer, steam trap, and shutoff valve on outlet.

D. Install control valves as required by Section 230923.11 "Control Valves."

E. Install piping adjacent to finned-tube radiation heaters to allow service and maintenance.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections:



B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.







CABINET UNIT HEATERS 238239.13 - 1

SECTION 238239.13 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and electric-resistance heating coils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. DDC: Direct digital control.

C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.




B. Shop Drawings:




connection.

3. Include location and size of each field connection.

4. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

5. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

6. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls.

7. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.







D. Samples for Initial Selection: Finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: Finish colors for each type of cabinet unit heater indicated with

factory-applied color finishes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale,

on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from


1. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cabinet Unit-Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




2. Markel Products; TPI Corporation.

3. Trane.

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with AHRI 440.












C. Comply with UL 2021.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.4 CABINETS

A. Material: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected

by Architect.

1. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch- thick zinc coated sheet

steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam

fasteners.

2. Recessed Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.

3. Control Access Door: Key operated.

4. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch-thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 4 inches high with

leveling bolts.

2.5 FILTERS

A. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value and Average Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.2.

B. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value: According to ASHRAE 52.2.

C. Material: Pleated cotton-polyester media, MERV 7.

2.6 COILS

A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and

hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for

overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate elements in

stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.






1. Fan: Forward curved-double width, centrifugal, directly connected to motor;

thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel

fan scrolls.

2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply

with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."

3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

B. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Integral thermostat and control.

C. Electrical Connection: Factory-wired motors and controls for a single field connection.

2.8 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Cabinet:

1. Vertical, Semi-recessed: Upflow.

a. Air Inlet: Front, extruded-aluminum bar grille.

b. Air Outlet: extruded-aluminum bar grille.

B. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil:

1. Capacity:5 kW.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Single-Point Connection:

1. Volts: 208 V.

2. Phase: 1.

3. Hertz:60.

4. Full-Load Amperes: 25.0.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater

installation.







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly, seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and

applications are specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to

match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with

Drawings and room details before installation.

D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.





2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and

electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters.






WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS 238239.19 - 1

SECTION 238239.19 - WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall and ceiling heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating

coils.




B. Shop Drawings:




connection.

3. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

4. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wall and ceiling unit heaters to include in emergency,







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. King Electric.

2. Markel Products; TPI Corporation.

3. Trane.

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with

UL 2021.



2.3 CABINET

A. Front Panel: Extruded-aluminum bar grille, with removable panels fastened with tamperproof

fasteners.

B. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color selected by

Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Surface-Mounted Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet.

2.4 COIL

A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and

60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion-resistant metallic

sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-

steel hardware, and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Provide integral circuit

breaker for overcurrent protection.

2.5 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor.









B. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.6 CONTROLS

A. Controls: Unit-mounted thermostat.

B. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection with

disconnect switch.

2.7 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Refer to schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive wall and ceiling unit heaters for compliance with requirements for


B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater

installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to

match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with

Drawings and room details before installation.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."




Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP - EFP-164109


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.

3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PV: Photovoltaic.

B. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.

C. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.








1. Cerro Wire LLC.

2. Encore Wire Corporation.

3. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

4. Southwire Company.

5. WESCO.

C. Standards:


intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8

for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an

overall metallic sheath.



1. General Cable Technologies Corporation.


3. WESCO.

C. Standards:


intended location and use.

2. Comply with UL 1569.

3. RoHS compliant.

4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Circuits:
















1. Single circuit.

2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.

E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8

for stranded conductors.

F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

G. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

H. Armor: Steel, interlocked.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Stranded conductors for all types.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

F. Branch Circuits Underground: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

H. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.






B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for

Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced

conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.






3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."



1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct

connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

c. Inspect for correct identification.

d. Inspect cable jacket and condition.

e. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

f. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.






CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 1

SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Low-voltage control cabling.

2. Control-circuit conductors.

3. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are

connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from

heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products

according to NFPA 262, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in

plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less.

2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.






3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As

determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

D. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum

Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.

E. RoHS compliant.

2.2 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262.

2.3 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.






2.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS



1. Encore Wire Corporation.

2. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.

3. Service Wire Co.


B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in

raceway.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in

raceway.

D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2,

complying with UL 83 in raceway.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as

supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is

installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around

perimeter walls of the room.











2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and

form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

2. Cables may not be spliced.

3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6

inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

5. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles.

6. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

C. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those

installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified with a tag for future use.

3.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.






3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 GROUNDING

A. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for







GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS



1. Hubbell Incorporated (Burndy).

2. ILSCO.

3. nVent (ERICO).

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise

required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.










2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,

tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.

G. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex-head bolt.

I. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud

lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.

J. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex-head screw.

K. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A.

L. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with stainless-steel bolts.

a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy.

b. Listed for direct burial.

2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 5/8 by 96 inches.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: stranded conductors

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole

floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary,

install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper

conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect

ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive

insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete.

Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout.

C. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the

pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with

substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-

copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding

terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.






B. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate

insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with

branch-circuit conductors.

C. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG.

2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.

3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and

UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system

ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical

service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode

conductor and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.






2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.

F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.



1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's


3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at

ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,

and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and

their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena

that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 5 ohms.

2. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

3. Manhole Grounds: 5 ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.






HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete

Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components

for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,

but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

b. ERICO International Corporation.

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group; Metal

Framing Channels.

d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to

MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and

associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical

conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of

conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.

Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items

or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to

MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable

for attached structural element.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260529&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b1ce66838-5a19-4704-97e5-a49800d12d63%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260529&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5ba8337e2a-319a-45d2-9015-a49800d12d63%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260529&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b2de275af-d3ff-4bf7-bd6d-a49800d12d65%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260529&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5bca000928-99aa-452f-8c3f-a49800d12d66%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix






4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM

A 325.

5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for

electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports

for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum

spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted-

support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

D. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.

E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used

for 1-1/2-inchand smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems

above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in

this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be

supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading

limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of

supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid

reinforcing bars.






RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Surface raceways.

5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and attachment details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


the following:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&ulid=1747&src=altarix






1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

2. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

3. Republic Conduit.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Setscrew.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651,

rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible

external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch,

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by

authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to

lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their

conductivity.

2.2 RIDGID NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS



the following:

1. CANTEX INC.

2. Kraloy.

3. RACO; Hubbell.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b8e9fbcc4-c9f0-490e-83b0-a49800d9cc78%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b59e5d783-a532-47f0-a0af-a49800d9cc7a%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b28eaf7eb-dbf2-428e-bcac-a49800d9cc7f%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5be95a3dfe-4ae2-49d3-ad24-a49800d9cc85%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5bbe6a96f4-b189-4c88-8fbb-a49800d9cc88%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5bfa0f07ba-f8e9-44c6-8e9d-a49800d9cc8a%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix






B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and

labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application.

C. RNC: Insert type, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and

material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless

otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,

adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways

as required for complete system.

C. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS



the following:

1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.

4. Hubbell Incorporated.

5. RACO; Hubbell.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and

cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b7530b831-ffa9-4132-8859-a49800d9cc8d%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b409c5fb1-d6a0-4bae-90b6-a49800d9cc90%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5bd254aa2f-476c-4950-b61c-a49800d9cc94%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b98153b11-db89-4468-9884-a49800d9cc96%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=260533&SectionReleaseDate=&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5bb0d45660-69ba-49c8-8eb5-a49800d9cc9a%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix






F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-

hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Electrical Service Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC, concrete

encased with rebar supports.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC, direct buried with a sand

cushion a minimum of 3” surrounding conduits.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use

LFMC in damp or wet locations.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4

stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet

locations.

6. Cable Tray: FMC, Flexible Metal Conduit

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings

unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use

with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC

coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting

manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by

manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply

with NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.






F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where

requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations

for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water

pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise

indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

I. Run conduit larger than 1-inchtrade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.

Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure

raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footintervals.

1. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with

expansion fittings.

2. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all

directions.

3. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by

Architect for each specific location.

4. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in

hubs or in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:

Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.

Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.






L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating

bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of

boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inchtrade size and insulated

throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inchtrade size and larger conduits terminated with

locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove

coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a

continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inchtrade size and larger, use roll

cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line

with not less than 200-lbtensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of

pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside

raceways in use.

R. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill

them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush

steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or

surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

S. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings

or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the

interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of

refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

T. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

U. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental

temperature change may exceed 30 deg that has straight-run length that exceeds

25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground F and RMC and EMT conduit that is

located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that

has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch

per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC

conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least






0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change

for metal conduits.

3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or

structure expansion joints.

4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting

selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at

specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for

expansion movement.

5. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of

72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires,

equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for

transformers and motors.

6. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

7. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical

damage.

V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height

measured to [center][top][bottom] of box unless otherwise indicated.

W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry

block and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat

surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment

and box.

X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the

same vertical channel.

Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare

trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6

inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work

toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with

expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly

hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength.

After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final

conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal

compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at

building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for

stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.






5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at

building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose

and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12

inches on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where

conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally

a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base.

Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553


3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."






IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification of power and control cables.

2. Identification for conductors.

3. Underground-line warning tape.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Equipment identification labels.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and

inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop

Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual;






and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting

of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum

length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather-

and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends

of legend label.

2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils

thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather-

and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends

of legend label.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010-inch-thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and

cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to

identify and locate underground electrical utility lines.






2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial

operations.

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading

when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found

in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.

3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive

labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless


C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK

HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA

IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR

36 INCHES."

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by

thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay

shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.6 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking,

Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials

and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade.

Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16

inches overall.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface

preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the

phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use

colors listed below for ungrounded feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied for #10 and 12.

b. Colors for 203/110-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 403/117-V Circuits:






1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape for sizes #8 and larger:

Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from

terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last

two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate

bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

B. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded

conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

C. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

D. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:

Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation

label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and

Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment,

central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of

each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal,

monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-

high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required,

use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those

appropriate for viewing from the floor.






d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels

with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or

NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided

by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-

adhesive, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

1) Contractor shall provide typed panel directories once all work is

substantially complete and neatly print corrections in ink if

circuiting is changed after substantial completion.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Enclosed switches.

d. Power-generating units.






LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls.

2. Indoor occupancy sensors.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy

sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING SWITCHING CONTROLS

A. Ceiling-Mounted Switching Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate

power pack, to detect changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.






B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated power pack, complying

with UL 773A. Sensor is powered by the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for

13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-

mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. General Space Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc, with an

adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

6. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling.

7. Set-Point Adjustment: Equip with dead-band adjustment of 25, 50, and 75

percent above the "on" set point, or provide with separate adjustable "on" and

"off" set points.

8. Test Mode: User selectable, overriding programmed time delay to allow settings

check.

9. Control Load Status: User selectable to confirm that load wiring is correct.

10. Indicator: Two digital displays to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor

occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.



2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is

occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time-delay for turning

lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL

773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for

13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-

mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inchknockout in a standard

electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed

behind hinged door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and

normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.






8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when

selected lighting level is present.

B. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and

movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any

portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.

2. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted

on a 10-foot-high ceiling.

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR

and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of

technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls

on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any

portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and

detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in

either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a

circular area of 1000 sq. ft when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for

mounting in a single gang switchbox.


marked for intended location and application].

2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.

3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent

at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12

AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors

not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."






C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller

than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,

smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-

limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions


D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553


1. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors

at each sensor.



1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.






B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING


Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied

conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours

for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector

range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and dead-band controls to suit Owner's

operations.

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.

END OF SECTION





LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to

75 kVA.




and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,

installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment.



A. Source quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Eaton.

2. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).

3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.



C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as

verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

2. Coil Material: Copper.

F. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin

encapsulated.

G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints

that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are

easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated.










1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal

out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

E. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent

taps below normal full capacity.

F. Insulation Class, Smaller than 30 kVA: 185 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation

system with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

G. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system

with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

H. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to

IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:

1. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA.

2. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 dBA.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in



A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap

connections.

2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections.

4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage connections.

5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated voltage

connections.

6. Applied and induced tensile tests.

7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage.

8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground.

b. Low-voltage to ground.

c. High-voltage to low-voltage.






9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for

each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where

transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding

and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5

ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers

for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer

manufacturer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual

transformer provided.

B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports.

Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.

C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" or

Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" and anchor floor-mounted transformers

according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers

and Supports for Electrical Systems."

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified with concrete.

D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.






E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce

noise generation.

F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate

sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS

for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test

parameters.

B. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

C. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed

"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy

period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.

Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than

nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap

settings as test results.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.











PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

3. Load centers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

F. SPD: Surge protective device.

G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and

components indicated.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.






1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,

equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,

knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.

7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.







A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.






b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating

with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat

and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

G. Incoming Mains:

1. Location: Convertible between top and bottom.

2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main

breaker.

H. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.

a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.

b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective

devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance

applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in

gutter.

I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.

3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,

for larger conductors.

4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard.

5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard.

J. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority

having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting






and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures,

wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company

for exact requirements.

K. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,

filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: 20 percent.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 2.

2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS


following:

1. Eaton.



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


following:

1. Eaton.
















B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with

tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door

shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and

bus shall remain concealed.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


following:

1. Eaton.



B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,

and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC

rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with

transparent protective cover.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it

from all other circuits.










PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that

equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified

in NFPA 70.

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have

been subjected to water saturation.

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

D. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

F. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back

box.

G. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth. Orient steel

slotted supports vertically.

H. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque

wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.






I. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to

ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,

and connections to separate ground bars.

J. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning

signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten

directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate

complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for


E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air

circuit breakers stated in NETA ATS,

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated






3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain

temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.






WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking

wall plates.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Eaton (Arrow Hart)

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from single source


2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type.

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=262726&SectionReleaseDate=3/01/2010&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&ulid=2075&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=262726&SectionReleaseDate=3/01/2010&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b59a84289-26f1-410b-8b0c-a49800f685a2%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=262726&SectionReleaseDate=3/01/2010&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b7d00f74c-4dfd-48fc-8c4f-a49800f685a3%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?Section=262726&SectionReleaseDate=3/01/2010&DocType=FL&ToolID=1&uid=Id%5b02954fe3-849a-45b8-a4eb-a49800f685a4%5d%20Type%5bManufacturerUrl%5d&src=altarix






1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221.

2) Hubbell; HBL1221.

3) Leviton; 1221-2.

4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Three Way:

1) Cooper; AH1223.

2) Hubbell; HBL1223.

3) Leviton; 1223-2.

4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover and listed and

labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or

required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside

of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.






3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal

screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,

multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and

furnishings.






3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is

not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or

engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers

or tags inside outlet boxes.






FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Enclosed controllers.

b. Enclosed switches.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include

the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,

local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.





FUSES 262813 - 2


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures,"


1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.

2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the

Project. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Eaton (Bussmann & Edison).

2. Littelfuse, Inc.

3. Mersen USA.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source


2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage

ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC.

2. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC.

3. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC.



C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size

and with system short-circuit current levels.









FUSES 262813 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically

damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes

and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to

fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

3. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer duty.

4. Provide open-fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without

removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of

door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.






ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and

manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,

accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in




a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and

circuit breakers.

b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of

overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF and electronic format.



A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.



C. Comply with NFPA 70.






2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton.



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty:

1. Single throw.

2. Three pole.

3. 600 -V ac.

4. 1200 A and smaller.

5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses.

6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating - 120-V ac.

5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions

as satisfactory.










3.2 PREPARATION

3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the

following environmental ratings.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances

for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless


C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Tests and Inspections for Switches:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

japickett

Sticky Note






c. Verify that the unit is clean.

d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.

e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings.

f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

h. Verify correct phase barrier installation.

i. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding

surfaces.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and

circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to

portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial

Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide

calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


1. Test procedures used.

2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test

results.

3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.






MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262913.03 - 1

SECTION 262913.03 - MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual motor controllers.

2. Combination full-voltage magnetic motor controllers.

3. Enclosures.

4. Accessories.

5. Identification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. NC: Normally closed.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SCPD: Short-circuit protective device.





B. Shop Drawings: For each type of magnetic controller.







2. Indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Wire Termination Diagrams and Schedules: Include diagrams for signal, and control

wiring. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color-codes to facilitate

installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and

circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.

Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

C. Product Schedule: List the following for each enclosed controller:

1. Each installed magnetic controller type.

2. NRTL listing.

3. Factory-installed accessories.

4. Nameplate legends.

5. SCCR of integrated unit.

6. For each combination magnetic controller include features, characteristics, ratings, and

factory setting of the SCPD and OCPD.

a. Listing document proving Type 2 coordination.

7. For each series-rated combination state the listed integrated short-circuit current

(withstand) rating of SCPD and OCPDs by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For magnetic controllers to include in operation and




a. Routine maintenance requirements for magnetic controllers and installed

components.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and

MCP trip settings.

c. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.







A. Store controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

Protect controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical

damage.


A. Ambient Environment Ratings: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than23 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet for electromagnetic and manual devices.

3. The effect of solar radiation is not significant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label magnetic motor controllers to comply with UL 508 and

UL 60947-4-1.

C. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate motor controllers to comply with ICS 2.

2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Motor-Starting Switches (MSS): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action;

marked to show whether unit is off or on.


following:

a. Eaton.

b. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).

c. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.

2. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

3. Configuration: Non-reversing.

4. Surface mounting.

5. Red pilot light.










B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers (FHPMC): "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or

push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.


following:

a. Eaton.

b. Schneider Electric USA (Square D).

c. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.

2. Configuration: Non-reversing.

3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2, bimetallic class as schedule on Drawings.

5. Pilot Light: Red.

2.3 COMBINATION FULL-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLER

A. Description: Factory-assembled, combination full-voltage magnetic motor controller consisting

of the controller described in this article, indicated disconnecting means, SCPD and OCPD, in a

single enclosure.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Eaton.



C. Standard: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

D. Configuration: Non-reversing.

E. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

1. Operating Voltage: Manufacturer's standard, unless indicated.

F. Control Power:

1. For on-board control power, obtain from line circuit or from integral CPT. The CPT shall

have capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and

control devices.

G. Overload Relays:

1. Thermal Overload Relays:














a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 10 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

2. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection.

b. Sensors in each phase.

c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.

H. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

1. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to

accommodate indicated fuses.

2. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

I. MCP Disconnecting Means:

1. UL 489 and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault

currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-

circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

2. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Comply with NEMA 250, type designations as indicated on Drawings, complying with

environmental conditions at installed location.

B. The construction of the enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6.

C. Controllers in hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with UL 1203.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty except as needed to match enclosure type.

a. Push Buttons: standardb. Pilot Lights: standard






B. Motor protection relays shall be with solid-state sensing circuit and isolated output contacts for

hardwired connections.

1. Phase-failure.

2. Phase-reversal, with bicolor LED to indicate normal and fault conditions. Automatic reset

when phase reversal is corrected.

3. Under- over-voltage, operate when the circuit voltage reaches a preset value, and drop

out when the operating voltage drops to a level below the preset value. Include adjustable

time-delay setting.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Controller Nameplates: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as described in

Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems," for each compartment, mounted with

corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Arc-Flash Warning Labels:

1. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch self-adhesive equipment label for each work location included in

the analysis. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

a. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-

FLASH HAZARD,"

b. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for motor controllers,

their relationship with the motors, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install magnetic controllers on walls with tops at uniform height

indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels

bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with

Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.






D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and

distribution spools.

E. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as

shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for

motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for




1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

d. Verify the unit is clean.

e. Inspect contactors:

1) Verify mechanical operation.

2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to

manufacturer's published data.

f. Motor-Running Protection:

1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application.

2) If motor-running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance

values with values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate

from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the

lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or

NETA ATS Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to

manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published

data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.






h. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving

and sliding surfaces.

B. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS

A. System function tests shall prove the correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action

devices. Perform system function tests after field quality control tests have been completed and

all components have passed specified tests.

1. Develop test parameters and perform tests for the purpose of evaluating performance of

integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design requirements

and manufacturer's published data.

2. Verify the correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition

to design function.

3. Verify the correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.

B. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass the system function tests and

inspections.







SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 264313 - 1

SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and

control equipment.


1. Section 262416 "Panelboards" for factory installed SPDs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-

voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating.










2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values

for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model

numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.



B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials

or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,

and marked for intended location and application.



D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSOR


following:

1. Eaton.

2. Schneider Electric USA, Inc.











B. SPDs: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 1449, Type 2

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:

a. Integral disconnect switch.

b. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal

suppressor components.

c. Indicator light display for protection status.

d. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status.

e. Surge counter.


D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase

shall not be less than 200 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the

ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase,

four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

3. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA.

G. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage


B. Class 2 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18

AWG, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14

AWG, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight

as possible and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not

splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed

manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

E. Wiring:

1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables."

2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.

2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs

installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests and reconnect them

immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.


Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 - C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 - C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF- 164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI - C1001301

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures 2. Exit signs.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.



2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES

Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture with standard factory-applied finish.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with custom factory-applied finishes.

1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories involving color and finish selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire.

1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection.

F. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which equipment and luminaires will be attached.

B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.



C. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

E. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

F. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Drivers: Provide spare LED Drivers equal in quantity to 10% of the final fixture count.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.




A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Provide products as indicated on project drawings as noted in the luminaire schedule.

C. Standards:

1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. California Title 24 compliant. 3. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. 4. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled

for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. 5. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 6. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.

D. CRI of 90. CCT of 4000K.

E. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.

F. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

G. Internal driver.

H. Nominal Operating Voltage: as noted on drawings

I. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Use vinyl coated air craft cable suspended from steel ceiling joists to support luminaires.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."





1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.






EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1

SECTION 265619 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp

technology.

2. Luminaire supports.

3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire.

4. Lamps include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES

LM-79.






a. Manufacturer's Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products.

6. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring.

7. Photoelectric relays.

8. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable

for components involved.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture indicated with factory-applied

finish.

D. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of the following:

1. Luminaire.

2. Photoelectric relay.

C. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by

a qualified testing agency.


E. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and photoelectric relays to include in


1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project use manufacturers' codes.







A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient

Lighting Products and complying with applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color

consistency among luminaires.

E. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

prior to shipping.


A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with

luminaire installation.

B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.

b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.






2. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS



B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.

C. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.

D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

E. Internal driver.

F. Nominal Operating Voltage: 277 V ac.

G. In-line Fusing: On the primary for each luminaire.

H. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use.

I. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.

2.2 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory

set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time

delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources

from causing false turnoff.

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10.

2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.3 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Area and Site: As indicated in schedule.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.






B. Sheet Metal Components: Epoxy-coated steel. Form and support to prevent warping and

sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

re-lamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or

replacing lenses.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support

materials.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, roofs, canopy ceilings and overhang ceilings for suitable conditions where

luminaires will be installed.




B. Install lamps in each luminaire.

C. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

D. Supports:






1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and re-lamping.

3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.

4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls.

F. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

H. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

I. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" and 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and

wiring methods.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES

A. Aim as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.

Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,

installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied

with a 50 percent overlap.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for








A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST

standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s):

a. IES LM-5.

b. IES LM-50.

c. IES LM-52.

d. IES LM-64.

e. IES LM-72.

2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.


Village of Watkins Glen LWRP - Project Seneca 01 - C1000968 Schuyler County LWRP - Project Seneca 02 - C1001169 Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF-164109 Issued for Bid – May 7, 2020 DRI - C1001301

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 1

SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP Cable Hardware. 2. Telecommunication Outlets 3. Cabling system identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. LAN: Local area network.

E. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.





B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices."

2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

3. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.



2.3 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.2 RACEWAYS

A. Conceal raceways in walls and above ceilings.

B. Provide pullstring in each raceway.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inchclearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique,



alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.


A. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

B. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 284621.11 - 1


SECTION 284621.11 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Air-sampling smoke detectors. 5. Non-system smoke detectors. 6. Heat detectors. 7. Notification appliances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. HLI: High Level Interface.

D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

E. VESDA: Very Early Smoke-Detection Apparatus.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

a. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. b. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' control system. c. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' smoke-evacuation system. d. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

11. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding

schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram. 12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in

addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector,

ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


1.6 SAMPLE WARRANTY: FOR SPECIAL WARRANTY.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Record copy of site-specific software. g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.






1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.

2. Smoke Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

4. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamper-proofed components. 5. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 6. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with

compartments marked with fuse types and sizes. 7. Filters for Air-Sampling Detectors: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm

Level III technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an

FM Global-approved alarm company.

F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm

service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written

permission.

C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.



1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service

Agreement. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and voice

horn/strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit. 3. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

C. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.



2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.

4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

D. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit. 3. After a time-delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

1. Honeywell

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically

erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays.

d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central station-signaling system service. e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and

event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event history log.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication

zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at

fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming



and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands.

D. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

E. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A. 2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1. 3. Serial Interfaces:

a. One dedicated RS 485 port for central-station operation using point ID DACT. b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface

module (printer port). c. One USB port for PC configuration. d. One RS 232 port for VESDA HLI connection. e. One RS 232 port for voice evacuation interface.

F. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating

devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-

supply module rating.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. Honeywell

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to

communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7351&mf=04&src=wd



powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Honeywell

B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268 operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-

lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power- on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F

c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Ionization Smoke Detector:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.




2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:


E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:


3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with

the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control

circuit.

2.6 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell. 3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts. 4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or

internal faults. 5. Comply with UL 2075. 6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system. 8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.

2.7 HEAT DETECTORS

A. Honeywell

B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.




1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg for a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

E. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System:

1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F Listed for "regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.

2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control unit.

3. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit as separately identified zones.

4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Honeywell

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single- mounting

assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

D. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.




E. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

F. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

G. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Comply with UL 1480. 2. Speakers for Voice Notification: Locate speakers for voice notification to provide the

intelligibility requirements of the "Notification Appliances" and "Emergency Communications Systems" chapters in NFPA 72.

3. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 4. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 5. Mounting: surface mounted and bidirectional. 6. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

H. Exit Marking Audible Notification Appliance:

1. Exit marking audible notification appliances shall meet the audibility requirements in

NFPA 72. 2. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to all building exits. 3. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to areas of refuge

with audible signals distinct from those used for building exit marking.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices

for wired applications with normally open contacts.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

C. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632.



B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-

alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the

following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply.

5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.11 RADIO ALARM TRANSMITTER

A. Transmitter shall comply with NFPA 1221 and 47 CFR 90.

B. Description: Manufacturer's standard commercial product; factory assembled, wired, and tested; ready for installation and operation.

1. Packaging: A single, modular, NEMA 250, Type 1 metal enclosure with a tamper- resistant

flush tumbler lock. 2. Signal Transmission Mode and Frequency: VHF or UHF 2-W power output, coordinated

with operating characteristics of the established remote alarm receiving station designated by Owner.

3. Normal Power Input: 120-V ac. 4. Secondary Power: Integral-sealed, rechargeable, 12-V battery and charger. Comply with



NFPA 72 requirements for battery capacity; submit calculations. 5. Antenna: Omnidirectional, coaxial half-wave, dipole type with driving point impedance

matched to transmitter and antenna cable output impedance. Wind-load strength of antenna and mounting hardware and supports shall withstand 100 mph with a gust factor of 1.3 without failure.

6. Antenna Cable: Coaxial cable with impedance matched to the transmitter output impedance.

7. Antenna-Cable Connectors: Weatherproof. 8. Alarm Interface Devices: Circuit boards, modules, and other auxiliary devices, integral to

the transmitter, matching fire-alarm and other system outputs to message-generating inputs of the transmitter that produce required message transmissions.

C. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm

control unit or from its own internal sensors or controls and shall automatically transmit signal along with a unique code that identifies the transmitting station to the remote alarm receiving station. Transmitted messages shall correspond to standard designations for fire-reporting system to which the signal is being transmitted and shall include separately designated messages in response to the following events or conditions:

1. Transmitter Low-Battery Condition: Sent when battery voltage is below 85 percent of rated

value.

2. System Test Message: Initiated manually by a test switch within the transmitter cabinet, or automatically at an optionally preselected time, once every 24 hours, with transmission time controlled by a programmed timing device integral to transmitter controls.

3. Transmitter Trouble Message: Actuated by failure, in excess of one-minute duration, of the transmitter normal power source, derangement of the wiring of the transmitter, or any alarm input interface circuit or device connected to it.

4. Local Fire-Alarm-System Trouble Message: Initiated by events or conditions that cause a trouble signal to be indicated on the building system.

5. Local Fire-Alarm-System Alarm Message: Actuated when the building system goes into an alarm state. Identifies device that initiated the alarm.

6. Local Fire-Alarm-System, Supervisory-Alarm Message.

2.12 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide network communications for fire-alarm system according to fire-alarm manufacturer's written requirements.

B. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and

requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

C. Provide integration gateway using BACnet for connection to building automation system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,

humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before

installation.


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,

debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install seismic bracing. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inchcenters around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor.

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished

floor.

E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches above

floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"



chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex Ain NFPA 72. 5. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

G. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,

sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells

and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

J. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use

mounting arrangement and substrate connection that resists 100-mphwind load with a gust factor of 1.3 without damage.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before

making connections.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.



3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation

that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or

replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system

complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.


A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to

upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.






SITE CLEARING & EROSION CONTROL 311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING & EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Geotechnical Report

C. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.

2. Removing existing vegetation.

3. Clearing and grubbing.

4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.

5. Stripping and stockpiling rock.

6. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.

7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.

8. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally

occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas,

surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the

surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-

place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious,

and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of

subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; and free of

weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non-soil materials.

D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other

vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.

E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected

during construction and indicated on Drawings.

F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP






A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared

materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and

site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as

damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other

subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or


B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on

Owner's premises as requested by Owner.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before

site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-

control and tree-protection measures are in place.

E. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in


1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not

available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during

construction.






B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged

and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed according to requirements in

Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Follow the requirements of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).

B. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,

according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities


C. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction

activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

D. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction

until permanent vegetation has been established.

E. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during

removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Section 015639

"Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are

damaged by construction operations according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary

Tree and Plant Protection."

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Retain one of first two paragraphs below. Retain first if Owner arranges for this work; retain

second if Contractor performs this work.

B. Retain one of two subparagraphs below.

C. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

D. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

E. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than five days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.






2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative written

permission.

F. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new

construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

2. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 2 inches in diameter, obstructions, and

debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.

3. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.

4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material

unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches and

compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste

materials.

1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and

other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste

materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other

materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust

and erosion by water.

1. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.

2. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate

new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along

line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut

faces vertically.






3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste

materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.






EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. “Geotechnical Data Report” as prepared by CME Associates, Inc., dated December 4, 2019, for

geotechnical recommendations.

C. “Subsurface Exploration and Foundation Report” as prepared by CME Associates, Inc., dated

February 19, 2020, for geotechnical recommendations.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.

2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses, and plants.

3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.

5. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.

6. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.

7. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.

8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

9. Excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.

10. Permeable pavers for walkways.


1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling

topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

2. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during

construction.

3. Section 315000 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet

piling of excavations.

4. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including

preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.

5. Section 329300 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit

excavation and planting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.






B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying

pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward

capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Owner’s Representative. Authorized

additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract

provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Owner’s Representative. Unauthorized

excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Owner’s Representative, shall be

without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders

of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and

pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock-excavating equipment equivalent to the

following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping,

or blasting, when permitted:

1. Equipment for Footing, Trench, and Pit Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted

hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch-maximum-width, short-tip-radius rock

bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less

than 28,700 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf with extra-long reach

boom.

2. Equipment for Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than

230-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf breakout force with a

general-purpose bare bucket.

I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the

ground surface.

J. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix

asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete

pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.






K. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services

within buildings.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles.

2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.

3. Warning tapes.

4. Permeable Pavers

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches.

2. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color.

3. Permeable Pavers: Submit two square samples of paver units.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as

follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.



A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during earth-moving operations.


without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or


B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on

property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Owner’s

Representative.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before

beginning earth-moving operations.






D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until erosion- and sedimentation-control measures

specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing" is in place.

E. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures are in place.

F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Foot traffic.

4. Erection of sheds or structures.

5. Impoundment of water.

6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Permeable Pavers

A. Permeable Pavers shall be Gravel Fill Heavy Load TRUEGRID Pro Plus as manufactured by

TRUEGRID Pavers; 2500 Summer St. Suite 3225, Houston, TX 77007. Tel: 1-855-355-GRID,

website: www.truegridpaver.com, or approved equal.

1. AASHTO H20, HS20 Rated.

2.2 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to

ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in

any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT

according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of

optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a

1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

http://www.truegridpaver.com/






E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 294/D 2940M 0; with at least 95 percent passing a


F. Structural Fill: Lightweight sand fill; Maximum Dry Density, as determined by ASTM D698

(Standard Proctor) shall not exceed 110 pcf with 100 percent passing a ¼” sieve, not more than

50 percent passing a #40 sieve, and not more than 10 percent passing a #200 sieve.

G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a


H. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent passing a

1-inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

I. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch

sieve and zero passing a No. 8 sieve.

J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and

natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-

inch sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

K. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.

L. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.3 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater

than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test

methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

3. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.

4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made

from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with

AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.

4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.4 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL






A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting flowable concrete material produced from

the following:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate

size.

4. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

B. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 80-psi compressive

strength when tested according to ASTM C 495/C 495M.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for

marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously

inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide

and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core

encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is

buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving

operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary

protection before placing subsequent materials.






D. Ensure that adjacent hard-surfaced paving work is completed before installing permeable

paving system.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Subgrade improvement: Subgrade improvement shall occur in the presence of the qualified

special inspector. The Organic Surfacings, Existing Fill and Buried Organic Layer (where

present) and any deleterious materials, shall be completely removed from within the building

pads and ice rink pad. The Building Pad is defined as the building footprint and adjacent slabs

and sidewalks, plus a 5 foot nominal buffer, all around. The ice rink pad will include the entire

footprint of the ice rink, plus 3 feet nominal buffer, all around. Please refer to Table 1 of the

Subsurface Exploration and Foundation Report as prepared by CME Associates, Inc. dated

February 19, 2020 for approximate depth of removal required

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be

classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned

by Owner’s Representative. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to

Change in Work clauses within the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be

authorized for rock excavation.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as

rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock

excavation is earth excavation.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

1. Refer to the Geotechnical report for excavation direction within the proposed building

footprint.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose






roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that

rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and

Plant Protection."

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below

frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of

pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper, or as indicated on Drawings, than bottom

of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of

pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding

bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-

tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed

roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with

installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and

Plant Protection."

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Owner’s Representative when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Owner’s Representative determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation

and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. In the presence of the qualified inspector, proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and

pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not

less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or

saturated subgrades.






1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Owner’s Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as

directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to

Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Owner’s Representative, without additional compensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation

of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean

concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by

Owner’s Representative.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by

Owner’s Representative.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials in location approved by owner. Place, grade, and shape

stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. On-site excavated soil will consist of miscellaneous fill material and organic matter, which is

deemed unsatisfactory soil and shall not be used as fill or backfill material under the building

pads and ice rink pad.

B. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

4. Removing concrete formwork.

5. Removing trash and debris.

6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting.

7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

C. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL






A. On-site excavated soil will consist of miscellaneous fill material and organic matter, which is

deemed unsatisfactory soil and shall not be used as fill or backfill material under the building

pads and ice rink pad.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding

course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,

fittings, and bodies of conduits.

D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

E. Initial Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil

free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the

pipe or conduit.

a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on

both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or

displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength

material to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with

utilities testing.

F. Final Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade

elevation.

2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength

material to final subgrade elevation.

G. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade,

except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows (refer to Subsurface

Exploration and Foundation Report as prepared by CME Associates dated February 19, 2020

for soil fill recommendations):

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use engineered fill.

3. Under steps and ramps, use structural fill.

4. Under building slabs, use structural fill.

5. Under footings and foundations, use structural fill.






C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified

density.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. For areas of structural backfill, refer to Table 2 in section 5.6 of the Subsurface Exploration and

Foundation Report as prepared by CME Associates dated February 19, 2020.

B. Preloading: Portions of the site will require preloading. Refer to the Subsurface Exploration

and Foundation Report as prepared by CME Associates dated February 19, 2020 for subgrade

preloading direction.

C. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material

compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and

uniformly along the full length of each structure.

E. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum density weight

according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12

inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each

layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95

percent.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.






B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.

Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the

following subgrade tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-

foot straightedge.

3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 334600 "Subdrainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench.

Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage

pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in

compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides

and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry density according to

ASTM D 698.

C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated,

to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage

backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6

inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry density according to

ASTM D 698.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch-thick compacted

layers to final subgrade.

3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as

follows:

1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written

instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.

3. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades.

4. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single

layer.






5. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in

layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3

inches thick.

6. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density

according to ASTM D 1557.

3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-

on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written

instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal

thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not

less than 95 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698.

3.20 PERMEABLE PAVER INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install Permeable Paver units by placing cells face up. Sheets are preassembled in 4-foot by 4-

foot sheets are connected with friction fit interlocking connectors. No tooling is required to

connect or disconnect units. Sheets may be separated into 4 Individual 24 inch by 24-inch

pieces and reconfigured as needed. Cut units around curves and organic shapes with an

electrical handsaw. Place units to maintain a 1-inch clearance to any pre-installed object or

surface structure. Top of cells shall be between 0.25 inch to 0.5 inch below the surface of

adjacent hard-surface pavements. Utilize Permeable Pavers S-Flexural joints for undulations or

grade reversals when required by design or in freeze-thaw climates for expansion and

contraction.

C. Install Gravel Surfacing: Install Gravel into cell cavities by back dumping directly from dump

truck or from buckets mounted to tractors. Hand shoveling fill gravel into the cells is also

acceptable for smaller jobs.

1. Direct vehicles to exit the site by driving forward. Avoid sharp turns over unfilled rings.

2. Spread gravel fill using steer loaders, power brooms, blades, flat-bottomed shovels,

and/or wide “asphalt rakes” to fill the cells.

3. Compact gravel when the cells are at capacity with a roller for larger areas or vibrating

plate for smaller areas.

4. If fully covering cells, typical coverage is 0.25 inch to 0.5 inch above cells.







A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections (per Table #3 in the CME Associates, Inc. Subsurface Exploration and

Foundation Report dated February 19, 2020):

1. Continuously as grades are exposed, prior to placement of compacted fill, witness mass-

excavation, confirm complete removal of Surfacing, Existing Fill, Buried Organic Layer

and other deleterious materials, inspect exposed grade and witness a proof-roll and/or

probe and examine.

2. Continuously perform classification and testing of controlled fill material. Verify use of

proper material, density and lift thickness during placement and compaction of controlled

fill.

3. Continuously verify use of proper material, density and lift thickness during placement

and compaction of controlled fill.

4. Continuously verify that excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached

satisfactory subgrade material.

5. Examine footing bearing grade, direct undercut, conduct in-place density test on backfill

and approve bearing grade.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to

perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with

subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with

requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed

to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing

subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when

approved by Owner’s Representative.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,

ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, and ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at

the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill

layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab but in

no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every

100 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for

every 150 feet or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to

depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.22 PROTECTION






A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.

B. Permeable Pavers: Avoid sharp turns or “jack knifes” in trailered vehicles when cells are empty.

Damage due to buckling can occur. Pavers can be driven on pre-fill bey gravel trucks and

construction equipment to speed the installation process. Repair or replace damaged products

before substantial completion.

C. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent

construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner’s

Representative; reshape and recompact.

D. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally

dispose of them off Owner's property. Refer to the project plans, specifications, and NYSDEC

Part 360 Regulations in regard to unsatisfactory soil excavation and removal.

3.24 MAINTENANCE

A. Permeable Pavers

1. For gravel fill surfaces, maintain a 0.5 in (13 mm) surcharge of aggregate as a surface

wear course. Surface should be inspected from time to time to identify signs of slight cell

infill loss.

2. Monitor pavement to ensure traffic frequency and loading does not exceed the pavement

design.

3. When snow removal is required, keep a metal edged plow blade from coming in contact

with the surface during plowing operations to avoid causing damage to the units. Use a

plow blade a minimum of 1 inch above the surface and with a flexible rubber edge or

with skids on the lower outside corners so the plow blade does not come in contact with

the units.






DEWATERING 312319 - 1

SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes construction dewatering.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and controlling

surface-water runoff and ponding.


A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system, prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified

professional engineer.


2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers,

headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control

of sediment, and disposal of water.

3. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance

of dewatering system.

4. Include written plan for dewatering operations including sequence of well and well-point

placement coordinated with excavation shoring and bracings and control procedures to be

adopted if dewatering problems arise.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs and/or video recordings, show existing conditions of

adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

dewatering operations. Submit before Work begins.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in dewatering work.


A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is

available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical

engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses






conducted by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or

conclusions drawn from this data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for

dewatering according to the performance requirements.

2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain

dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to

lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to

proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

1. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control,

stability of excavations and constructed slopes, prevention of flooding in excavation, and

prevention of damage to subgrades and permanent structures.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.

3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site

improvements adjacent to excavation.

4. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning dewatering. Comply with water- and debris-disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering

operations.

1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from

ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site or surrounding area.

2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.


without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate

routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.






D. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in

Section 311000 "Site Clearing," during dewatering operations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump

equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water

disposal, and surface-water controls.

1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.

2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.

B. Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before excavating

below ground-water level.

C. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities


D. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain

dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.

3.3 OPERATION

A. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill

materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.

B. Operate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of

structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Drain water-bearing strata above

and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

1. Do not permit open sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade

softening, and slope instability.

2. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of

foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

3. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below bottom of excavation.

C. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health,

property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment

in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others.

D. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering.


A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during dewatering and maintain an

accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify

Owner’s Representative if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is

evident in adjacent construction.

B. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the

dewatering operation.






C. Prepare reports of observations.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect and maintain dewatering system during dewatering operations.

B. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.






EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - 1

SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating and backfilling and for controlling

surface-water runoff and ponding.

2. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for dewatering excavations.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Contractor Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include analysis data

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped utilities, abandoned-in-place support

and protection systems, and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.


A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative no fewer than five days in advance of proposed

interruption of utility.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner's Representative’s written

permission.

B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is

available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical

engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses

conducted by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or

conclusions drawn from the data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for

excavation support and protection according to the performance requirements.

2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS







A. Provide, design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of

supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and

superimposed and construction loads.

1. Contractor Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.

3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings,

structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation.

4. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure stability of

excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to permanent structures is

prevented.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop

during excavation support and protection system operations.

1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads,

streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.


without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate

routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that

construction and finishing of other work is not impeded.

3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING

A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade

level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not

to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of

flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of

vertical alignment.

B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as

required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.

C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.






3.3 SHEET PILING

A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock vertical

edges to form a continuous barrier.

B. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in

writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60

inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a

horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.

C. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.

3.4 TIEBACKS

A. Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks.

B. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks.

1. Have test loading observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of

excavation support and protection system.

C. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and

hydrostatic pressures.

3.5 BRACING

A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent

work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work

unless otherwise approved by Architect.

2. Install internal bracing if required to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.

3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until

permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.


A. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation

support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains

open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with

original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Owner’s Representative if changes in

elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent

construction.

B. Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that

excavation support and protection system remains stable.

C. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty performance of

excavation support and protection systems.

3.7 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS






A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed

sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to

avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and

utilities.

1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches

below overlying construction and abandon remainder.

2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in


3. Repair or replace, as approved by Owner’s Representative, adjacent work damaged or

displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.






ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. New York State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications (U.S. Customary), latest

edition.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, separation

geotextiles, unbound-aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement

shoulders.


A. Product Data: Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1. Joint sealant.

B. Hot-Mix Asphalt Designs:

1. Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each hot-mix asphalt

design proposed for the Work.

2. For each hot-mix asphalt design proposed for the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For paving-mix manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates:

1. Aggregates.

2. Asphalt binder.






3. Asphalt cement.

4. Cutback prime coat.

5. Emulsified asphalt prime coat.

6. Tack coat.

7. Fog seal.

8. Undersealing asphalt.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved

NYSDOT.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM D3666 for testing

indicated.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively

damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following

conditions are not met:

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.

2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.

3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D3910.

4. Asphalt Base Course and Binder Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and

rising at time of placement.

5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous

installations.

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D692/D692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or

cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone or

gravel.

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total

aggregate mass.






2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: Per NYSDOT Standards and Specifications.

B. Asphalt Cement: Per NYSDOT Standards and Specifications.

C. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealant: ASTM D6690, Type II, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified

bituminous sealant.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes and complying with the

following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where

Project is located.

2. Binder Course: NYSDOT Type 3.

3. Surface Course: NYSDOT Type 7

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D3910, Type 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Provide protective materials, procedures, and worker training to prevent asphalt

materials from spilling, coating, or building up on curbs, driveway aprons, manholes, and other

surfaces adjacent to the Work.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.






2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15

tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces

abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

D. Placing Single-Course Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base

mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

E. Placing Two-Course Patch Material: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt

base course mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted layer

of hot-mix asphalt surface course, finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface

course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of

1/4 inch.

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.

2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Ensure that prepared subgrade has been proof-rolled and is ready to receive paving.

Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from

substrate surfaces.

B. .05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.






3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACEMENT

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place

asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of

mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course and binder course in number of lifts and thicknesses

indicated.

2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.

3. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F.

4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated.

5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser

width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to

overlap previous strips. Overlap mix placement about 1 to 1-1/2 inches from strip to strip

to ensure proper compaction of mix along longitudinal joints.

2. Complete a section of asphalt base course and binder course before placing asphalt

surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to

remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent

segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct

joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix

asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.

2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.

3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.

4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes

work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered"

method in accordance with AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of

Paving Operations."

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement.

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.






3.7 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without

excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot hand tampers or with vibratory-plate

compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and

outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,

and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while

hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix

asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density, Marshall Test Method: 96 percent of reference laboratory density in

accordance with ASTM D6927, but not less than 94 percent or greater than 100 percent.

2. Average Density, Rice Test Method: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical

density in accordance with ASTM D2041/D2041M, but not less than 90 percent or

greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still

warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to

proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and

replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface

smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled

and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become

marked.

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce thickness indicated within the following

tolerances:

1. Base Course and Binder Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.






B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce surface smoothness within the

following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or

longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course and Binder Course: 1/4 inch.

2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.

C. Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices: Compact and form asphalt to the shapes indicated and within

a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch of height indicated above pavement surface.

3.9 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. to existing asphalt pavement and

allow to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness in accordance with ASTM D3910 and

allow to cure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.



B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined in

accordance with ASTM D3549/D3549M.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for

compliance with smoothness tolerances.

D. Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices: Finished height of traffic-calming devices above pavement

will be measured for compliance with tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and

compacted pavement in accordance with ASTM D979/D979M.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from

four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared in

accordance with ASTM D2041/D2041M, and compacted in accordance with job-mix

specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples in

accordance with ASTM D1188 or ASTM D2726/D2726M.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement,

with no fewer than three cores taken.






b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear

method in accordance with ASTM D2950/D2950M and coordinated with

ASTM D1188 or ASTM D2726/D2726M.

F. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.






CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Concrete Paving

1. Concrete Walks

2. Integrally Colored Concrete Walks

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended

hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color

selection.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.


A. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

3. Admixtures.

4. Curing compounds.

5. Applied finish materials.






6. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.

7. Joint fillers.

B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates.



A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-

mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production

facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification

Checklist").

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for

testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of full-thickness sections of concrete paving to demonstrate typical joints;

surface finish, texture, and color; curing; and standard of workmanship.

2. Build mockups of concrete paving in the location and of the size indicated or, if not

indicated, build mockups where directed by Architect and not less than 96 inches by 96

inches.



in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other

construction activities.

B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced

strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1

and the following:






1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat

water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less

than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather

conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time

of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,

provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using

liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed

ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type

materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do

not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and

source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, gray portland cement Type I/II.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or Class F.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120.






B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide

aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of

cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.

E. Color Pigment: ASTM C979/C979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-

reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and

other alkalis.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C94/C94M.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.






B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881/C881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid

curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade

complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types I and II, nonload bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of

normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field

experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete

design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain

laboratory test results that comply with or exceed requirements.

B. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight

concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum

aggregate size.

2. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum

aggregate size.

3. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum

aggregate size.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written

instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

E. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.






2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C94/C94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from

1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but

not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is

released.

2. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each

additional 1 cu. yd.

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of

water added.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for

dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of

excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction.

Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck

weighing not less than 15 tons.

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2

inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.






3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines,

grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can

remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete

without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during

concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous

laps in either direction.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with

faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to

centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed

joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at

locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving

terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do

not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.

3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to

one side of joint.






C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,

catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.

3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated.

4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated.

5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together.

6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both

sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as

indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete

thickness, as follows, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction

joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete

surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting

action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random

contraction cracks.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an

edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface

finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.


A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and

items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing

concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not

place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and

alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh

concrete after testing.






F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or

drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented

by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an

internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms.

Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with

care to prevent dislocating reinforcement joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform

surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further

disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to

required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of

slip-form paving machine during operations.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and

concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven

floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true

planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular

texture.

1. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-

finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8-inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular

to line of traffic.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing






operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches,

and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears

occurring during installation or curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair

damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch.

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8-inch, minus 1/4 inch.

3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet-long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch.

4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12

inches of tie bar.

5. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.

6. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

7. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.



B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained

according to ASTM C172/C172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction

thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.






a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional

tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method; one test for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite

sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of

three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one specimen at seven days and

two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive

compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no

compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500

psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor

within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project

identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and

inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,

concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break

for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when

test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements

have not been met, as directed by Architect.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.






3.11 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not

comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint

unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks

or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement

concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after

placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by

removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep

paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.




Clute Park Redevelopment NYS OPRHP EPF- 164109


SITE FURNISHINGS 323300 - 1

SECTION 323300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire Pit

2. Bollards.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete footings for bollards.

2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings.


A. Complete shop drawings of each item specified shall be submitted.

B. Where appropriate, and when approved by the Engineer, manufacturer’s catalogue cuts may be

substituted for shop drawings.

C. Submit assembly instruction drawings showing layout(s), connections, bolting and anchoring

details as per manufacturer’s standards.

D. Warranty Information


A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE PIT

A. Fire Pit shall be Paloform, Robata Corten Firepit, 72” Long x 24” Wide x 12 ½” High, supplied

by Paloform (https://paloform.com) Tel: 1-888-823-8883, or approved equal.

1. Material: Cast Concrete and stainless steel

2. Accessories:

a. Lid: Corten steel and lockable

b. Topping Media: Dark grey river rock

c. Woods 32555 Outdoor Remote Control with 3 remotes.

3. Finish: Corten Steel

4. Color:

a. Concrete: Charcoal concrete

b. Top: Corten Steel

5. Attachment: Freestanding

2.2 BOLLARDS

A. Fixed bollards shall be Reliance Foundry, Model R-8907, Cylindrical bollard cover with flat

top, 36” above grade height, 4 3/8” diameter supplied by Reliance Foundry Co. Ltd.

(https://www.reliance-foundry.com/) Tel: 1-877-789-3245, or approved equal.

1. Material: Stainless steel: ASTM A312, Grade TP 316

2. Finish: Satin surface finish buffed No. 6

3. Attachment: Fixed Installation in New Concrete

B. Fold down bollards shall be Reliance Foundry, Model R-8907, Cylindrical bollard cover with

flat top, 36” above grade height, 4 3/8” diameter supplied by Reliance Foundry Co. Ltd.

(https://www.reliance-foundry.com/) Tel: 1-877-789-3245, or approved equal.

1. Material: Stainless steel: ASTM A312, Grade TP 316

2. Finish: Satin surface finish buffed No. 6

3. Attachment: Fold Down Mount

4. Options: Stainless Steel Padlock

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture

of such products. The materials provided shall be of a type of proven satisfactory usage for at

least 2 years.

https://paloform.com/

https://www.reliance-foundry.com/

https://www.reliance-foundry.com/






B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use

C. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and

angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.

D. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length,

full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed

connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended, so no roughness or unevenness shows after

finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

E. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce

uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section

of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming

exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs,

barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

G. Factory Assembly: Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible to minimize field

assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations

in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

2. Directional Satin Finish: ASTM A480/A480M, No 4.

3. Dull Satin Finish: ASTM A480/A480M, No. 6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements

are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been

completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored or positioned (as noted on

plans) at locations indicated on Drawings.

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed

water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set

plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in

position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.






SOIL PREPARATION 329113 - 1

SECTION 329113 - SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils and layered soil assemblies specified by composition of the

mixes.


1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing & Erosion Control" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

2. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for placing planting soil for turf and grasses.

3. Section 329300 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be

amended or unamended soil as indicated.

C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.

D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic

material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it

is beneficial to plant growth.

E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly

decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that together

produce an environment for plant growth.

H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments,

and other materials to produce planting soil.






I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-,

and water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and statistical

evaluation of analytical data.

J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal

tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil

organic matter."

K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified

as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for

plant growth.

L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and

Recovery Act.

M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.

N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top

surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally

occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas,

surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the

surface soil can be subsoil.

Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.



1. Include recommendations for application and use.

2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.

4. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment and fertilizer

before delivery to the site, according to the following:

a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products.

b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to AAPFCO

methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's SUIP #25.

c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according

to SSSA methods, where applicable.







A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency.

B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For preconstruction soil analyses specified in "Preconstruction

Testing" Article.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated

laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

soil analyses on imported soil.

1. Notify Landscape Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when

laboratory samples will be taken.

B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on soil samples

and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer

recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil-

Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.

1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to sample

collection and labeling requirements.

1.8 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor under the

direction of the testing agency.

1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of eight representative soil samples from

varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.

2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for

Describing and Sampling Soils."

3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two, equal parts. Send half to the testing

agency and half to Owner for its records.

4. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location

system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.






1.9 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Physical Testing:

1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following methods

according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical

Methods":

a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse,

medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel) percentages for

fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes.

b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.

2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's

"Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and

Mineralogical Methods."

4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis -

Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction according to

ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor).

C. Chemical Testing:

1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil

Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using

CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis -

Part 1- Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals

including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium,

and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective

action.

4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including

aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium,

mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc.

D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of

SSSA NAPT NEC-67, including the following:

1. Percentage of organic matter.

2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.

3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).

4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.

5. Nitrogen ppm.

6. Phosphorous ppm.

7. Potassium ppm.

8. Manganese ppm.






9. Manganese-availability ppm.

10. Zinc ppm.

11. Zinc availability ppm.

12. Copper ppm.

13. Soluble-salts ppm.

14. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the

Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional

recommendations for corrective action.

15. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.

E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods

of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil

amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable

plants indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and

potassium fertilization, and for micronutrients.

1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft.

for 6-inchdepth of soil.

2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for lowering

pH according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight per 1000 sq. ft. for

6-inchdepth of soil.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing

weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and

Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,

or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,

water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen.

4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate

certificates.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: Fertile, friable soil suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative

growth. Imported Topsoil shall not contain weed seeds in quantities that cause noticeable weed

infestations in the final planting beds. Imported Topsoil shall meet the following physical and

chemical criteria:

B. Soil texture: USDA sandy loam, fine sandy loam, loam, or sandy clay loam

1. Loam borrow shall have the following mechanical analysis:

Textural Class % of Total Weight Average %

Sand (0.05 - 2.0 mm dia. range) 45 - 75 60

Silt (0.002-0.05 mm dia. range) 15 - 35 25

Clay (less than 0.002 mm dia. range) 5 - 20 15

a. The maximum size of particles shall be one-inch largest dimension. The maximum

retained on the #10 sieve shall be 15 percent by weight of the total sample.

2. pH value shall be between 5.5 and 7.0.

3. Percent organic matter (OM): 2.0-5.0-percent, by dry weight.

4. Soluble salt level: Less than 1 mm./ho/cm.

5. Soil chemistry suitable for growing the plants specified.

6. The organic content and particle size distribution shall be the result of natural soil

formation.

7. Soil shall have an observable crumb and clod structure. Soil crumbs (peds) and clods

shall be the same color on the inside as are visible on the outside.

C. Topsoil shall be a harvested soil from:

1. Naturally well-drained areas that have never been stripped before and have a history of

satisfactory vegetative growth. Comply with all Town, City and State laws and

regulations concerning the removal of topsoil from their boundaries.

2. On-site topsoil stripped, stockpiled and paid for under the work of this Contract.

3. A commercial processing facility specializing in the manufacturing of loam.

D. Topsoil shall NOT have been screened and shall retain soil peds or clods larger than 2 inches in

diameter throughout the stockpile after harvesting.

E. Topsoil shall not contain undesirable organisms; disease-causing plant pathogens; or obnoxious

weeds and invasive plants including, but not limited to, quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy,

nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial

sorrel, and bromegrass, and all other primary noxious weeds. Topsoil shall not be delivered or

used for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition.






F. Topsoil shall be free of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building

debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and

other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

G. It shall be free of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand.

H. The maximum size of any stone, clay lumps or roots shall not exceed 2-inches largest

dimension

I. The existing topsoil may be acceptable for use on this project provided it meets the above

acceptance criteria. Take samples of the existing topsoil, test in accordance with the

requirements of this Section and submit soil test reports for review and approval by the

Landscape Architect.

2.2 COARSE SAND

A. Uniformly graded medium to coarse sand consisting of clean, inert, natural grains of quartz or

other durable rock that is free of toxic and deleterious materials harmful to plant growth. Sand

shall have the following characteristics.

1. Coefficient of uniformity (D70/D20) for material passing the No. 10 Sieve shall be <3

2. pH < 7.0

3. Containing no calcium carbonate

4. USDA Silt fraction < 2.5 percent

5. USDA Clay fraction < 0.5 percent

B. ASTM C-33 Fine Aggregate with the following particle size distribution.

Sieve Sieve Size % Passing

3/8-inch 9.50 mm 100

1/4-inch 6.30 mm 96 - 100

No. 10 2.00 mm 82 - 98

No. 18 1.00 mm 50 - 80

No. 35 0.500 mm 20 - 53

No. 60 0.250 mm 28 - 61

No. 140 0.100 mm 6.5 - 35

No. 270 0.050 mm 0 – 2.5

0.002 mm 0 – 0.5

2.3 COMPOST

A. Compost used to amend planting soils and for topdressing beds shall be an aerobically

decomposed, stable, mature, humus-like material free of debris, stones greater than 0.5-inch,

metal, plastics, wood and similar inert or unwelcome contaminants.

B. It shall be commercially prepared, meeting US Compost Council STA/TMECC criteria or as

modified in this section for “Compost as a Landscape Backfill Mix Component”. Refer to.






1. Compost shall be deep brown or darker color and intended by the manufacturer for

ornamental planting purposes.

2. It shall have been screened to remove all particles >0.50 inches. 90 to 100 percent shall

pass a 3/8-inch screen.

3. It shall not have an unpleasant odor as determined by sniff test of submitted samples.

4. The ratio of carbon to nitrogen (C:N ratio) shall be between 15:1 and 25:1.

5. Salinity shall not exceed 2.0 dS/m (2.0 mmhos/cm)

6. pH: Between 6 & 8

7. Minimum organic content of 35 percent by weight.

8. Chemical contaminants, mg/kg (ppm): meet or exceed US EPA Class A standard, 40CFR

§ 503.13, Tables 1 and 3 levels.

9. Biological contaminants select pathogens fecal coliform bacteria, or salmonella, meet or

exceed US EPA Class A standard, 40 CFR § 503.32(a) level requirements.

10. Moisture content: wet weight basis 30 – 60 percent.

2.4 PLANTING SOIL MIXES FOR SPECIFIC USES

A. Planting soil for the top 18-inches of the soil profile for planting trees, shrubs, groundcover,

perennials and other ornamental plants may be approved topsoil or a blended mix of approved

coarse sand, topsoil and compost meeting the following requirements:

1. The ratio of the particle size for 80 percent passing (D80) to the particle size for 30-

percent passing (D30) shall be 15 or less. (D80/D30 < 15).

2. Maximum size shall be 2-inches largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10

sieve shall be 15-percent by weight of the total sample.

3. The organic content shall be between 5 and 8 percent by weight

4. Saturated hydraulic conductivity of the mix: not less than 2 inches per hour according to

ASTM D5856-95 (2000) when compacted to a minimum of 86% Standard Proctor,

ASTM 698

5. pH: 5.5 through 6.5 for non-acid loving plants

6. pH: 4.5 through 5.5 for Ericaceae and other acid-loving plants

B. Planting soil for general lawn areas may be approved topsoil or a blended mix of approved

coarse sand, topsoil and compost meeting the following requirements:

1. The ratio of the particle size for 80 percent passing (D80) to the particle size for 30-

percent passing (D30) shall be 10 or less. (D80/D30 < 10).

2. Maximum size shall be one-inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10

sieve shall be 20-percent by weight of the total sample.

3. The organic content shall be between 2.5 and 4-percent by weight

4. Saturated hydraulic conductivity of the mix: not less than 2 inches per hour according to

ASTM D5856-95 (2000) when compacted to a minimum of 86% Standard Proctor,

ASTM 698

C. Planting soil shall be pH adjusted for particular planting applications and shall be adjusted prior

to delivery to the Project sites as recommended by soil test results.

1. Use sulfur or ferrous sulfate to adjust pH downward to required levels.






2. When pH of planting soil must be raised to the required levels use limestone.

3. Regardless of amendment Contractor chooses to use, Contractor, not the Owner, shall be

responsible for obtaining specified pH by seeding and/or planting time.

2.5 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS: Use as applicable:

A. Ground Limestone: dolomitic limestone and contain not less than 50 percent of total carbonates

and 25 percent total magnesium with a neutralizing value of at least 100 percent. Material shall

be ground to such fineness that 40 percent will pass 100 mesh U.S. standard sieve and 98

percent will pass through 20 mesh U.S. standard sieve.

2.6 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available

phosphoric acid.

B. Pre-Plant Fertilizer

1. Complete, fertilizer made from all-natural ingredients complying with State and Federal

fertilizer laws. Fertilizer shall contain the following available plant food by weight,

unless soils test indicates a need for different composition:

Nitrogen Phosphorus Potash

Deciduous Trees and Shrubs 2% 3% 3%

Evergreen Trees and Shrubs 2% 3% 3%

C. Fertilizer: Pro Start 2-3-3 manufactured by North Country Organics, Bradford, Vermont 05033,

Tel: 802-222-4277 or approved equal.

D. Fertilizer shall be delivered in original unopened standard size bags showing weigh, analysis

ingredients and manufacturer’s name.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete

slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,

turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.

C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.






3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING

A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of 6 inches and stockpile until

amended.

B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement,

plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing

compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones,

roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand.

D. Screening: Pass unamended soil through a 2-inch sieve to remove large materials.

3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting

soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively

wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than

2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally

dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth indicated on Drawings, but not less than required

to meet finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil

or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments, except compost, and fertilizer, if required, evenly

on surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil.

2. Lifts: Apply and mix unamended soil and amendments in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in

loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 6

inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum

Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D698 and tested in-place.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly

fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.4 PLACING MANUFACTURED PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply manufactured soil on-site in its final, blended condition. Do not apply materials

or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.






B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than

2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally

dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Application: Spread planting soil to total depth indicated on Drawings, but not less than

required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is

frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Lifts: Apply planting soil in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose depth for material

compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard

Proctor density according to ASTM D698.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly

fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.5 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Application: Apply compost component of planting-soil mix 4 inches of compost to surface of

in-place planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen,

muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine

texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and

Plant Protection."

B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination.

Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting

operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Vehicle traffic.

4. Foot traffic.

5. Erection of sheds or structures.

6. Impoundment of water.

7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

C. If planting soil or subgrade is over-compacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or

deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the






subgrade as directed by Landscape Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new

planting soil.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from contamination.

Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash,

and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.

1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.






TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Seeding.

2. Hydroseeding.

3. Turf renovation.


1. Section 329300 "Plants" for trees, shrubs, ground covers, and other plants as well as

border edgings and mow strips.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and

molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,

defoliant, or desiccant.

C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,

animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents

(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified

with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

See Section 329113 "Soil Preparation" and drawing designations for planting soils.

E. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top








A. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture,

stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and

percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of

packaging.

B. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.

C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to

Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of

turf and meadows during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance

periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful

turf and meadow establishment.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the

National Association of Landscape Professionals or AmericanHort.

2. Experience: Three years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened

containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication

of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:



2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials;

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,


3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.







A. Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide

required maintenance from date of planting completion.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be

obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing

Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species:

1. Quality, Non-State Certified: Seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure,

with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not

more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

C. Proprietary seed mixes as follows:

1. Mix 1: Ernst FACW Meadow Mix as provided by Ernst Seeds, 8884 Mercer Pike,

Meadville, PA 16335, Tel: 800-873-3321

2. Mix 2: Ernst Annual Wildflower Mix as provided by Ernst Seeds, 8884 Mercer Pike,

Meadville, PA 16335, Tel: 800-873-3321

3. Mix 3: Ernst Raingarden Mix as provided by Ernst Seeds, 8884 Mercer Pike, Meadville,

PA 16335, Tel: 800-873-3321

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition:

a. 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent

potassium, by weight.

b. Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports

from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.






B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition:

a. 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat,

rye, oats, or barley.

B. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for

slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

C. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination

inhibitors.

2.4 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as

required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination

or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth

that has already germinated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting

installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,

paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within

a planting area.

2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture

content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.







C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting

area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting

soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and

plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray.

2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to

Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

B. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in place over exposed subgrade.

C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry

before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded

or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity

exceeds 5 mph.

1. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each

other.

2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.

3. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly

at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose thickness

over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.






2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft.

Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent

to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas.

E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying planting soil within 24

hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of

3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.

3.5 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, commercial fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using

equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly

blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier.

2. Spray-apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry

at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight,

and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate.

3.6 TURF RENOVATION

A. Renovate existing turf where indicated.

B. Renovate turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment

and movement of vehicles.

1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is

required.

2. Install new planting soil as required.

C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil.

D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials, such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel,

and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new

planting soil.

E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.

F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as

required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.

G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf,

and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.






I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizer required for establishing new turf and mix

thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet

finish grades.

1. Soil Amendment(s): according to requirements of Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

2. Initial Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer applied according to manufacturer's

recommendations.

J. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new turf.

K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.

3.7 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,

replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll,

regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf.

Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.

Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new

mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease.

Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of

pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey

water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or

mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly

planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall

precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified

height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of

grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades

bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet.

D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply commercial fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that provides actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area.






3.8 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand

of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage

exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue

maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.9 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations.

Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify

Owner before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat

already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of

vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted

areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and

remove after plantings are established.

D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.


A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape

Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately

after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than

the following periods:

1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or

if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.






2. Maintenance Period: 60 days from date of planting completion.






PLANTS 329300 - 1

SECTION 329300 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plants.

2. Tree stabilization.

3. Tree-watering devices.


1. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming,

pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are

affected by, execution of the Work.

2. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding,

and erosion-control materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were

grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type

and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with

twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a

well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when

removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root

mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and





PLANTS 329300 - 2

molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,

defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.

F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,

animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents

(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

H. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified

with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

I. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs,

vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

J. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the

stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the

stem or trunk.

K. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

L. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top


1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades

are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas,

and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.



B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. Compost Mulch: 1-pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags

labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each

Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate

representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

2. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches.

3. Slow-Release, Tree-Watering Device: One unit of each size required.





PLANTS 329300 - 3


A. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying

with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.

B. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to

Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of

plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful

establishment of plants.

1. Experience: Three years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements

in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

3. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable

requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position.

Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and

container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not

measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root

flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

D. Plant Material Observation: Landscape Architect may observe plant material either at place of

growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety,

cultivar, size, and quality. Landscape Architect may also observe trees and shrubs further for

size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent

defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work.

Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Landscape Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of

delivery to site.





PLANTS 329300 - 4


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing

weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with

state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:



2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials;

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,


3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.

C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from

sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not

bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide

protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery

and handling.

D. Handle planting stock by root ball.

E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over

trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging,

handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery

before moving and again two weeks after planting.

F. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If

planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate

aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep

roots moist.

1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in less than moist condition in water for two

hours. Reject plants with dry roots.

2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other

acceptable material.

3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray.

Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet

condition.





PLANTS 329300 - 5


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation

system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new

plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be

obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's

written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in

materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.


a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of

adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.

c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization and edgings.

d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of planting completion.

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.

b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the

succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at

end of warranty period.

c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or

replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for

replaced plant material.





PLANTS 329300 - 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,

shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated

on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by

transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock,

densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots,

sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is

squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing

trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are

unacceptable.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an

established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types

and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape

Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which

begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached,

waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including

genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the

plant.

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade

planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting

nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 10-gram tablets.

2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and

shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Shredded hardwood.





PLANTS 329300 - 7

2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum.

3. Color: Natural.

2.4 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum,

composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position.

Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals,

alkalis, and acids.

2.5 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as

required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination

or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth

that has already germinated.

2.6 TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Trunk-Stabilization Materials:

1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new stakes, free of knots, holes, cross

grain, and other defects, by diameter and length indicated, pointed at one end.

2. Flexible Ties: Horttie Fabric tree tie or approved equal.

2.7 TREE-WATERING DEVICES

A. Slow-Release Watering Device: Standard product manufactured for drip irrigation of plants and

emptying its water contents over an extended time period; manufactured from UV-light-

stabilized nylon-reinforced polyethylene sheet, PVC, or HDPE plastic.



the following:

a. BIO-PLEX.

2. Color: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.







PLANTS 329300 - 8

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA U1, Use Category UC4a; acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees

and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to


C. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and

conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,

paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within

a planting area.

2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with

adequate overhead clearance.

3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture

content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.

B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting

area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Landscape Architect and replace with

new planting soil.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing

plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of

soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations,

outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of

layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.





PLANTS 329300 - 9

D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Landscape Architect. Stake locations of individual trees

and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to

Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

B. Placing Planting Soil: Blend planting soil in place.

C. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting

areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with

vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom

raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further

disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling.

Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped

container-grown stock.

3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the

bottom of the root ball.

4. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level

and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.

5. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate

subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing

improvements.

6. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.

7. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's

personnel.

B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil unless


C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to

trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch-diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or

to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

D. Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage

or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.





PLANTS 329300 - 10

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to

ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to

where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare,

verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly;

do not break.

C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with

root flare 2 inches above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.

2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove

burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove

from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if

root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before

placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is

approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root

tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

a. Quantity: Two per plant.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root

flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.

2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before

placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is

approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root

tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

a. Quantity: Two per plant.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.





PLANTS 329300 - 11

E. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with

the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above

the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Landscape Architect.

C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural

and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree

leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain

natural character.

D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.7 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Upright Staking and Tying:

a. Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only

as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length

required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and

to extend one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to

avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.

2. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie

webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of

tree.

B. Trunk Stabilization by Staking and Guying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless

otherwise indicated on Drawings. Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than

4 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated.

1. Site-Fabricated, Staking-and-Guying Method: Install no fewer than three guys spaced

equally around tree.

a. Securely attach guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. Adjust spacing to

avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Provide compression spring for each

guy wire and tighten securely.





PLANTS 329300 - 12

b. Support trees with guy cable, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing

at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to

avoid rigid restraint of tree.

c. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.

d. Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.

3.8 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated on

Drawings in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs the

root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.

E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around

plants to hold water.

F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery

from transplanting shock.

3.9 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure

seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring as indicated on plans. Do not place mulch

within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

2. Organic Mulch in Shrub beds Areas: Apply 2-inch average thickness of organic mulch

extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench and over whole

surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch

within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF SLOW-RELEASE WATERING DEVICE

A. Provide one device for each tree.





PLANTS 329300 - 13

B. Place device on top of the mulch at base of tree stem and fill with water according to


3.11 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring

planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or

vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable

plantings.

B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.

Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and

pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use

of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off

foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.12 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to

authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate

applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before

each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover

areas according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat

already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.13 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by

construction operations, in a manner approved by Landscape Architect.

1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs.

2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved.

3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,

as determined by Landscape Architect.

B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy

condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction

operations that Landscape Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth

pattern.





PLANTS 329300 - 14

1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced for each tree of 6 inches or

smaller in caliper size.

2. Provide one new tree of 4-inch caliper size for each tree being replaced that measures

more than 6 inches in caliper size.

3. Species of Replacement Trees: Species selected by Landscape Architect.


A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly

condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks,

or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and

debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and

trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace

damaged plantings.

D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie

tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order

and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.


A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of

landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance

immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and

well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting completion.

B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled

employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin

maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably

healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of planting completion.






STORMWATER CONVEYANCE 334200 - 1

SECTION 334200 - STORMWATER CONVEYANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Non-pressure transition couplings.

3. Backwater valves.

4. Cleanouts

5. Manholes.

6. Catch basins.

7. Stormwater inlets.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers.

2. Catch basins. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, covers, and grates.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same

trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial

relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer.










A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes in accordance with manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins in accordance with manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by City, Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary service in accordance with requirements indicated:

1. Notify Resident Project Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Resident Project Representative’s

written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Piping in first paragraph below is available in NPS 3 to NPS 10 (DN 80 to DN 250). Joints are

coupling type.

1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.

B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 60: AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth

waterway for coupling joints.

1. Joints made using couplings in first subparagraph below are silttight.

2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.

3. Pipe: ASTM F 794, PVC profile, gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for

gasketed joints.

4. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends.

5. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain PVC pipe and fittings from single manufacturer.






B. NSF Marking: Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related

Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic storm

drain and "NSF-sewer" for plastic storm sewer piping.

C. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D3034, SDR 35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for

gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D3034, PVC with bell ends.

3. Gaskets: ASTM F477, elastomeric seals.

D. PVC Pressure Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 2241, SDR 21 PVC, with elastomeric seal gasket joints.

E. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F656.

2.3 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for

joining underground non-pressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and

corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D5926, PVC.

2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings:

1. Source Limitations: Obtain unshielded, flexible couplings from single manufacturer.

2. Description: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-resistant-

metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. PVC Cleanouts:

1. Source Limitations: Obtain PVC cleanouts from single manufacturer.

2. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser

to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

2.5 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:






1. Description: ASTM C478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision

for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated.

3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section as

required to prevent flotation.


walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated.


indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C990, bitumen or butyl rubber.

8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection.

9. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both



to finished grade is less than 60 inches.

10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and

diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole

frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring

manufacturer.

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of

manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to

indicated elevation and slope.

B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C913; designed in accordance with ASTM C890 for A-16

(AASHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions

indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to

manhole as required to prevent flotation.


4. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection.




to finished grade is less than 60inches.

6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and

diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole

frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring

manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of

manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to

indicated elevation and slope.

C. Manhole Frames and Covers:






1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch-minimum width flange

and 26-inch-diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover,

using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35 gray iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete in accordance with ACI 318, ACI 350, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, crushed gravel.

4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious

materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A1064/A1064M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

2.7 CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:

1. Description: ASTM C478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision

for sealant joints.


walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

3. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide

depth indicated.


indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.


6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring

manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total

thickness, that match 24-inch-diameter frame and grate.



into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch

basin to finished grade is less than 60inches.

9. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to

base section.






B. Designed Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C913, precast, reinforced concrete; designed

in accordance with ASTM C890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural

loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for joint sealants.

1. Joint Sealants: ASTM C990, bitumen or butyl rubber.

2. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape

matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring

manufacturer.

3. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total

thickness, that match 24-inch-diameter frame and grate.



into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch

basin to finished grade is less than 60inches.

5. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to

base section.

C. Frames and Grates: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16

(AASHTO HS20-44), structural loading. Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted

drainage openings.

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.

D. Frames and Grates: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16

(AASHTO HS20-44), structural loading. Include 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch-

minimum width flange, and 26-inch-diameter flat grate with small square or short-slotted

drainage openings.

1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and

arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout

take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where

specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,






and couplings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,

cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch

connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes

and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-

jacking process of micro-tunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, non-pressure drainage piping in accordance with the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.

2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in

direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint

system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install piping with 24 inch-minimum cover.

4. Install PE corrugate sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321.

5. Install PVC sewer piping in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ASTM F1668.


A. Join gravity-flow, non-pressure drainage piping in accordance with the following:

1. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints.

2. Join PVC sewer piping in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ASTM D3034 for

elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints.

3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with non-pressure-type flexible couplings.


A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil

pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions

to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 (450 by

450 by 300) inches (mm) deep. Set with tops 1 (25) inch(es) (mm) above surrounding earth

grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement

surface.






3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants in accordance with ASTM C891.

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written

instructions.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.

Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete in accordance with ACI 318.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to

piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use non-pressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, non-

pressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. Unshielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.

b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different

OD.

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space

between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." Arrange for

installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground

structures.

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.







A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.

Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are

within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or

repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.

2. Test completed piping systems in accordance with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice.

4. Submit separate report for each test.

5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test in accordance with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping in accordance with ASTM F1417.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within

allowances specified.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with water.






SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 1

SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.

2. Drainage conduits.

3. Geotextile filter fabrics.


A. Product Data:

1. Drainage conduits, including rated capacities.

2. Geotextile filter fabrics.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings:

1. NPS 6 and Smaller: ASTM F405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled

joints.

2. NPS 8 and Larger: ASTM F667; AASHTO M 252, Type CP; or AASHTO M 294,

Type CP; corrugated; for coupled joints.

3. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.

B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints.

2.2 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Soil materials are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."






2.3 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS

A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from

110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D4491.

B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.

1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2.

2. Styles: Flat and sock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be

installed.

B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground

structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and

damage of services.


3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.3 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing

forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not

less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide.

B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.

C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric,

to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.

D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections

with adhesive or tape.

E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation

subdrainage.

F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to

perform tests.






G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from

footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.

H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at

least 4 inches.

J. Install drainage panels on foundation walls as follows:

1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials.

2. Lay perforated drainage pipe at base of footing. Install as indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Installation" Article.

3. Separate 4 inches of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches of core. Wrap

fabric around end of remaining core.

K. Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not

exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope

away from building.

3.4 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but before

drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches between

drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and

compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.

B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.

C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric,

to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.

D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections


E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab

subdrainage.

F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to

perform tests.

G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of bottom of

slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

3.5 RETAINING-WALL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.






B. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not

less than 4 inches.

C. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections


D. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for retaining wall

subdrainage.

E. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to

perform tests.

F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from

footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.

G. Place drainage course in layers not exceeding 3 inches in loose depth; compact each layer

placed and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

H. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at

least 4 inches.

I. Fill to Grade: Place satisfactory soil fill material over compacted drainage course. Place

material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to

finish grade.


A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with

unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets,

seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other


1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36 inches


2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping level.

3. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.

4. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing

upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.

B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and

fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.

C. Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D2321.







A. Join perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings according to ASTM D3212 with loose bell-and-

spigot, push-on joints.

B. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special

couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials

and dimensions of both pipes.


A. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section Section 334200 “Stormwater

Conveyance”.

B. Cleanouts for Foundation Subdrainage:

1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at

changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.

2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch

fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place

concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set top of cleanout flush with grade.

3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch

fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place

concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches deep. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above grade.

4. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

C. Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage:

1. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at

beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in

direction of flow in piping.

2. Use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions

to cleanout flush with top of slab.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section Section 334200 “Stormwater

Conveyance”. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid-wall-piping storm drainage system.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. Comply with requirements

for underground warning tapes specified in specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."






1. Install PE warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.

2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.



1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure

free flow before backfilling.

2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are

satisfactory.

B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 CLEANING

A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work

progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place

plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
